Home

Avaya Configuring ATM and MPLS Services User's Manual

1. ATMO0037A Figure 1 12 IP Logical IP Subnet 1 30 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM ATM Address Resolution An address resolution protocol defines a mechanism that enables an IP router to use the IP address of a network device to learn the physical address of that device An Ethernet LAN uses ARP as its address resolution scheme A LIS uses an address resolution scheme called ATMARP as defined by RFC 1577 On a LAN defined as a broadcast medium a router obtains the physical address of a network device by broadcasting an ARP request In a LIS which uses a nonbroadcast ATM medium a router sends an ATMARP request to an ATMARP server Each IP interface on the LIS opens a VC to the ATMARP server and registers its IP address and ATM address Figure 1 12 on page 1 30 Using this information the server builds and maintains a table that maps LIS IP addresses to ATM addresses A router that needs the ATM address of a host on the LIS sends an ATMARP request to the server When the server returns a response containing the address the router extracts the ATM address of the host from the response and opens an SVC directly to the host using ATM UNI signaling If the server does not have an entry for the requested IP address it returns a negative acknowledgment signifying that the destination is unreachable 117374 C Rev 00 1 31 Configuring ATM and MPLS Servic
2. Physical connection SSSRRS2DSR Logical connection ATM00002 Figure 1 15 Router Redundancy 117374 C Rev 00 1 43 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Router redundancy requires at least two routers to be members of a router redundancy group One router acts as the primary router and provides normal routing bridging services The other router acts as the secondary backup router and takes over if the primary router fails All members of an ATM router redundancy group must have the following characteristics e Be the same ATM router type for example BCN BLN or System 5000 e Have the same hardware configuration including CPU and interface module types and slot and port locations of the backed up interfaces e Have the same software configuration That is you must be running the same router software version and have the same loadable modules configured e Contain both a primary configuration file and a secondary configuration file e Have at least one legacy LAN connection between the routers in the redundancy group Note Bay Networks recommends at least two legacy LAN connections between routers in the redundancy group PVC Operations and Management Concepts In most ATM networks if a PVC fails the remote device does not receive notification of the failure at the ATM layer Instead the device receives this information from a non ATM source such as a routing protocol t
3. 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window continued 11 18 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPLS Configuration Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the Default VC Transmit SCR The transmit sustainable cell rate SCR specifies the upper limit of the ATM connection conforming average rate on the transmitting side The average rate equals the total number of cells transmitted divided by the duration of the connection The default value 0 indicates that the transmit SCR is off Using the SCR you can define the future cell flow of a VC in greater detail than by using only the peak cell rate The SCR maps directly to the minimum cell rate MCR The MCR defines the minimum amount of guaranteed bandwidth allowed for the default VC on the ATM line When setting the SCR keep the following in mind e Tobe useful the SCR must not exceed the PCR e Ifyou know the average rate set the SCR approximately 10 percent higher than this value e VCs may fail to operate with SCR values lower than 128 cells s e Entering 0 for the SCR turns off this function After you determine the transmission rate of your ATM device set the sustainable cell rate within the
4. 9 14 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Setting the Give Up Time The give up time is the minimum amount of time that the MPS must wait before giving up on a pending resolution request By default the value is 40 seconds However you can set this value from 5 to 300 seconds To set the give up time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes 4 Click on MPS The MPOA Service Record window opens The MPS List window opens 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify 6 Set the Give Up Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 74 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 9 15 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Setting the Default Holding Time The default holding time is the time for which the client considers the resolution reply valid By default the value is 20 minutes Howe
5. When assigning a data encapsulation type to a PVC or group of PVCs keep the following in mind e When you add a PVC it reads and uses the data encapsulation type specified in its ATM service record e You can globally assign a data encapsulation type to all nonhybrid PVCs in a particular service record or you can assign a data encapsulation type to individual group PVCs e If you change the data encapsulation value for the service record all new PVCs that you add to that service record use the new value e You must assign a data encapsulation type to hybrid mode PVCs individually You cannot assign data encapsulation to a hybrid mode PVC using the service record e When you use the copy function the new PVC uses the data encapsulation type of the existing PVC e When running IP over a NULL encapsulated PVC service record you must change the Address Resolution parameter to None You must then add an IP adjacent host with the MAC address equal to the VPI VCI of the PVC See Configuring IP Services for information about the Address Resolution parameter 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM PVC Access Methods You can set up PVCs to access an ATM network in the following ways e Multiple PVCs per service record e One PVC per service record e Hybrid access PVCs Multiple PVCs Upper layer protocols treat each service record on an ATM network interface as a single access point
6. 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the PVC service record containing the PVC that you want to copy 5 Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 6 Click on the PVC that you want to copy 7 Click on Copy The ATM Virtual Channel Link Parameters window opens Set the VPI Number parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 21 continued 117374 C Rev 00 6 23 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this page A 22 9 Set the VCI Number parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on System responds 10 Click on OK You return to the ATM Virtual Channel Link window 11 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window 12 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 13 Click on Done 14 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window Deleting a PVC You can use the BCC or Site Manager to delete a PVC Using the BCC To delete a PVC navigate to the PVC prompt for example box atm 11 1 pvc service boston pve 11 1 0 32 and enter delete For example the following command deletes PVC 11 1 0 32 from service record boston pvc
7. Note The values for some parameters are contingent on the values of others If you change one parameter you must press the Enter or Tab key to advance from one parameter cell to another Pressing either key acknowledges any changes to a parameter If you neglect this step the Configuration Manager may not provide the appropriate option for other parameters To add a service record for PVCs complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on Add The ATM Service Record Parameters window opens Set the Data Encapsulation Type parameter to LLC SNAP NLPID or NULL Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 16 Press the Enter or Tab key to advance to the Virtual Connection Type parameter Change the Virtual Connection Type parameter to PVC Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 16 8 Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 9 Go to Enabling Protocols on an ATM Service Record on page 3 12 3 10 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Adding a Service Record
8. Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify System responds The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on ATM Signaling The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Click on Sig VC The ATM Control VC for Signaling window opens 5 Set the Xmit Sustainable Cell Rate cells s parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 60 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM Signaling Parameters window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 46 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling To change the ILMI SCR value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management Interface ILMI The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window opens Click on ILMI VC The ATM Control VC for ILMI window opens Set the Xmit Sustainable Cell Rate cells s parameter Cli
9. 117374 C Rev 00 3 31 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 11 Click on Done System responds You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 12 Click on Done 13 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window Adding Protocols to an LDP Session Record You can either add protocols immediately after you create an LDP session or you can add protocols to an existing LDP session at any time Adding Protocols to the LDP Session To add protocols to an LDP session record complete the following tasks You do this Site Manager Procedure System responds 1 Inthe Select Protocols window click on IP A check mark appears in the box for IP to add 3 Click on OK 2 Click on any other protocols that you want A check mark appears in the box for each additional protocol you select The IP Configuration window opens IP Address Subnet Mask Services for details 4 Set the following parameters Click on Help or see Configuring IP The IP address should match the local IP address that you configured for the LDP session continued 3 32 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Click on OK 6 Click on Done System
10. 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window Deleting a Service Record You can use the BCC or Site Manager to delete a LANE service record Using the BCC To delete a LANE service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter delete For example the following command deletes the LANE service record newyork lec service newyork delete atm 11 1 8 50 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To delete a LANE service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Atiributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LAN emulation service record that you want to delete 5 Click on Delete Site Manager deletes the service record 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manag
11. The LDP Session Records List window opens Specify the Local IP Address parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 79 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Specifying a Local TCP Port The local TCP port number specifies the TCP port that LDP on the label edge router LER uses to establish the TCP connection to the label switching router LSR Accept the default 8192 or enter a TCP port number from 1 to 65 535 To change the local TCP port number complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Set the Local TCP Port parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 80 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizin
12. An NHRP registration request is generated by an NHC and directed toward the local NHS The NHRP registration request is used to register address mapping data gathered by the NHC with the NHS The NHS places mapping data in its address translation cache C 2 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring NHRP for ATM Services NHRP registration reply An NHRP registration reply is generated by an NHS in response to an NHRP registration request It provides positive or negative acknowledgment of data receipt NHRP purge request An NHRP purge request can be generated by either an NHC or an NHS It requests the recipient to delete previously cached information which is now invalid NHRP purge reply An NHRP purge reply is generated by either an NHC or an NHS in response to an NHRP purge request It provides positive acknowledgment of data receipt NHRP error indication An NHRP error indication can be generated by either an NHC or an NHS It conveys error status to the sender of an NHRP message Configuring NHRP on an Unconfigured ATM Interface To configure NHRP on an unconfigured ATM interface complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Add Circuit window opens click on the ATM interface ATM1 on which you want to add NHRP 2 Click on OK The Select Connection Type window opens 3 Click on ATM The Initial ATM Si
13. Configuring ATM and MPLS Services The show lane servers command displays the ATM LAN emulation client server VCC table This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument service lt servicename gt Displays information about the specified service record only The output includes the following information Slot Conn Service Config Direct VPI Config Direct VCI Control Direct VPI Control Direct VCI Control Distributed VPI Control Distributed VCI Multicast Send VPI Multicast Send VCI Multicast Forward VPI Multicast Forward VCI Slot number on which the LAN emulation client resides Physical port number on which the LAN emulation client resides Name of the service record containing the client The virtual path identifier VPI that identifies the configuration direct VCC if it exists at the point where it connects to this LEC The virtual channel identifier VCI that identifies the configuration direct VCC if it exists at the point where it connects to this LEC The VPI that identifies the control direct VCC if it exists at the point where it connects to this LEC The VCI that identifies the control direct VCC if it exists at the point where it connects to this LEC The VPI that identifies the control distributed VCC if it exists at the point where it connects to this LEC The VCI that identifies the control distributed VCC if it exists at the point where
14. For the router the LEC always learns this entry using the control VCC the entry type is never STATIC Row status ENABLE or DISABLE For the router the status is always ENABLE Virtual path identifier VPI associated with this MAC address Virtual channel identifier VCI associated with this MAC address Remote MAC address ATM address representing the MAC address 117374 C Rev 00 B 21 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services show lane le rd arp The show lane le rd arp command displays the ATM LAN emulation client RD to ATM ARP cache table This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument service lt servicename gt Displays information about the specified service record only The output includes the following information Slot Conn Service EntryType Status VPI VCI SEG ID Br ATM Address Slot number on which the LAN emulation client resides Physical port number on which the LAN emulation client resides Name of the service record containing the client Indicates how this table entry was created LEARNED LEARNED CTRL LEARNED DATA STATIC VOL STATIC NONVOL or OTHER For the router the LEC always learns this entry using the control VCC the entry type is never STATIC Row status ENABLE or DISABLE For the router the status is always ENABLE The virtual path identifier VPI for the LEC The virtual channel identifier VCI for the LEC The segment ID
15. Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Server Forward Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables NHRP server request forwarding to other NHRP servers if the requested address resolution is not cached locally In virtually all configurations accept the default value Select Disable to disable NHRP request forwarding Accept the default Enable to enable NHRP request forwarding 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 12 Server Max Next Hop Entries Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 5 1 to 20 Specifies the maximum number of next hop entries that the server will keep If the NHRP resolution reply message has more entries the last entries will be discarded In most configurations accept the default value Setting a higher value may adversely affect performance 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 13 Server Max Pending Request Entries Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 100 1 to 100 Specifies the maximum number of pending requests that the router will queue In most configurations accept the default value Ensure that you have sufficient memory space to accommodate the number of pending requests that you specify 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 14 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path
16. Setting the ATM Router Redundancy Monitoring Timer Bay Networks ATM router redundancy uses only one ATM specific Site Manager parameter ATM Monitoring Timer Note For instructions on how to start ATM router redundancy see Starting ATM Router Redundancy on page 3 23 For instructions on how to customize all other router redundancy parameters see Configuring Interface and Router Redundancy The ATM monitoring timer specifies the amount of time in milliseconds ms that the secondary router waits before beginning the process of becoming the primary router By default if the primary router experiences a loss of signal it waits 3000 ms for the signal to return If the signal does not return within that time the secondary router begins the process of becoming the primary router You can set the ATM monitoring timer to any value from 1 to 65 535 ms To set the ATM monitoring timer complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Configure ATM Router The Router Redundancy Circuit window Redundancy opens 4 Set the ATM Monitoring Timer parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 75 5 Click on OK You return to the Edit ATM Connec
17. 3 Click on ATM Signaling The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens Click on Sig VC The ATM Control VC for Signaling window opens Set the Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 62 Click on Done Click on Done You return to the ATM Signaling Parameters window You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done Click on Done You return to the Select ConnectionType window You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 52 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling To change the maximum transmit SDU size for the ILMI control VC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters Interface ILMI window opens 4 Click on ILMI VC The ATM Control VC for ILMI window opens 5 Set the Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 62 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click
18. 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 6 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Specifying the Maximum Number of SVC Applications You can specify the maximum number of SVC applications that you want to operate on the circuit The number of applications corresponds to the number of LANE or IP RFC 1577 clients allowed for the circuit By default you can have up to 20 SVC applications on the circuit However you can specify a value from 1 to 32767 Using the BCC To change the maximum number of SVC applications navigate to the signaling prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 and enter svc applications maximum lt integer gt integer is a value from 1 to 32767 For example the following command sets the maximum number of SVC applications on the ATM circuit to 100 signaling 11 1 svc applications maximum 100 signaling 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 5 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To modify the maximum number of SVC applications on the circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on ATM Signaling The Edit ATM Connector windo
19. 9 20 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Where to Go Next Use the following table to determine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about ATM concepts Chapter 1 Learn about MPLS concepts Chapter 2 Start ATM or MPLS Chapter 3 Change default settings for ATM interface Chapter 4 parameters Change default settings for ATM signaling Chapter 5 parameters Change default settings for ATM PVC service record Chapter 6 and PVC parameters Change default settings for classical IP service Chapter 7 record parameters Change default settings for LAN Emulation client Chapter 8 service record parameters Change default settings for the ATM router Chapter 10 redundancy parameter Change default settings for MPLS parameters Chapter 11 Obtain information about Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B Configure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 117374 C Rev 00 9 21 Chapter 10 Customizing ATM Router Redundancy Bay Networks routers support warm standby router redundancy This type of redundancy protects a network from the irrecoverable failure of an entire router For general information about router redundancy see ATM Router Redundancy Concepts on page 1 43 This chapter describes how to customize an ATM router redundancy configuration 117374 C Rev 00 10 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services
20. Configuring ATM and MPLS Services BayRS Version 13 10 Site Manager Software Version 7 10 BCC Version 4 10 Part No 117374 C Rev 00 November 1998 Bay Networks Where Information Flows Bay Networks Where Information Flows 4401 Great America Parkway 8 Federal Street Santa Clara CA 95054 Billerica MA 01821 Copyright 1998 Bay Networks Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA November 1998 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Bay Networks Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that license A summary of the Software License is included in this document Trademarks BCN BLN BN FRE and Bay Networks are registered trademarks and BayRS BCC Connection Management System System 5000 and the Bay Networks logo are trademarks of Bay Networks Inc All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions
21. Disabling and Reenabling a Classical IP Service Record By default you enable a classical IP service record when you add it to the interface However you can disable or reenable a specific service record at any time Disable the service record to stop traffic flow over it and any of its VCs Otherwise enable the service record Using the BCC To disable a classical IP service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 classical ip service dallas and enter state disabled For example the following command disables the service record classical ip service dallas state disabled classical ip service dallas To reenable the service record navigate to the prompt and enter state enabled For example the following command reenables the service record classical ip service dallas state enabled classical ip service dallas 7 2 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Classical IP Service Records Using Site Manager To disable or reenable a classical IP service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the classical IP service
22. SVC service records show atm signaling The show atm signaling command displays all ATM interfaces whether or not they have signaling enabled or disabled and what version of signaling they are running This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments slot lt s ot gt lt connector gt Displays information about the specified slot or slot connector pair only service lt servicename gt Displays information about the specified service record only The output includes the following information Slot lt Module gt Conn The slot module and connector number of the ATM circuit Signaling Whether signaling is enabled or disabled on the interface Sig Version The signaling version that the interface is using 117374 C Rev 00 Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command show atm stats vcs The show atm stats vcs command displays the ATM interface VC statistics table for the ATM routing engine ARE This table contains statistical information for all ATM VCs on the router or specific information based on the filters you use This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments slot lt s ot gt lt connector gt service lt servicename gt Vpi vci Displays statistical information about the specified slot or slot connector pair only Displays statistical information about the specified service record only Displays statistical information for t
23. Table 1 2 lists all supported protocols for standard PVCs and SVCs using LLC SNAP NLPID NULL LANE 802 3 or LANE 802 5 data encapsulation Table 1 2 Protocols Supported for Standard PVCs and SVCs PVC Using LLC SNAP NLPID or NULL SVC Using LLC SNAP or NULL RFC 1577 SVC Using LANE 802 3 SVC Using LANE 802 5 Bridge IP Bridge Bridge Spanning Tree RIP Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Native Mode LAN BGP Native Mode LAN IP IP OSPF IP RIP RIP IPv6 RIP OSPF EGP BGP BootP BGP OSPF IPX OSPF BootP RIP SAP BootP Router Discovery Source Routing IGMP IGMP SR Spanning Tree DVMRP DVMRP Translate LB NetBIOS NetBIOS LLC2 DECnet IV DECnet IV DLSw VINES VINES APPN IPX IPX RIP SAP RIP SAP OSI XNS Source Routing RIP XNS SR Spanning Tree AppleTalk Translate LB LLC2 XNS DLSw RIP XNS AppleTalk 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Caution Ethernet and token ring emulated LANs can support different protocols When adding a protocol to a LANE service record with an unspecified emulated LAN type ensure that the protocols you add are supported by the emulated LAN Ethernet or token ring that you want to join Things to Remember When enabling protocols on a service record keep the following in mind A PVC service record requires that you add at least one PVC for the service record to operat
24. The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Click on MPS The MPS List window opens 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify 6 Set the Keep Alive Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 72 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window continued 117374 C Rev 00 9 11 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 8 Click on Done System responds You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the Keepalive Lifetime The keepalive lifetime is the length of time that an MPOA Client MPC can consider a KEEP_ALIVE packet as valid By default the value is 35 seconds However you can set this value from 3 to 1000 seconds To set the keepalive lifetime complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens Click on MPOA Server Attributes 4 Click on MPS The MPOA Service Record wind
25. You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Set the Num Stat Enquiries ReXmitted parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 54 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Disabling and Reenabling Restarts By default signaling sends restart messages automatically when a link comes up from being in a down state However you can specify whether or not you want signaling to send these restarts messages To disable automatic restart messages navigate to the signaling prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 and enter send restart disabled For example the following command disables restart messages on the ATM connector signaling 11 1 send restart disabled signaling 11 1 5 24 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling To reenable automatic restart messages navigate to the signaling prompt and enter send restart enabled For example the following command reenables restart messages on the ATM connector signaling 11 1 send restart enabled signaling
26. click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management Interface ILMI The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window opens Set the ILMI Get Timer parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 56 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the ILMI Get Request Retry Count The ILMI Get Request retry count specifies the number of times the circuit can retransmit the ILMI GET_REQUEST message before it considers the link down By default the circuit can retransmit three ILMI GET_REQUEST messages However you can set the number of retries to a value from 1 to 100 Using the BCC To change the ILMI Get Request retry count value navigate to the ILMI prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi 11 1 and enter get retry count lt integer gt integer is the count value that you want the timer to use 117374 C Rev 00 5 29 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services For example the following command changes the ILMI Get Request retry count to 6 ilmi 11 1 get retry count 6 ilmi 11 1 Using Site Manager To change the ILMI Get Request retry count value
27. if the router experiences a loss of signal it waits 3000 ms for the signal to return If the signal does not return within that time the secondary router begins the process of becoming the primary router Instructions Accept the default 3000 or enter another value MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 17 1 34 117374 C Rev 00 A 75 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services OAM Parameters This section describes ATM PVC Operations and Management OAM parameters Parameter OAM Loopback Enable Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC Default Disable Options Enable Disable Function Specifies whether or not the ATM PVC sends OAM loopback cells Instructions Select Enable if you want the ATM PVC to send OAM loopback cells Select MIB Object ID Disable if you do not want the ATM PVC to send OAM loopback cells 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 31 Note You must configure OAM loopback on all PVCs on a service record for the feature to function properly Service record status is based on the OAM loopback status of all PVCs on the service record Parameter OAM Loopback Cell Interval Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC Default 5 Options 1 to 255 seconds Function Specifies the OAM loopback cell interval in seconds This value specifies how often an ATM PVC sends an OAM loop
28. you enter ethernet 2 1 and as many parameter value pairs as needed italic text Indicates file and directory names new terms book titles and variables in command syntax descriptions Where a variable is two or more words the words are connected by an underscore Example If the command syntax is show at lt valid_route gt valid_route is one variable and you substitute one value for it screen text Indicates system output for example prompts and system messages Example Set Bay Networks Trap Monitor Filters separator gt Shows menu paths Example Protocols gt IP identifies the IP option on the Protocols menu vertical line Separates choices for command keywords and arguments Enter only one of the choices Do not type the vertical line when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both 117374 C Rev 00 XXV Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Acronyms AAL ABR AFI AIS ALC ARE ARP ATM BFE B ISDN BUS CLP CPCS CS CSU DCE DDN DSU DTE ELAN ER FIB HEC IETF ILI ILMI IP ATM adaptation layer available bit rate authority and format identifier alarm indication signal adaptation layer controller ATM Routing Engine Address Resolution Protocol asynchronous transfer mode Blacker front end encryption Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network broadcast and unknown server cell
29. 13 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window You return to the Select Connection Type window 14 Click on Done Defining IP Static Routes for LDP You return to the Configuration Manager window If you intend to use IP static routes over MPLS you must define the IP static route prefix and the route mask for LDP Note You can configure IP static routes before or after you configure MPLS For information on static routes or how to configure them see Configuring IP Services To define LDP static routes complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 System responds The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on the session record that you configured Site Manager allows only one LDP session record 5 Click on Static Route The LDP Static Route List window opens continued 3 36 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 6 Click on Add System responds The Static Route Parameters window opens 7 Set the following parameters Destination Route Prefix Route Mask Click on Help
30. ADD PARTY REJECT or RELEASE message the circuit clears the party Using the BCC To change a timer value navigate to the signaling timers prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 timers 11 1 and enter lt timer_name gt lt integer gt timer_name is the BCC name for the timer see Table 5 1 for the names and descriptions of signaling timers integer is the time value in seconds that you want the timer to use For example the following command changes the disconnect timer to 8 seconds timers 11 1 disconnect timer 8 timers 11 1 5 20 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signaling To change a signaling timer value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Set one or more of the following timers T303 T308 T309 T310 T313 T316 T316c T322 TDisc T398 T399 Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 45 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type win
31. ATM Signaling 20 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Specifies the minimum percentage of buffer memory necessary to enable a new call Accept the default 20 or select another percentage 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 11 A 42 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter VPI Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Function Specifies the virtual path identifier VPI for the signaling VC The signaling VC is a dedicated VPI VCI pair reserved for signaling messages Instructions Accept the default value 0 or enter a value from 0 to 255 MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 13 Caution The signaling VC 0 5 and the ILMI VC 0 16 are reserved These VCs remain in an operational state as long as signaling is enabled on the ATM interface Because most ATM devices use these VPI VCI pairs for signaling Bay Networks recommends that you not change these values 117374 C Rev 00 A 43 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID VCI Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 5 1 to 65535 Specifies the virtual channel
32. An alphanumeric string up to 20 characters in length Specifies the value that the router compares with the source NBMA ATM address to determine whether the source NBMA address is valid If the NBMA address is not valid the router maps the source protocol address to the corresponding NBMA address using DNS In most configurations accept the default value If using other than the default enter an alphanumeric string that represents the NBMA address associated with the source protocol address 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 19 Max Next Hop Cache Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 16 16 to 1024 Specifies the maximum size of the next hop cache In most configurations accept the default value Specifying a higher value uses more buffer space resulting in less memory for other system requirements 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 20 Max QOS Cache Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 16 16 to 1024 Specifies the maximum number of socket pair to filter and flow specification mapping entries to be held in the QoS cache In most configurations accept the default value Specifying a higher value uses more buffer space resulting in less memory for other system requirements 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 21 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Pa
33. Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Num Stat Enquiries ReXmitted Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 3 1 to 100 Specifies the number of STATUS ENQUIRY messages retransmitted before the link is considered down Accept the default 3 or enter a value from 1 to 100 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 37 Num Messages Sec for Call Pacing Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 0 0 to 2147483647 Specifies the maximum number of signaling messages the interface can transmit per second The default value 0 turns off this feature Accept the default value 0 or enter a value from 1 to 2147483647 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 40 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID ILMI signaling parameters define the SNMP timers and retry limits for registration with the ATM switch For control VC parameter descriptions see Signaling and ILMI Control VC Parameters on A 58 Enable Configuration Mana
34. LOF failure state LOS receiving Loss of Signal LOS failure state Loopback looping the received signal TestCode receiving a test pattern LowSignal low signal 117374 C Rev 00 show lane clients Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command The show lane clients command displays the ATM LAN emulation client running config info table This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument service lt servicename gt Displays information about the specified service record only The output includes the following information Slot Conn Service LecID State Fail Code Cfg Src LAN type Max Data Frm Size ELAN Name Proxy Primary addr Cfg Server addr LE Server addr Slot number on which the LAN emulation client resides Physical port number on which the LAN emulation client resides Name of the service record containing the client LEC ID that the LE server LES assigns during the join state State for the LEC INITIAL LECSCONNECT CONFIGURE JOIN INITIAL_REG BUSCONNECT or OPERATIONAL Status code from the last failed configure or join response Indicates whether this LEC used the LAN emulation configuration server LECS and if so what method is used to establish the configuration direct VCC VIAILMI KNOWNADR CFGPVC or NO LECS Data frame format this client is now using Unspecified IEEE 802 3 or IEEE 802 5 Maximum data frame size this client is now using
35. Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Configuration Mode Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC Automatic Automatic Manual Indicates whether this LAN emulation client configures automatically that is uses information from the LECS or manually that is uses information from the LAN Emulation Parameters window Accept the default Automatic if you want this client to configure automatically Select Manual if you do not want the router to autoconfigure 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 5 Emulated LAN Type Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC Unspecified Unspecified IEEE8023 IEEE8025 Specifies the data frame format this client uses when it joins an emulated LAN Clients that use automatic configuration mode use this parameter in their LE_CONFIGURE_REQUEST frames to specify the LAN type Clients that use manual configuration mode use this parameter in their LE_JOIN_REQUEST frames to specify the LAN type If you select manual configuration mode you must set the emulated LAN type to either IEEE8023 or IEEE8025 Accept the default Unspecified if you want the client to obtain the LAN type from the LAN emulation configuration server LECS when it joins an emulated LAN Select IEEE8023 if you
36. PRM In AAL 5 only a trailer attaches to the data from the upper layer protocols to create a CS PDU AAL 5 divides the protocol data unit PDU into a 48 octet SAR PDU however it does not add an SAR header and trailer This 48 octet SAR PDU becomes the payload of the ATM cell Figure 1 5 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Service Service data unit SDU class AAL 5 convergence a su sublayer Trailer AAL layer AAL5 SAR PDU layer as wea layer mcer Note AAL 5 does not attach an SAR header or trailer to the PDU ATM0005A Figure 1 5 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 Service Records and Virtual Circuits ATM devices communicate using virtual circuits VCs These VCs transmit and receive ATM cells containing upper layer protocols Bay Networks ATM routers use service records to provide a way of creating logical interfaces within the physical ATM interface for these upper layer protocols In essence these service records allow you to Organize multiple VCs into logical groups Create direct point to point connections Assign delete and modify upper layer protocols for just one PVC or for a group of VCs at any given time 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Supported Protocols Depending on the data encapsulation type and virtual connection type PVC or SVC you choose for the service record the router supports various protocols
37. See LEC components 1 34 concepts 1 33 to 1 38 Configuration Server LECS described 1 34 customizing 8 48 9 8 enabling protocols for 1 11 parameters descriptions of A 27 to A 36 retry counters modifying 8 32 to 8 42 server LES described 1 34 states 1 36 to 1 38 timers modifying 8 32 to 8 42 LAN emulation configuration server described 1 34 LAN emulation server See LES LAN Emulation Version 2 enabling disabling 8 49 parameter description A 36 LANE encapsulation defined 1 13 See also data encapsulation LDP adding 3 31 configuring TCP for 3 38 traffic parameters modifying default VC 11 18 LDP default VC parameters descriptions of A 84 to A 93 LDP parameters descriptions of A 79 to A 82 LDP static routes customizing 11 29 LE client See LEC LE Config Server ATM Address parameter description A 36 specifying for LEC 8 48 LE Server ATM Address Network Prefix parameter A 37 LE Server ATM Address User Part parameter A 38 LE Server ATM Address entering 8 17 LE Server Name parameter A 38 LE server name changing 8 21 117374 C Rev 00 LEC configuring for MPS 3 15 described 1 34 enabling disabling 8 15 LE Server ATM Address assigning 8 17 owner specifying 8 16 service records defining 3 5 LECS address described 1 34 specifying for LEC service 8 48 specifying for MPS 9 8 LECS ATM Address Network Prefix parameter A 70 LECS ATM Address User Part parameter A 71 LECS connect state
38. Set the ILMI VPI parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 55 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Changing VCI Numbers By default the VCI for the signaling control VC is 5 and the VCI for the ILMI control VC is 16 However you can change the VCI number to any value from 1 to 65535 Using the BCC To change the signaling VCI number navigate to the signaling prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 and enter vei lt integer gt integer is the VCI number that you want the signaling VC to use 5 38 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling For example the following command changes the signaling VCI number to 32 signaling 11 1 vei 32 signaling 11 1 To change the ILMI VCI number navigate to the ILMI prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi 11 1 and enter vei lt integer gt integer is the VCI number that you want the ILMI VC to use For example the following command changes the ILMI VCI number to 32 ilmi 11 1 vei 32 ilmi 11 1 Using Site Manager To change the signaling VCI number complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manage
39. Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Site Manager window choose Tools The Tools menu opens Choose Router Redundancy The Router Redundancy menu opens Choose Member Configuration Select the primary configuration file The file selection window opens ay AJV N Click on Open File The Configuration Manager window opens 6 Choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 7 Choose Router Redundancy The Router Redundancy menu opens 8 Choose Member Configuration The R R Member Global Parameters Configuration window opens 9 Set the Primary Configuration File Path parameter Click on Help or see Configuring Interface and Router Redundancy for details 10 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 11 Choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 12 Choose Router Redundancy The Router Redundancy menu opens 13 Choose Clear Site Manager clears all protocols except router redundancy from circuits with router redundancy configured 14 Choose File The File menu opens 15 Choose Save As The Save Configuration File window opens 16 Enter a file name for example a oha sec You return to the Configuration Manager and click on Secondary Save window 117374 C Rev 00 3 27 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Downloading Member Configuration Files to the Routers After creating a primary an
40. The maximum AAL CPCS SDU value defines the maximum packet size in bytes that you intend the default VC to transmit or receive Setting the Transmit SDU Size The maximum AAL CPCS transmit SDU size specifies the maximum packet size in bytes that you intend this VC to transmit Bay Networks recommends that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes Most packets fall well within this limit To change the transmit AAL CPCS SDU size complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify System responds The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS 3 Click on LDP Click on Default VC The Edit MPLS Connector window opens The LDP Session Records List window opens The Default VC Record Parameters window opens Set the AAL Cpcs Transmit Sdu Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 91 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 11 25 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Setting the Receive SDU Size The maximum AAL CPCS receive SDU size specifies the maximum packet size in byte
41. These protocols use a single network address to send all traffic destined for the network to the ATM network interface Figure 1 6 shows a conceptual drawing of multiple PVCs accessing an ATM network through each service record ATM physical interface Site A Site C Upper layer protocol Site D Site E I I i AM0018B Figure 1 6 Multiple PVCs per Service Record Configuring multiple PVCs per service record uses network addressing most efficiently Although you need to configure each PVC manually you need only define and associate protocols with the ATM network service record All the PVCs that you configure for a given ATM service record carry the protocols that you select and configure to run on that service record 117374 C Rev 00 1 17 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Note When you configure multiple PVCs per service record all PVCs use the data encapsulation type that you set for the ATM service record See Data Encapsulation Methods on page 1 12 for more information A configuration using multiple PVCs per service record works best in either fully meshed environments or in nonmeshed environments where systems not directly connected to each other have no need to communicate You can configure multiple PVCs per service record as long as you do not need to separate protocols by PVC that is all PVCs accept the same protocols There are however ways to configure upper layer protocols such as IP o
42. This value sets the maximum number of times the sender can transmit a BGN END RS or ER PDU Accept the default 4 or enter a value from 1 to 20 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 8 1 13 Max PD Before Poll Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Signaling AAL SAAL 25 1 to 120 Specifies the SSCOP maximum poll data PD value This value sets the maximum value of the poll data state variable before transmitting a poll PDU The poll data state variable increments upon transmission of a sequenced data SD PDU and resets to 0 upon transmission of a poll PDU Accept the default 25 or enter a value from 1 to 120 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 8 1 14 A 66 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Max STAT PDU Elements Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Signaling AAL SAAL 67 Odd integer from 3 to 119 Specifies the SSCOP maximum STAT PDU value This value sets the maximum number of list elements allowed in a STAT PDU The sending device uses the value of this parameter for segmentation purposes When the number of list elements exceeds this value the STAT message segments As a general rule the default value 67 causes the STAT PDU to fill six ATM cells using AAL 5 Accept the default 67 or enter an odd integer from 3 to 119 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 8 1 15
43. Transmit SDU For example if your VC accepts packets that are less than 4608 bytes long set your MBS value from 45 to 50 cells 11 20 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPLS Configuration To change the transmit burst size for the default VC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Xmit Burst Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 88 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 11 21 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Setting the Default VC Receive PCR The transmit peak cell rate PCR specifies the upper traffic limit in cells s that the MPLS ingress connection can accept The default value 0 indicates that the PCR is attempting to run at line rate To change the receive PCR for the default VC complete the following task
44. VCs may fail to operate with SCR values lower than 128 cells s Entering O for the SCR turns off this function The E 3 framing mode setting affects the maximum SCR After you determine the transmission rate of your ATM device set the sustainable cell rate within the specified range Enter 0 to turn off this function 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 9 A 60 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Xmit Burst Size cells Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling gt Sig VC or Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI gt ILMI VC 40 1 to 65535 Specifies the maximum number of sequential cells allowed on a VC at the peak cell rate before the VC must relinquish bandwidth to other VCs When setting the MBS you should select a value larger than the largest packet that your control VC can transmit that is the Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU Size For example if your VC accepts packets that are less than 2358 bytes long PVC default set your MBS value from 45 to 50 cells Set a value in the specified range 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 10 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function In
45. When you disable the flush protocol the data for a specific MAC address automatically begins flowing over a new VCC when the path switching delay time elapses For instructions on disabling the flush protocol see Modifying Flush Protocol Variables on page 8 44 By default the LEC waits a maximum of 6 seconds after sending a frame over an existing VCC before it switches to a new VCC However you can set the path switching delay to a value from 1 to 8 seconds Using the BCC To change the path switching delay navigate to the LANE service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter path switching delay lt value gt value is the number of seconds from 1 to 8 that you want the LEC to wait after sending a frame over an existing VCC before switching to a new VCC For example the following command changes the path switching delay to 8 seconds lec service newyork path switching delay 8 lec service newyork 8 42 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To change the path switching delay complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM
46. accept the default value To ensure that you always have recent client information specify a low value Such a low value however will cause additional network traffic because more frequent NHRP registration requests result If you specify a higher value network traffic will decrease at the expense of less current cache information If using other than default values ensure that this value is greater than the value of the Client Reg Interval parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 7 Client Request Timeout Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 3 1 to 100 Specifies the maximum amount of time that the NHRP client waits to receive a reply from an NHRP server In most configurations accept the default value If using other than the default value specify a value large enough to account for propagation delays between the NHRP client and remote NHRP servers as well as any other typical processing delays 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 8 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Client Request Retry Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 3 1 to 20 Specifies the number of times that the NHRP client g
47. also called cell switching through the ATM network relies on the establishment of logical connections between ATM devices ATM is a connection oriented service This means that an ATM device cannot transmit information until it establishes a connection with a receiving device These connections consist of virtual channels virtual paths and transmission paths A virtual channel is a logical connection between two communicating ATM devices Each virtual channel can carry a different protocol or traffic type The virtual channel transports cells that have a common identifier the VCI that is part of the cell header You can establish virtual channels permanently or set them up dynamically allowing the network to adjust itself to the traffic demand 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM A virtual path is a set of virtual channels between a common source and destination The virtual channels in a virtual path are logically associated with a common identifier the virtual path identifier VPI that is part of the cell header You can base cell switching on either the VPI alone or on a combination of the VPI and VCI Virtual paths enable you to separate network transport functions into those related to an individual logical connection virtual channel and those related to a group of logical connections virtual path A transmission path is a physical connection that comprises several virtual paths each
48. complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens Click on Delete MPLS Site Manager asks whether you really want to delete MPLS from the interface Click on Yes Site Manager deletes MPLS from the interface You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 3 39 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Where to Go Next Use the following table to determine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about ATM concepts Chapter 1 Learn about MPLS concepts Chapter 2 Change default settings for ATM interface Chapter 4 parameters Change default settings for ATM signaling Chapter 5 parameters Change default settings for ATM PVC service record Chapter 6 and PVC parameters Change default settings for classical IP service Chapter 7 record parameters Change default settings for LAN Emulation client Chapter 8 service record parameters Change default settings for Multi Protocol over ATM Chapter 9 server parameters Change default settings for the ATM router Chapter 10 redundancy parameter Change default settings for MPLS parameters Chapter 11 Obtain information about Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B C
49. e All but the last two intervals that is all intervals except the current interval and the previous interval The previous interval that is the last complete interval All of the intervals total The number of C bit errored seconds CESs for each interval category The number of C bit severely errored seconds CSESs for each interval category The number of unavailable seconds UASs for each interval category The number of C bit coding violations CCVs for each interval category 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services DS3 Plicp Stats Circuit Interval SEFSs UASs Status Name of the circuit associated with this line A historical breakdown of intervals including The current interval incomplete All but the last two intervals that is all intervals except the current interval and the previous interval The previous interval that is the last complete interval All of the intervals total The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs for each interval category The number of unavailable seconds UASs for each interval category Indicates the line status of the interface The possible status values are NoAlarm no alarm present RRAI receiving yellow remote alarm indication TRAI transmitting yellow remote alarm indication RAIS receiving Alarm Indications Signal AIS failure state TAIS transmitting AIS failure state LOF receiving Loss of Frame
50. for example X 25 because it provides no error protection or flow control Instead ATM relies on the source and destination devices to perform error recovery functions such as retransmission of lost packets 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Cell Header After dividing the data into 48 byte segments for transmission the end device that is the ATM data service unit channel service unit DSU CSU or native ATM device attaches the required header information Figure 1 2 5 byte 48 byte header information field Bits 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Generic flow control GFC Virtual path identifier VPI 1 Virtual path identifier VPI Virtual channel identifier VCI 2 Virtual channel identifier VCI 3 Bytes sy Cell loss Virtual channel identifier VCI l Payload type PT l priority 4 Header error control HEC 5 ATM0002A Figure 1 2 ATM Cell Header The fields in each ATM cell header provide all the information necessary for networking These fields include the following e Generic flow control GFC The first 4 bits of the cell header contain the GFC The GFC controls traffic flow onto the ATM network by controlling the user to network interface UNT e Virtual path identifier VPI The next 8 bits of the cell header that is the last half of byte 1 and the first half of byte 2 contain the VPI The VPI specifies a virtual path on the physical ATM link See the ne
51. for further processing 2 4 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding MPLS The MPLS Network The MPLS network Figure 2 2 consists of two major components e Label switching router LSR e Label edge router LER 100BASE T 100BASE T LSR LER VE LER Oo J S LSR NJ MPLS network 3888388883888388 aml EME 8883883833888388 38 i LSR 100BASE T 10BASE T Key Label switching router LSR Label edge router LER Virtual connection 10BASE T 100BASE T ATMO0057A Figure 2 2 Sample MPLS Network 117374 C Rev 00 2 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Label Switching Router A label switching router LSR is a router that contains all label switching interfaces The LSR controls MPLS forwarding in the MPLS network An LSR performs table lookup on received packets and based on the packet label forwards the packet or packet stream to the specified outgoing interface The LSR swaps the labels of the packet headers before transmitting the packets to the MPLS network Note An ATM LSR currently consists of an ATM switching device that works in conjunction with a UNIX Ultrasparc workstation running Solaris and LDP For information about how to configure an ATM LSR refer to the documentation provi
52. indicating the rejection of the SETUP message from the network If the circuit does not receive one of these messages within the allotted time it transmits the SETUP message again If the circuit still does not receive a response it clears the connection continued 117374 C Rev 00 5 15 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Table 5 1 Signaling Timer Descriptions continued BCC Name release tx timer Site Manager Name T308 Default Value 30 Range 1 to 180 Description Specifies the Release Sent timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit sends a RELEASE message to initiate clearing of an SVC Sending a RELEASE message places the network in the Release Request state The Release Sent timer stops when the circuit receives from the network either a RELEASE message that is both the circuit and the network sent RELEASE messages at the same time or a RELEASE COMPLETE message If the timer expires before the circuit receives one of these messages the circuit transmits the RELEASE message again If the circuit still does not receive a response the circuit releases the call reference and begins a restart procedure datalink connect timer T309 1 to 540 Specifies the SAAL Data Link Connect timer value in seconds This timer begins when a signaling AAL malfunction occurs The SAAL Data Link Connect timer stops when the circuit reestablishes
53. set the SCR approximately 10 percent higher than this value VCs may fail to operate with SCR values lower than 128 cells s Entering O for the SCR turns off this function The E 3 framing mode setting affects the maximum SCR Instructions After you determine the transmission rate of your ATM device set the sustainable cell rate within the specified range Enter 0 to turn off this function MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 9 A 24 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Xmit Burst Size cells Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC 40 1 to 65535 Specifies the maximum number of sequential cells allowed on a VC at the peak cell rate before the VC must relinquish bandwidth to other VCs When you set the MBS you should select a value larger than the largest packet your PVC or control VC can transmit that is the Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU size For example if your VC accepts packets that are less than 2358 bytes long PVC default set your MBS value from 45 to 50 cells Set a value in the specified range 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 10 Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU Size Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attribute
54. show classical ip table B 1 show dsx3 circuits B 11 show dsx3 current B 12 show dsx3 history B 15 show lane clients B 19 show lane configuration B 20 show lane data vcs B 20 show lane le arp B 21 continued 117374 C Rev 00 B 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Command Page show lane le rd arp B 22 show lane les B 23 show lane macs B 23 show lane servers B 24 show lane stats B 25 show sonet circuits B 26 show sonet current B 27 show sonet history B 30 show atm interfaces The show atm interfaces command displays the ATM interface table This table contains information about all ATM interfaces on the router or specific information based on the filters you use This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments slot lt s ot gt lt connector gt enabled disabled Displays information about the specified slot or slot connector pair only Displays information for only those interfaces enabled on the router or on the specified slot or slot connector pair Displays information for only those interfaces disabled on the router or on the specified slot or slot connector pair The output includes the following information Slot Conn Circuit State VPCs VCCs Slot number on which the interface resides Connector number of the interface Circuit name assigned to the interface State of the ATM line Up Down Init initial
55. that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Set the Enable Disable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 15 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Disabling and Reenabling User Part Autogeneration By default when you add an SVC service record that is a LANE or classical IP service record the user part autogeneration feature is enabled However you can disable or reenable this feature on an individual service record at any time For information about setting the end station identifier for user part autogeneration see Autogenerating ATM Addresses on page 4 18 Using the BCC To disable the user part autogeneration feature navigate to the LANE service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter autogenerate disabled 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services For example the following command disables user part autogeneration on the service record newyork lec service newyork autogenerate disabled lec service newyork To reenable
56. window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the SSCOP Maximum STAT PDU Value The SSCOP maximum STAT PDU value sets the maximum number of list elements allowed in a STAT PDU The sending device uses this value for segmentation purposes When the number of list elements exceeds this value the STAT message segments As a general rule the default value 67 causes the STAT PDU to fill six ATM cells using AAL 5 You can set this value to any odd integer from 3 to 119 Using the BCC To change the maximum number of list elements allowed in a STAT PDU navigate to the SSCOP prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 sscop 11 1 and enter stat pdu elements maximum lt integer gt integer is the maximum number of elements any odd number from 3 to 119 allowed in a STAT PDU For example the following command changes the maximum number of STAT PDU elements to 81 sscop 11 1 stat pdu elements maximum 81 sscop 11 1 5 66 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signaling To change the maximum number of list elements allowed in a STAT PDU complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on Signaling AAL SAAL The Edit ATM Connector
57. 1 11 Rules for Editing Protocols 0 a E E T area eames 1 12 Data Encapsulation Mee cesiciccoecsstesscarensiedacveammivcceesmeleninehninedenaadenteumdaneaidy 1 12 LANE EGS Ul GON ariosiienai oni ai 1 13 LEGISNAP Bina Sula On nonan E E 1 13 NULE Erie aN sa A ens 1 14 NCAR EAE ON ocean Cases rna R ERR 1 14 117374 C Rev 00 v Selecting a Data Encapsulation Method ccccccccesssseeeesssteeeeeessteeeeesssteeeeesseee 1 14 Selecting LLC SNAP Encapsulation cccceeneeeee e raui ae TS Selecting NULL Encapsulation VC Based Multiplexing cceeeeeeee 1 15 Encapsulaton Ula for PYCO ounri a aAa aa aa a 1 16 PVC Access Methods mene ere cree P ETE PE A mene ere Paes MURDE PI ES nasia dee EA t oe aan T cals ep A N E TE E TE T 1 18 Pond eS PVCS iinom E a ate decd E 1 19 Using Hybrid PYGs for Transparent Bridging sisssssiiinicciiassonsnainiiinannis 1 21 SVC Access Methods PT Das ane pected T E TE EIT 1 22 ASSIGNING ATM AGQOSSOS acccsosserccctesntadacommmedcrnammedcietamereccsammpacdiemmircetecameactedame 1 22 Entering an ATM Address Network Prefix cccccseccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeereeeaeens 1 23 Entering an ATM Address User Part eN T cine PEET ar 1 23 PET E Pa aN a ae eet ee i apc ae tase ca ea ceeas ela aie tak cet ci Sea 1 23 Jeng te FOR oranana a buat 1 24 Using the SC sinomina E EA EEE Ea 1 25 Lemo WeB a arria A endian 1 26 ARP and Inverse ARP Support GS Ge
58. 1 39 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services The MPC monitors traffic flows between a local source and remote destinations When traffic volume between a source and a destination exceeds a preconfigured threshold level for example x packets to the same network layer address in y seconds the MPC attempts to set up an SVC between the source and destination workstations In attempting to set up an SVC the MPC first looks in a local cache of network layer to ATM address mappings If the MPC finds the destination address in its local cache it immediately begins to establish the SVC If it fails to locate the destination address in the local cache it generates an MPOA address resolution request to an adjacent MPOA server MPOA router The MPOA router is a collection of logical functions that map network layer addresses to ATM addresses The MPOA router maintains tables of adjacent network layer IP MAC layer and ATM addresses in addition to standard routing tables derived from a routing protocol generally OSPF or RIP MPOA routers communicate over NHRP to map network layer addresses to ATM addresses BayRS provides MPOA router functionality to map IP addresses to their ATM counterparts MPOA server The MPOA server MPS is a logical function that mediates between local MPCs and the MPOA router It receives MPOA address resolution requests from MPCs and passes them to the MPOA routing function The MPOA router using NHRP resolves the add
59. 11 1 Pacing Calls You can define how the circuit paces its calls By default this feature is set to 0 off the circuit transmits call setups at line rate However you can set this value from 0 to 2 147 483 647 calls per second To change how the circuit paces its calls complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify System responds The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Set the Num Messages Sec for Call Pacing parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 54 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 25 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Defining ILMI In a switched ATM network an ATM device must register its ATM address with an ATM switch The router uses the Interim Local Management Interface ILMI to send and receive initial registration data to and from an ATM switch Using a series of ILMI SNMP set and get commands the router 1 Initializes its ATM address table for the interface the switch also initializes its address
60. 2 seconds sscop 11 1 poll timer 20 sscop 11 1 5 62 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signaling To change an SSCOP SAAL timer value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Signaling AAL SAAL The ATM Signaling AAL Records List window opens Set one or more of the following parameters Poll Timer Keep Alive Timer No Response Timer Connection Control Timer Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 64 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window Defining PDU Values SSCOP SAAL allows you to customize several values that control PDUs Setting the SSCOP Maximum Connection Control Value The SSCOP maximum connection control value sets the maximum number of times the sender can transmit a BGN END RS or ER PDU By default the sender can transmit up to four of these messages However you can set this parameter to any value from 1 to 20 messages 117374 C Rev 00 5 63 Configuring ATM and MPLS Ser
61. 29 Starting MPLS 3 30 Deleting MPLS from the Interface 3 39 Where to Go Next 4 For overview information about ATM see Chapter 1 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM For overview information about MPLS see Chapter 2 Understanding MPLS 117374 C Rev 00 3 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Starting Configuration Tools Before configuring ATM refer to the following user guides for instructions on how to start and use the Bay Networks configuration tool of your choice Configuration Tool User Guide Bay Command Console BCC Using the Bay Command Console Site Manager Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager Starting ATM Services You can use the BCC or Site Manager to start ATM on the router using default values for all parameters Using the BCC To start ATM on a router using the BCC 1 Add ATM to the configuration 2 Enable ATM signaling if you plan to define either a LANE or classical IP service record 3 Define an ATM service record 4 If you defined a PVC service record add at least one virtual circuit to that service record 5 Enable protocols on the ATM service record 3 2 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Adding ATM to the Configuration To add ATM to the configuration navigate to the top level prompt and enter atm slot lt s ot_number gt module lt module_number gt con
62. 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Vc Range Minimum VCI parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 86 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 16 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPLS Configuration Specifying the Default VC VCI Maximum Range The default VC VCI maximum range identifies the largest virtual channel number that MPLS can use when creating SVCs The VCI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 16 VCI bits This bit range allows for channel identifiers from 32 to 65 535 To specify a maximum VCI number complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify 2 Click on MPLS System responds The Select Connection Type window opens The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Vc Range Maximum VCI parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 86 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Sess
63. 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 43 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To change the ILMI PCR value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters Interface ILMI window opens 4 Click on ILMI VC The ATM Control VC for ILMI window opens 5 Set the Xmit Peak Cell Rate cells s parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 59 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 44 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Setting the SCR The sustainable cell rate SCR is the upper bound on the conforming average rate of an individual PVC or control VC The average rate is the number of cells transmitted over the link divided by the duration of the connection The duration of the connection is the total amount of time it takes from connection setup to connection
64. 97 Server Max Pending Request Entries parameter NHRP A 97 Server Negative Caching parameter NHRP A 100 Server Negative TTL parameter NHRP A 101 Service Name parameter A 21 service record parameters descriptions of A 15 to A 21 service records adding classical IP 3 11 adding LANE 3 11 adding PVC 3 10 customizing classical IP 7 1 LEC LANE 8 1 PVC 6 1 data encapsulation types for 3 9 defined 1 9 defining classical IP 3 4 LEC 3 5 PVC 3 4 117374 C Rev 00 deleting classical IP 7 10 LEC LANE 8 50 MPOA 9 20 PVC 6 6 enabling disabling classical IP 7 2 LEC LANE 8 2 MPLS LDP 11 2 MPOA 9 2 PVC 6 2 Set Retry Count See ILMI Set Retry Count Set Timer See ILMI Set Timer Setup Sent timer See T303 show atm interfaces command B 2 show atm line command B 3 show atm services command B 6 show atm signaling command B 6 show atm stats vcs command B 7 show atm vcs command B 8 show classical ip configuration command B 9 show classical ip interface command B 9 show classical ip stats command B 10 show classical ip table command B 10 show commands B 1 show dsx3 circuits command B 11 show dsx3 current command B 12 show dsx3 history command B 15 show lane configuration command B 20 show lane data vcs command B 20 show lane le arp command B 21 show lane le rd arp command B 22 show lane les command B 23 show lane macs command B 23 show lane servers command B 24 s
65. AIS alarm from the switch it alerts the upper layer protocol that the ATM link is down it does not wait for an OAM loopback response from the remote device After receiving an AIS alarm the router sends a remote defect indication RDI response to the switch to indicate that it received the alarm The switch continues to send AIS alarms until the link is operational again If the router does not receive an AIS alarm for 3 seconds it declares the link operational and begins sending traffic again 117374 C Rev 00 1 45 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services For More Information For more information about ATM refer to the following documents ATM Forum ATM User Network Interface Specification Version 3 0 September 1993 ATM Forum LAN Emulation Over ATM Version 1 0 January 1995 Bellcore Document SR NWT 001763 Issue 1 Preliminary Report on Broadband ISDN Transfer Protocols December 1990 FA NWT 001109 Broadband ISDN Transport Network Elements Framework Generic Criteria December 1990 FA NWT 001110 Broadband ISDN Switching System Framework Generic Criteria December 1990 De Prycker M Asynchronous Transfer Mode Solution for Broadband ISDN Ellis Horwood Limited 1991 Grossman D E Hoffman F Liaw A Malis A Mankin and M Perez ATM Signaling Support for IP over ATM RFC 1755 Network Working Group February 1995 Handel R and M Huber Integrated Broadband Networks An Introduction to
66. BCC To disable a PVC service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 pvce service boston and enter state disabled For example the following command disables the PVC service record pvc service boston state disabled pvc service boston To reenable a PVC service record navigate to the prompt and enter state enabled For example the following command reenables the PVC service record pvc service boston state enabled pvc service boston 6 2 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Using Site Manager To disable or reenable a PVC service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the PVC service record that you want to modify Set the Enable Disable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 15 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Defining the Service Record MTU The MTU is the largest po
67. Configuration Mode on page 8 8 If you select automatic configuration mode you do not need to enter a LES address The LE client receives the LES ATM address from the LAN emulation configuration server LECS You can configure a prioritized list of up to four LES addresses per LAN emulation client After you assign the list of addresses the LEC references the list and attempts to access the first LES address entry you created If this attempt is unsuccessful the LEC attempts to connect to the next LES address and so on When the LEC reaches the last address in the list it starts again at the beginning of the list until it successfully joins an emulated LAN Using the BCC To specify a LES address navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter les name lt name gt address lt address gt name is a text string that you assign to identify the LES address is the full LES ATM address For example the following command creates a LES with the name primary and the address 3900000000000000000000000000000000abcdef lec service newyork les name primary address 39000000000000000000 00000000000000abcdef les primary 117374 C Rev 00 8 17 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To specify a LES address complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM in
68. Configuration Mode on page A 81 This means that when you set the routes configuration mode to Manual LDP disregards the protocol setting Aggregation Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP Disable Enable Disable Specifies whether or not the label edge router LER recognizes label switched paths LSPs aggregated combined over one VC Accept the default Disable if the LSR is not configured to send or does not support aggregated LSPs Enable aggregation if the LSR sends aggregated LSPs 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 1 1 13 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters MLM Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The following parameter defines MLM Admin Status Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt MLM Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables MPLS label management MLM Accept the default Enable to run MLM Specify Disable to turn off MLM 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 1 1 2 Static Route Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The following parameters define MPLS static routes Enable Disable Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Static Route Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables LDP static routes Accept the default Disable if you do not want MPLS t
69. Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID DNS Proxy Port Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 500 1 to 32550 Specifies the DNS proxy port for QoS translation queries Accept the default value or if the proxy port resides on a different proxy server specify that port number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 17 Override NBMA Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable Disable Enable Disable Specifies whether the router overrides source NBMA ATM addresses in client registration messages with the NBMA address associated with the source protocol address In most configurations accept the default value Select Enable to force the router to override the source NBMA address associated with the source protocol address Otherwise accept the default value Disable to cause the router to use the source NBMA address 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 18 A 98 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Bogus NBMA Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable None
70. ILMI window opens 4 Click on ILMI VC The ATM Control VC for ILMI window opens 5 Set the Maximum AAL CPCS Receive SDU Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 62 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 56 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Defining SSCOP Signaling AAL As defined by the ATM Forum the SSCOP or Q SAAL resides between the ATM adaptation layer and the Q 2931 signaling layer SSCOP SAAL reliably transports signaling messages between peer Q 2931 entities over the ATM adaptation layer Figure 5 2 Data encapsulation ATM adaptation layer AAL5 ATM layer Physical layer ATMO0039A Figure 5 2 SVC PVC Signaling Protocol Stack Bay Networks routers support SSCOP SAAL functions as defined in the ATM Forum ATM User Network Interface specification Versions 3 0 and 3 1 117374 C Rev 00 5 57 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Disabling and Reenabling SSCOP SAAL By default SSCOP SAAL is enabled on an interface when you create the circuit However you can disable or reenable this signaling on an interface at any time Using the BCC To disable SSCOP on the interface navigate to the SSCOP prompt for example b
71. LAN emulation 1 37 LES assigning 8 17 deleting 8 24 described 1 34 enabling disabling 8 19 inserting out of sequence 8 22 modifying 8 23 parameters descriptions of A 37 redundant 1 35 line parameters descriptions of A 6 to A 11 Link Connection Arbitration defining 5 59 parameter description A 63 LLC SNAP encapsulation defined 1 13 See also data encapsulation Loca IP Address changing 11 3 Local IP Address parameter A 79 Local TCP Port parameter A 80 Local TCP Port specifying 11 4 MAC address enabling disabling 4 18 override value entering 4 19 MAC Address Override parameter A 14 MAC Address parameter A 105 Max Addr Translation Cache Size parameter NHRP A 100 117374 C Rev 00 Max Connection Control parameter description A 66 setting 5 63 Max Next Hop Cache Size parameter NHRP A 99 Max Number of SVC Applications parameter description A 40 specifying 5 7 Max Parties in Multipoint Connections parameter description A 42 setting 5 12 Max PD Before Poll parameter description A 66 setting 5 65 Max Point to Multipoint Connections parameter description A 41 setting 5 10 Max Point to Point Connections defining 5 9 parameter description A 41 Max QOS Cache Size parameter NHRP A 99 Max Retry Count parameter description A 32 setting 8 36 Max STAT PDU Elements parameter description A 67 setting 5 66 Max Unknown Frame Count parameter description A 31 sett
72. LES entry at any time You enable the LES entry to allow a LEC to access that address for information Otherwise disable the LES entry Using the BCC To disable a LES entry navigate to the LES prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork les primary and enter state disabled For example the following command disables the LES primary les primary state disabled les primary To reenable a LES entry navigate to the LES prompt and enter state enabled For example the following command reenables the LES primary les primary state enabled les primary 117374 C Rev 00 8 19 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To disable or reenable a LES entry complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify 5 Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens 6 Click on LES The ATM LES List window opens 7 Click on the LES that you want to modify 8 Set the Enable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 37 Click on Done You return to th
73. P bit coding violations one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS The PES does not increment when counting UASs The number of P bit severely errored seconds PSESs in the current interval A PSES is a second with 44 or more PCVs one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS The PSES value does not increment when counting UASs The number of unavailable seconds UASs in the current interval The number of P bit coding violations PCVs in the current interval For all DS3 E3 applications a coding violation error event is a P bit Parity Error event A P bit Parity Error event occurs when the DS 3 E 3 M frame receives a P bit code that is not identical to the corresponding locally calculated code Name of the circuit associated with this line The current interval The number of C bit errored seconds CESs in the current interval A CES is a second with one or more CCVs one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS This count is only for the C bit Parity DS3 applications The CES value does not increment when counting UASs The number of C bit severely errored seconds CSESs in the current interval A CSES is a second with 44 or more CCVs one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS This count applies only to C bit Parity DS3 applications The CSES value does not increment when counting UASs The number of unavailable seconds UASs in the current interval The number of C bit coding violati
74. PVCs Bay Networks recommends selecting LLC SNAP If you select NULL the router interprets this as virtual channel based multiplexing which is not supported for bridging 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 19 A 26 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters LAN Emulation Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID LAN emulation parameters define LAN emulation clients in a LANE service record Enable Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables LAN emulation on this service record Accept the default Enable if you want LAN emulation to remain enabled on this service record Select Disable if you do not want LAN emulation enabled on this service record 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 2 Owner Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC None Leave blank or enter up to 128 alphanumeric characters Identifies this LAN emulation client This parameter is optional Either leave this parameter blank or enter a text string up to 128 alphanumeric characters to identify this LAN emulation client 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 4 117374 C Rev 00 A 27 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default
75. Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Interface parameters define the state of the ATM interface Administrative State Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Interface Attributes Up Up Down Specifies whether this interface is enabled or disabled Accept the default Up if you want traffic to flow over this interface Set the state to Down if you do not want traffic to flow over this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 1 1 3 Enable ATM Signaling Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Interface Attributes Enable Enable Disable Specifies whether ATM signaling is enabled or disabled for this interface Signaling allows you to configure switched features for example SVCs and LANE on the interface If you do not intend to configure any switched features on this interface that is you want this interface to run only PVCs disabling this parameter makes additional system resources available Accept the default Enable if you want to enable signaling on this interface Set the state to Disable if you want to disable signaling on this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 1 1 16 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Use Hardwar
76. SAAL that is when the circuit sends an AAL ESTABLISH REQUEST and receives an AAL ESTABLISH CONFIRM message If the timer expires before the circuit can reestablish SAAL the circuit clears the connection call proceeding rx timer T310 1 to 60 Specifies the Call Proceeding Received timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit receives a CALL PROCEEDING message from the network If the signaling VC does not receive a CONNECT or RELEASE message before this timer expires it clears the connection for that virtual circuit continued 5 16 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Table 5 1 Signaling Timer Descriptions continued Site BCC Manager Default Name Name Value Range Description connect tx timer T313 4 1 to 24 Specifies the Connect Sent timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit sends a CONNECT message to the network The Connect Sent timer stops when the circuit receives a CONNECT ACKNOWLEDGE message from the network indicating the completion of the ATM connection for that interface If the timer expires before the circuit receives a CONNECT ACKNOWLEDGE message the circuit clears the connection restart request tx T316 120 1 to 720 Specifies the Restart Request Sent on Interface interface timer timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit sends a RESTART message to the network The circuit uses
77. Server Function Instructions MIB Object ID Specifies whether ATMARP is running as a client or server on this interface You must configure one ATMARP server for each LIS you define 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 112 Parameter ARP Server ATM Address Network Prefix Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Interfaces Default None Options XX000000000000000000000000 to XXFRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF where XX 39 45 or 47 Function Specifies the ATM address network prefix of the ATMARP server on your network The network prefix and the user part form a complete ATM address The XX byte must contain 39 45 or 47 These values define the authority and format identifier AFI The AFI byte identifies the group responsible for allocating the prefix and the format the prefix uses For more information about the AFI byte see the ATM Forum UNI specification Instructions Enter the ATM address network prefix of the ATMARP server on your network MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 113 A 102 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters ARP Server ATM Address User Part Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Interfaces None 00000000000000 to FEFFFFFFFFFFFF Specifies the user part suffix of the ATM address for the ATMARP server o
78. Service Attributes The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the PVC service record to which you want to add a virtual circuit 5 Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 6 Click on Add The ATM Virtual Channel Link Parameters window opens page A 21 7 Set the VPI Number parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 22 8 Set the VCI Number parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on 9 Click on OK You return to the ATM Virtual Channel Link window 10 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window 11 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 12 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 13 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 3 14 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Starting the MPOA Server To start the ATM Multi Protocol over ATM server MPS you must perform the following steps 1 Configure any LAN emulation service records and clients that you want to operate using MPOA Ensure that you configure IP and NHRP on the LECs you want to run MPOA Create an MPS service record Add an MPS to the MPS service record Map each LEC to the desired MPS vA Fk WY SN Create an SVC control connection between
79. Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B Configure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 117374 C Rev 00 7 11 Chapter 8 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients When you start ATM on the router all parameters use their default values Depending on the requirements of your network you may want to change some of these values This chapter describes how to customize an existing LANE service record and the LAN emulation client LEC that operates on that service record It includes the following information Topic Page Disabling and Reenabling a LANE Service Record 8 2 Disabling and Reenabling User Part Autogeneration 8 3 Entering an ATM Address Network Prefix 8 5 Entering an ATM Address User Part 8 6 8 8 8 10 Selecting a LEC Configuration Mode Assigning an Emulated LAN Name Assigning an Emulated LAN Type 8 12 Specifying an Emulated LAN Segment ID 8 14 Disabling and Reenabling the LANE Client 8 15 Specifying an Owner 8 16 Assigning ATM LES Addresses 8 17 Setting the Maximum Data Frame Size 8 26 Controlling Unknown Frame Distribution 8 28 Modifying LEC Timers and Retry Counters 8 32 continued 117374 C Rev 00 8 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Topic Page Modifying Flush Protocol Variables 8 44 Specifying a LECS ATM Addres
80. The MTU size is typically determined by the driver However this parameter allows you to override the driver default to accommodate connection to devices that require different MTU sizes Accept the default or enter an MTU size for this service record 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 2 1 12 A 20 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Note Some ATM devices do not negotiate MTU size When connecting to such a device Bay Networks recommends that you specify an MTU size of 9188 octets for full compatibility with RFC 1577 Service Name Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes Numeric value assigned by the router Any alphanumeric string Assigns a unique name to the service record Accept the service name provide by the router or change the service name to rename the service record 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 2 1 15 ATM Virtual Channel Link Parameters ATM virtual channel link parameters define PVCs in a PVC service record Note ATM does not allow duplicate VPI VCI pairs on the same physical interface However duplicate VPI VCI pairs can exist on different physical interfaces Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID VPI Number Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PV
81. The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs in the current interval An SEFS is a second with one or more OOF errors or an AIS defect The number of unavailable seconds UASs in the current interval Indicates the line status of the interface The possible status values are e NoAlarm no alarm present e RRAI receiving yellow remote alarm indication e TRAI transmitting yellow remote alarm indication e RAIS receiving Alarm Indications Signal AIS failure state e TAIS transmitting AIS failure state e LOF receiving Loss of Frame LOF failure state e LOS receiving Loss of Signal LOS failure state e Loopback looping the received signal e TestCode receiving a test pattern e LowSignal low signal 117374 C Rev 00 show dsx3 history Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command The show dsx3 history command displays line Pbit Cbit and Plcp statistics for the DSX3 circuits in the configuration over specific intervals The output includes the following information Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Sec into Interval of Intervals Line Coding Line Type Status The slot module and connector number of the DSX3 circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line The number of seconds into the current interval The number of complete intervals The line coding on this circuit The line coding options are e B3ZS HDB3 The line status of the interface The possible status values a
82. The router allows you to autogenerate this parameter see the User Part Autogeneration parameter on A 17 Depending on the settings in the ATM Interface Attributes window this parameter autogenerates this address using either e The 6 byte hardware MAC address of the ATM interface e A MAC address override value that you specify In both cases autogeneration creates a unique selector byte for each service record on the interface Accept the default for autogeneration or enter a value in the range specified 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 2 1 9 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID ATM Addr Net Prefix Optional Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt Add and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes None XX000000000000000000000000 to XXFFFFRFRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF where XX 39 45 or 47 Specifies the network prefix of the ATM address for this service record The network prefix specifies the ATM domain of which this service record is a part The XX byte must contain 39 45 or 47 These values define the authority and format identifier AFI The AFI byte identifies the group responsible for allocating the prefix and the format the prefix uses For more information about the AFI byte see the ATM Forum UNI speci
83. Unspecified 1516 4544 9234 or 18190 The name of the emulated LAN ELAN that this client last joined Indicates whether the LEC acts as a proxy when it joins an ATM emulated LAN 1 true or 2 false ATM address of the LEC ATM address of the LAN emulation configuration server ATM address of the LAN emulation server 117374 C Rev 00 B 19 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services show lane configuration The show lane configuration command displays portions of the ATM LAN emulation client table This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument service lt servicename gt Displays information about the specified service record only The output includes the following information Slot Slot number on which the LAN emulation client resides Conn Physical port number on which the LAN emulation client resides Service Name of the service record containing the client LAN Name Emulated LAN name this client will use the next time it returns to the initial state LAN Type Data frame format that this client will use the next time it returns to the initial state Unspecified IEEE 802 3 or IEEE 802 5 State State of the LEC INITIAL LECSCONNECT CONFIGURE JOIN INITIAL_REG BUSCONNECT or OPERATIONAL Mode The configuration mode of the LAN emulation client AUTO or MANUAL LECS ATM addr Configured ATM address of the LAN emulation configuration server show lane data vcs The show lane d
84. aging time navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter aging time lt value gt value is the number of seconds from 10 to 300 that you want the LEC to maintain LE_ARP cache entries For example the following command changes the aging time to 150 seconds lec service newyork aging time 150 lec service newyork 117374 C Rev 00 8 37 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To change the aging time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Aging Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 33 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 8 38 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Servi
85. can contain a maximum of 8 VPI bits for a UNI connection This bit range allows for path identifiers from 0 to 255 vci_number identifies the virtual channel of the PVC The header can contain a maximum of 16 VCI bits This bit range allows for channel identifiers from 32 to 65535 Note Following the recommendation of the ATM Forum virtual channel identifiers from 0 to 31 are reserved for signaling and added functionality For example the following command adds PVC 0 130 to the configuration on PVC service record boston pvc service boston pve vpi 0 vci 130 pvc 0 130 Adding Protocols to an ATM Service Record The BCC currently supports only IP and IPX configuration over ATM Table 3 1 indicates which service records support the IP and IPX protocols Table 3 1 Service Record Protocol Support Service Record Type IP IPX pvc service M v classical ip service v lec service v v 3 6 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Adding IP To add IP to a service record navigate to the ATM service record prompt for classical IP or LEC service records or the ATM PVC to which you want to add IP and enter ip address lt address gt mask lt mask gt address and mask are a valid IP address and its associated subnet mask expressed in either dotted decimal notation or in bit notation For example the following command configures an IP address of 2 2 2
86. change the signaling VPI number complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Click on Sig VC The ATM Control VC for Signaling window opens 5 Set the VPI parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 43 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM Signaling Parameters window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 37 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To change the ILMI VPI number complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management Interface ILMI The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Click on ILMI VC The ATM Control VC for ILMI window opens 5
87. configuration VCC Using the BCC To specify a LECS ATM address navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter config server atm address lt address gt address is the ATM address of the LECS that you want the LEC to use For example the following command specifies the LECS address 3900000000000000000000000000000000000001 for LANE service record newyork lec service newyork config server atm address 390000000000000000000 0000000000000000001 lec service newyork Using Site Manager To specify a LECS ATM address complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify 5 Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens continued 8 48 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 6 Set the LE Config Server ATM Address parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 36 System responds 7 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records Lis
88. containing a LAN emulation client ID LECID Note Only one ATM LE client per Bay Networks ATM router can join an emulated LAN at any point in time However you can always move a LAN emulation client to the appropriate emulated LAN using network management software 117374 C Rev 00 1 37 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Initial Registration State An LE client enters the initial registration state when it attempts to register multiple MAC addresses with the LES Note The router LE client provides the MAC address only for its own ATM interface Because it does not register multiple MAC addresses the router never enters this state The router LE client acts as a proxy for bridge MAC addresses not learned on this circuit BUS Connect State An LE client enters the BUS connect state when it attempts to set up a VCC to the BUS Operational State An LE client enters the operational state after successfully completing the requirements to join an emulated LAN 1 38 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Multi Protocol over ATM Concepts As defined by the ATM Forum Multi Protocol over ATM MPOA maps routed and bridged traffic flows to ATM SVCs thus mitigating the performance limitations imposed by hop by hop routing of individual packets This technique of mapping identifiable traffic flows to virtual channels creates network shortcuts between source and destinatio
89. count lt integer gt integer is the count value that you want the timer to use For example the following command changes the ILMI Get Next Request retry count to 6 ilmi 11 1 get next retry count 6 ilmi 11 1 Using Site Manager To change the ILMI Get Next Request retry count value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters Interface ILMI window opens 4 Set the ILMI Get Next Retry Count parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 57 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 32 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Setting the ILMI Set Request Timer The ILMI Set Request timer specifies the amount of time allowed for the circuit to receive a SET_RESPONSE message after sending a SET_REQUEST message By default the circuit waits 3 seconds for a response However you can set this timer to a value from 1 to 120 seconds Using the BCC To change the ILMI Set Request timer value navigate
90. distributing all broadcast multicast and unknown traffic to and from all LE clients on an emulated LAN For example when an LE client sets up its initial configuration it obtains the MAC address of the BUS from the LES Using this MAC address the LE client sets up a multicast send virtual channel connection VCC to the BUS In turn the BUS registers the LE client as part of its emulated LAN To broadcast data an LE client uses the multicast send VCC to transmit information to the BUS The BUS then retransmits the data through multiple point to point connections or one point to multipoint connection to each LE client on the emulated LAN LES BUS Bay Networks ATM routers support LAN emulation server LES and broadcast and unknown server BUS redundancy This redundancy reduces the risk of network failure by overcoming a single point of failure in accessing the LES 117374 C Rev 00 1 35 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services LAN Emulation States As defined in the ATM Forum LAN Emulation Over ATM specification LE clients enter various states of communication while attempting to join an emulated LAN These states referred to as phases by the ATM Forum indicate the progress of an LE client as it connects with an emulated LAN Figure 1 13 Initial state 1 LECS connect state 2 After experiencing Configure state 3 any failure or terminating its connection to the emulated LAN the LE client retu
91. each MPS in your network optional The following sections provide instructions for each of these steps For general information about MPOA see Multi Protocol over ATM Concepts on page 1 39 Configuring LAN Emulation Clients For instructions on creating a LANE service record and client see Defining LEC Service on page 3 5 BCC or Adding a Service Record for LANE on page 3 11 Site Manager Note For a LAN emulation client to operate over MPOA the LAN Emulation Version 2 parameter must be enabled for that client MPOA does this automatically when you map a LEC to an MPS 117374 C Rev 00 3 15 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services After you create a LEC service record the Add Protocols window opens To add IP RIP and NHRP to the LEC service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Click on IP A checkmark appears in the IP box 2 Click on RIP A checkmark appears in the RIP box 3 Click on NHRP A checkmark appears in the NHRP box 4 Click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 5 Set the following parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Transmit Beast Address Click on Help or see Configuring IP Services for parameter descriptions 6 Click on OK The ATM ARP Configuration window opens 7 Set the following parameters ATM ARP Mode ARP Server ATM Address Network Prefix ARP Server ATM Ad
92. emulated packet interface Number of MAC to ATM ARP replies this LEC received over the LUNI associated with this emulated packet interface Total number of control packets this LEC sent over the LUNI associated with this emulated packet interface Total number of control packets this LEC received over the LUNI associated with this emulated packet interface Number of SVCs this LEC unsuccessfully tried to open 117374 C Rev 00 B 25 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services show sonet circuits The show sonet circuits command displays portions of the SONET entries table The output includes the following information Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Sec into Interval of Intervals Line Coding Line Type Status The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit The name of the circuit associated with this line The number of seconds into the current 15 minute interval The number of complete 15 minute intervals The value is 96 unless the interface was brought online within the last 24 hours In that case the value is the number of complete 15 minute intervals since the interface has been online The line coding on this circuit The line coding options are e B8ZS HDB3 The line coding specifies patterns of normal bits and bipolar violations used to replace sequences of zero bits of a certain length The line status of the interface The possible status values are e NoAlarm no alarm present e RRA
93. example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 and enter minimum memory threshold lt va ue gt value is a percentage from 10 to 100 in increments of 10 For example the following command sets the minimum memory threshold value to 30 percent signaling 11 1 minimum memory threshold 30 signaling 11 1l Using Site Manager To change the minimum memory threshold complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 5 13 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 3 Click on ATM Signaling System responds The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Set the Min Memory Threshold parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 42 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done Defining Signaling Timer Resolution You return to the Configuration Manager window The signaling timer resolution specifies how much time has elapsed in tenths of a second between successive timer events Using the BCC To change the signaling timer re
94. frames are incompatible You must assign the same protocol standard for both the router interface and the switch interface to which this interface connects Accept the default ATM Forum UNI Version 3 0 if the switch interface uses ATM Forum UNI Version 3 0 to define SSCOP frames Change the UNI signaling standard to UNI Version 3 1 if the switch interface uses ATM Forum UNI Version 3 1 to define SSCOP frames Using the BCC To change the UNI version navigate to the signaling prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 and enter uni version lt version gt version is the UNI signaling version either v30 default or v31 For example the following command changes the UNI signaling protocol standard to Version 3 1 signaling 11 1 uni version v31 signaling 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 5 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To change the UNI version complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Set the Protocol Standard parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 40 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window
95. higher than this value e VCs may fail to operate with SCR values lower than 128 cells s e Entering O for the SCR turns off this function After you determine the transmission rate of your ATM device set the sustainable cell rate within the specified range Enter 0 to turn off this function 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 15 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Rev Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 40 1 to 65535 Specifies the maximum number of sequential cells that the default VC can receive at the peak cell rate before the VC must relinquish bandwidth to other VCs When you set the MBS you should select a value larger than the largest packet that your default VC can transmit that is the Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU size For example if your VC accepts packets that are less than 4608 bytes long set your MBS value from 45 to 50 cells Set a value in the specified range 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 16 Rev QOS Class Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC CLASS3 CLASSO CLASS1 CLASS2 CLASS3 This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function o
96. loss priority common part convergence sublayer convergence sublayer channel service unit data communication equipment Defense Data Network data service unit data terminal equipment emulated local area network error recovery forwarding information base header error control Internet Engineering Task Force Intelligent Link Interface Interim Local Management Interface Internet Protocol Xxvi 117374 C Rev 00 IPX ITU T LANE LDP LE LEC LECS LER LES LIS LLC LUNI MAC MBS MCR MCS MIB MPC MPLS MPOA MPS MTU NHRP NML NMS NNI OAM OAM amp P Preface Internetwork Packet Exchange International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector local area network emulation label distribution protocol LAN emulation LAN emulation client LAN emulation configuration server label edge router LAN emulation server logical IP subnet Logical Link Control LAN emulation UNI media access control maximum burst size minimum cell rate multicast server management information base Multi Protocol over ATM client Multiprotocol Label Switching Multi Protocol over ATM MPOA server maximum transmission unit Next Hop Resolution Protocol Native Mode LAN network management station network to network interface Operations and Management Operations Administration Maintenance and Provisioning 117374 C Rev 00 xxvii Configuring ATM and MPLS Services OC 3
97. on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 40 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Modifying Control VC Traffic Parameters You can modify the following traffic parameters for both the signaling and the ILMI control VCs e Peak cell rate PCR e Sustainable cell rate SCR e Maximum burst size MBS For additional information about traffic parameters see ATM Traffic Parameters on page 1 23 Setting the PCR The peak cell rate PCR specifies the upper traffic limit in cells s that the ATM connection can support By default the PCR is set to 4716 cells s Table 5 2 lists the valid ranges for each Bay Networks ATM router Table 5 2 Valid PCR Ranges ATM Router Range Cells s ATM ARE OC 3 SONET SDH ILI pairs 128 to 353 207 Model 5782 Centillion MPE 128 to 353 207 ATM ARE DS 3 ILI pairs 128 to 96 000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 832 framing mode 128 to 80 000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 751 framing mode 128 to 72 000 For additional information about the PCR see Using the PCR on page 1 24 117374 C Rev 00 5 41 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using the BCC To change the PCR value for the signaling VC navigate to the signaling VC prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 signaling ve 11 1 0 5 and e
98. on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 53 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Setting the Receive SDU Size Bay Networks suggests that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes for the maximum AAL CPCS SDU size that the control VC supports in the receive direction Most packet sizes fall well within this limit However you can set the receive SDU size to any value from 1 to 65 535 bytes Using the BCC To change the receive SDU size for the signaling control VC navigate to the signaling VC prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 signaling ve 11 1 0 5 and enter rx sdu maximum lt integer gt integer is the maximum SDU size that you want the signaling VC to receive For example the following command changes the maximum receive SDU size to 65 535 bytes signaling ve 11 1 0 5 rx sdu maximum 65535 signaling vc 11 1 0 5 To change the receive SDU size for the ILMI control VC navigate to the ILMI VC prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi ve 11 1 0 16 and enter rx sdu maximum lt integer gt integer is the maximum SDU size that you want the ILMI VC to receive For example the following command changes the maximum receive SDU size to 65 535 bytes ilmi vc 11 1 0 16 rx sdu maximum 65535 ilmi vc 11 1 0 16 5 54 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signali
99. on the ATM line When setting the SCR keep the following in mind To be useful the SCR must not exceed the PCR If you know the average rate set the SCR approximately 10 percent higher than this value VCs may fail to operate with SCR values lower than 128 cells s Entering O for the SCR turns off this function After you determine the transmission rate of your ATM device set the sustainable cell rate within the specified range To change the receive SCR for the default VC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Rev Sustainable Cell Rate parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 89 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 11 23 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Setting the Default VC Receive MBS The receive maxi
100. on which the LEC resides The bridge number on which the LEC resides The ATM address associated with the LEC B 22 117374 C Rev 00 Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command show lane les The show lane les command displays the ATM LAN emulation servers in the order they were configured The output includes the following information Slot Module Connector The slot location of the ATM module within the chassis the module number System 5000 platforms only and the connector number Service Name of the service record containing the client LES Name Name you assigned to the LAN emulation server entry State State of the LES entry enabled or disabled LES Address The LAN emulation server ATM address show lane macs The show lane macs command displays the ATM LAN emulation client MAC address table This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument service lt servicename gt Displays information about the specified service record only The output includes the following information Slot Slot number on which the LAN emulation client resides Conn Physical port number on which the LAN emulation client resides Service Name of the service record containing the client MAC Address The local MAC address on this ATM interface that the LEC uses ATM address registered for The ATM address configured for the service record that this LEC MAC address uses 117374 C Rev 00 B 23 show lane servers
101. or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 84 8 Click on OK 9 Click on Done You return to the LDP Static Route List window You return to the LDP Session Records List window 10 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 11 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 12 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Enabling MLM In order for MPLS to operate properly over ATM you must enable MLM on the interface To enable MLM complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on MLM The MLM Parameters window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 3 37 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 4 Click on Apply System responds Site Manager enables MLM on the interface You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 5 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Configuring TCP In order for LDP to communicate over the ATM VC you must enable TCP on the router If yo
102. permission SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties ji 117374 C Rev 00 Bay Networks Inc Software License Agreement NOTICE Please carefully read this license agreement before copying or using the accompanying software or installing the hardware unit with pre enabled software each of which is referred to as Software in this Agreement BY COPYING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT THE TERMS EXPRESSED IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE THE ONLY TERMS UNDER WHICH BAY NETWORKS WILL PERMIT YOU TO USE THE SOFTWARE If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the product unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price 1 License Grant Bay Networks Inc Bay Networks grants the end user of the Software Licensee a personal nonexclusive nontransferable license a to use the Software either on a single computer or if applicable on a single authorized device identified by host I
103. record that you want to modify 5 Set the Enable Disable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 15 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Disabling and Reenabling User Part Autogeneration By default when you add an SVC service record that is a LANE or classical IP service record the user part autogeneration feature is enabled However you can disable or reenable this feature on an individual service record at any time For information about setting the end station identifier for user part autogeneration see Autogenerating ATM Addresses on page 4 18 Using the BCC To disable the user part autogeneration feature navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 classical ip service dallas and enter autogenerate disabled For example the following command disables user part autogeneration on the service record classical ip service dallas autogenerate disabled classical ip service dallas To reenable user part autogeneration on the service record navigate to the prompt and enter autogenerate enabled For example the following command reenables user part autogeneration on the service record classical ip service dallas autogenerate ena
104. release By default the SCR is set to 4716 cells s Table 5 3 lists the valid ranges for each Bay Networks ATM router To disable the SCR set the value to 0 Table 5 3 Valid SCR Ranges ATM Router Range Cells s ATM ARE OC 3 SONET SDH ILI pairs 0 128 to 353 207 Model 5782 0 128 to 353 207 ATM ARE DS 3 ILI pairs 0 128 to 96 000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 832 framing mode 0 128 to 80 000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 751 framing mode 0 128 to 72 000 For additional information about the SCR see Using the SCR on page 1 25 Using the BCC To change the SCR value for signaling VCs navigate to the signaling VC prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 signaling ve 11 1 0 5 and enter scr lt integer gt integer is the SCR value that you want the signaling VC to use For example the following command changes the signaling VC SCR value to 8000 signaling ve 11 1 0 5 ser 8000 signaling vc 11 1 0 5 117374 C Rev 00 5 45 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To change the ILMI SCR value navigate to the ILMI VC prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi ve 11 1 0 16 and enter scr lt integer gt integer is the SCR value that you want the ILMI VC to use For example the following command changes the ILMI VC SCR value to 8000 ilmi ve 11 1 0 16 ser 8000 ilmi vc 11 1 0 16 Using Site Manager To change the signaling SCR value complete the following tasks
105. responds For each additional protocol you selected the Configuration Manager displays a protocol specific window prompting you for required information Click on Help for any parameter or see the appropriate protocol specific guide After completing all required protocol configuration you return to the LDP Session Records List window You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Adding Protocols to an Existing Record To add protocols to an existing LDP session record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on the session record that you configured Site Manager supports only one LDP session record The Protocols menu selection becomes active 5 Click on Protocols The Protocols menu opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 3 33 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued to add You do this System responds 6 Choose Add Delete The Select Protocols window o
106. responds The Select Protocols window opens 6 Go to the next section Enabling Protocols on an ATM Service Record Enabling Protocols on an ATM Service Record Depending on the data encapsulation type and virtual connection type PVC or SVC that you choose for the service record the router supports various protocols You can select and configure protocols immediately after you create a service record or you can exit the Select Protocols window and add protocols at a later time Adding Protocols Immediately After Creating a Service Record To add protocols to a service record immediately after creating it complete the following tasks You do this Site Manager Procedure System responds 1 Inthe Select Protocols window click on the protocols you want to add A check mark appears in the box for each protocol that you select 2 Click on OK For each protocol you select the Configuration Manager displays a protocol specific window prompting you for required information Click on Help for any parameter or see the appropriate protocol specific guide 3 12 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Adding Protocols to an Existing Service Record To add protocols to an existing service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration
107. the MPS can keep upon initialization By default the MPS can have a maximum initial cache size of 100 However you can set the initial cache size to any value from 50 to 500 To set the initial cache size complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Click on MPS The MPS List window opens 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify 6 Set the Initial Cache Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 74 7 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window continued 117374 C Rev 00 9 17 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 9 Click on Done System responds You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done Setting the Maximum Cache Size You return to the Configuration Manager window The maximum cache size specifies the maximum number of cache units that the MPS can store at any time By default the MPS can have a maximum cache size of 500 However you can set the m
108. the connection The duration of the connection is the total amount of time it takes from connection setup to connection release By default the SCR is set to 4716 cells s Table 6 2 lists the valid ranges for each Bay Networks ATM router To disable the SCR set the value to 0 Table 6 2 Valid SCR Ranges ATM Router Range Cells s ATM ARE OC 3 SONET SDH ILI pairs 0 128 to 353 207 Model 5782 0 128 to 353 207 ATM ARE DS 3 ILI pairs 0 128 to 96 000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 832 framing mode 0 128 to 80 000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 751 framing mode 0 128 to 72 000 For additional information about the SCR see Using the SCR on page 1 25 Using the BCC To change the PVC SCR value navigate to the PVC prompt for example box atm 11 1 pvc service boston pvce 11 1 0 32 and enter scr lt integer gt integer is the SCR value that you want the PVC to use For example the following command changes the PVC SCR value to 8000 pvc 11 1 0 32 scr 8000 pvc 11 1 0 32 117374 C Rev 00 6 13 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To change the PVC SCR value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Serv
109. to Go NRE niuni a a a Eaa 3 40 Chapter 4 Customizing an ATM Interface Disabling and Reenabling the ATM Driver secccccissecctecsssenrccuaasccteaanereccneswivcenassmronenserie 4 2 Deining me Monice MIU perosina a LnaoaxSunhsimaseensadansey iad 4 3 Defining the Data Path Notify Function ET T T PEAT saree 4 5 Defining the SYC hactiity UL ites rareste anor a eee ees creer 4 7 PS SHC the Framing Moda a cs cas cance esionre taster it ia 4 9 Defining the Clocking Signal Source 20 PEE ET T dooria 4 10 Specio DSS Line BUNGIE sarsak nanata AA oa EAA 4 11 Turning DS Stari ling On And OI ssnsrisinssrtidin nti vabodssreudtnrsineinnisarbeananguian 4 12 Enabling and Disabling Per VCO CIPpPINg cic lasinedtevcstieenctertekdsadeaaits iiaiai 4 14 Disabling and Reenabling an ATM Interfac 00 0 csescattcessssesaseeseasssnssssasnsiersaeanetene 4 15 Disabling and Reenabling Signaling on an Interface E T FE an 4 17 Autgenerating ATM AUIE SESS ac casccccinsasicilanconnsopdianenceracdnannenradedanereiensarpeiadatampeicteeenes 4 18 Enabling or Disabling the Hardware MAC Address Feature cccceeeeeeeeees 4 18 Entering a MAC Address Override Value eraa ET T abod PEE 4 19 Defining the Maximum Number of VPS siiisissnnsianeia na 4 21 Defining the Maximum Number of VOCS c ccecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeseaeessaeeeeeeaas 4 21 MGR TO AG NRT E E PE A E A E E ET 4 22 117374 C Rev 00 ix
110. to the ILMI prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi 11 1 and enter set timer lt integer gt integer is the time value in seconds that you want the timer to use For example the following command changes the ILMI Set Request timer to 6 seconds ilmi 11 1 set timer 6 ilmi 11 1 Using Site Manager To change the ILMI Set Request timer value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters Interface ILMI window opens 4 Set the ILMI Set Timer parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 58 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window continued 117374 C Rev 00 5 33 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the ILMI Set Request Retry Count The ILMI Set Request retry count specifies the number of times the circuit can retransmit the ILMI SET_REQUEST message before it considers the link down By default t
111. to the MPS List window The MPS List window shows the added MPS 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to add additional MPOA servers 9 Got to the next section Mapping an MPS to a LEC to map the MPS to a specific LEC or go to the next step to exit this procedure 10 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 11 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 12 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 13 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 3 18 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Mapping an MPS to a LEC MPS operates using LAN emulation You must map associate MPSs to LEC service records that you create To map an MPS to a LEC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 Click on ATM The Select Connection Type window opens The Edit ATM Connector window opens Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Server Parameters window opens Click on OK The MPOA Service Record window opens 5 Click on MPS 6 Click on Mapping Click on any LEC that you want to map to the MPS The MPS List window opens The LEC MPS Mapping List window opens 8 Click on Mapping Site Manager maps the L
112. unknown frame time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Max Unknown Frame Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 31 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 31 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Modifying LEC Timers and Retry Counters You can modify the following timers and counters for each LEC e Control timeout e VCC timeout period e Maximum retry count e Aging time e Forward delay time e Expected LE_ARP response time e Path switching delay Setting the Control Timeout The control timeout parameter specifies the timeout period used for most request response control frame interactions The default timeout is 5 seconds but you c
113. virtual path containing several virtual channels The transmission path can support multiple virtual paths across a single connection to the network Figure 1 3 shows the relationships between the virtual channel the virtual path and the transmission path Transmission Path vo V ae LE we vo P vc vo r JP w VP Virtual path VC Virtual channel ATM0006A Figure 1 3 ATM Transmission Components 117374 C Rev 00 1 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Permanent and Switched Virtual Connections Virtual channels and virtual paths allow you to establish virtual channel links VCLs You can create VCLs as either permanent virtual circuits PVCs or switched virtual circuits SVCs After you establish a PVC you can transfer information over it at any time SVCs activate through signaling and network switching only when there is information ready for transmission ATM Layers The B ISDN protocol reference model on which ATM is based consists of four layers Figure 1 4 Each layer communicates only with the layer directly above it and the layer directly below it Higher protocol layer Convergence sublayer CS ATM adaptation Segmentation and reassembly sublayer SAR an ATM layer Transmission convergence sublayer Physical layer Physical medium dependent sublayer PMD PHY ATM0003A Figure 1 4 B ISDN ATM Protocol Reference Model 1 6 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redun
114. want the client to join only Ethernet emulated LANs Select IEEE8025 if you want the client to join only token ring emulated LANs 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 6 A 28 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Maximum Data Frame Size Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC Unspecified Unspecified 1516 Specifies the maximum data frame size in octets that this client uses when it joins an emulated LAN Clients that use automatic configuration mode use this parameter in their LE_CONFIGURE_REQUEST frames Clients that use manual configuration mode use this parameter in their LE_JOIN_REQUEST frames Accept the default Unspecified if you want the client to obtain the maximum data frame size when it joins an emulated LAN Select 1516 if you want to designate the maximum data frame size that this client can e Send on the multicast send VCC e Receive on the multicast forward VCC e Send and receive on data direct VCCs Selecting manual configuration mode automatically sets the maximum data frame size to 1516 Accept the default Unspecified or select 1516 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 7 117374 C Rev 00 A 29 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Op
115. window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify 2 Click on MPLS The Select Connection Type window opens The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the AAL Encaps Type parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 92 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 11 27 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Specifying the Default VC Transmit QOS Class This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default CLASS3 for this parameter Specifying the Default VC Receive QOS Class This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default CLASS3 for this parameter Specifying the Default VC AAL Type This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default TYPES for this parameter Specifying the Default VC Congestion Indication This parameter is a placeholder fo
116. window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on Service Attributes The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the PVC service record that you want to modify Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 6 Click on the PVC that you want to modify 7 Set the Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 25 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 6 18 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Setting the Receive SDU Size Bay Networks suggests that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes for the maximum AAL CPCS SDU size that the PVC supports in the receive direction Most packet sizes fall well within this limit However you can set the receive SDU size to any value from 1 to 65 535 bytes Using the BCC To change the receive SDU size for the PVC navigate to the PVC prompt for example box atm 11 1 pve service boston pve 11 1 0 32 and enter rx sdu maximum lt integer gt integer is the maximum SDU size that you want the PVC to receive For example the following command changes the maximum rec
117. you assign to the service record encapsulation_type is the data encapsulation type that you want the PVC service record to use For example the following command defines a PVC service record with the name boston on ATM slot 5 connector 1 atm 5 1 pvc service boston encapsulation Ilc snap pvc service boston Note You must add at least one PVC to a PVC service record Go to Adding PVCs on page 3 5 for instructions Defining Classical IP Service To define a classical IP service record navigate to the ATM interface prompt and enter classical ip service lt service_name gt encapsulation lt encapsulation_type gt service_name is a unique text string that you assign to the service record encapsulation_type is the data encapsulation type that you want the classical IP service record to use For example the following command defines a classical IP service record with the name dallas on ATM slot 5 connector 1 atm 5 1 Classical ip service dallas encapsulation Ilc snap classical ip service dallas 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Defining LEC Service To define a LAN emulation client LEC service record navigate to the ATM interface prompt and enter lec service lt service_name gt encapsulation lt encapsulation_type gt service_name is a unique text string that you assign to the service record encapsulation_type is the data encapsulation
118. 0 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Xmit Sustainable Cell Rate cells s Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling gt Sig VC or Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI gt ILMI VC 4716 0 128 to 353207 ATM ARE OC 3 SONET SDH ILI pairs and Model 5782 ATM routers 0 128 to 96000 ATM ARE DS 3 ILI pairs 0 128 to 80000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 832 framing mode 0 128 to 72000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 751 framing mode Specifies the upper limit of the ATM connection conforming average rate The average rate equals the total number of cells transmitted divided by the duration of the connection Using the sustainable cell rate SCR you can define the future cell flow of a VC in greater detail than by using only the peak cell rate The SCR maps directly to the minimum cell rate MCR The MCR defines the minimum amount of guaranteed bandwidth allowed for PVCs and control VCs on the ATM line When setting the SCR keep the following in mind The SCR maps directly to the MCR The MCR provides guaranteed bandwidth for PVCs and control VCs while allowing sufficient bandwidth for SVCs to operate To be useful the SCR must not exceed the PCR If you know the average rate set the SCR approximately 10 percent higher than this value
119. 0 Site Manager Parameters LES Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID LAN emulation server LES parameters define LAN emulation servers for LANE clients Enable Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC gt LES Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the chosen LAN emulation server LES on this service record Accept the default Enable if you want the LAN emulation client to use this LES address in the specified order of preference Select Disable if you do not want the LAN emulation client to consider this LES address 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 10 1 2 LE Server ATM Address Network Prefix Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC gt LES 39000000000000000000000000 XX000000000000000000000000 to XX FFFFFRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF where XX 39 45 or 47 Specifies the network prefix of the ATM address for this LAN emulation server LES The network prefix specifies the ATM domain of which this LES is a part The XX byte must be 39 45 or 47 This value defines the authority and format identifier AFI The AFI byte identifies the group responsible for allocating the prefix and the format the prefix uses For more information about the AFI by
120. 0 2 3 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Label Distribution Entity The label distribution entity is essentially the implementation of the label distribution protocol LDP LDP is the set of procedures and messages by which label switching routers LSRs establish label switched paths LSPs through a network LDP establishes these paths by mapping network layer routing information directly to data link layer switched paths LDP associates a packet stream with a specific LSP and assign the LSP a specific label The label information is distributed between the LSRs and LERs to maintain stream mapping information MPLS Label Management Forwarding The MPLS label management MLM entity communicates with LDP It is responsible for e Establishing the default VC 0 32 e Responding to requests from LDP for example requests for a label and establishing VC communications e Communicating with the ATM driver to set up and tear down VCs The forwarding entity encapsulates and decapsulates the data that it sends and receives over the MPLS interface Outbound data is delivered to the encapsulation process by the higher layers and delivered to the lower level driver for transmission to the MPLS network Inbound data is received from the MPLS network by the lower level driver and delivered to the decapsulation process where it is stripped of layer 2 protocol headers The decapsulation process then passes the inbound data to higher layers
121. 00 8 39 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 33 You do this System responds 5 Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens 6 Set the Forward Delay Time parameter 10 Click on Done 7 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window Specifying the Expected LE_ARP Response Time The expected LE_ARP response time specifies the amount of time that the LEC expects an ARP request and ARP response cycle to take The LEC uses this value during retries and verifications By default the LEC expects an ARP request and ARP response cycle to take a maximum of 3 seconds However you can set the LE_ARP response time to a value from 1 to 30 seconds Using the BCC To change the expected LE_ARP response time navigate to the LANE service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter arp response time lt value gt value is the number of seconds from 1 to 30 that the LEC expects an ARP request and ARP response cycle to take For example the following command changes the expected LE_ARP response time to 15 seconds lec service newyork arp response time 15 lec service newy
122. 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 8 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Emulated LAN Type Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt Add Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC Unspecified Unspecified IEEE8023 IEEE8025 Specifies the data frame format this client uses when it joins an emulated LAN Clients that use automatic configuration mode use this parameter in their LE_CONFIGURE_REQUEST frames to specify the LAN type Clients that use manual configuration mode use this parameter in their LE_JOIN_REQUEST frames to specify the LAN type If you select manual configuration mode you must set the emulated LAN type to either IEEE8023 or IEEE8025 Accept the default Unspecified if you want the client to obtain the LAN type from the LECS when it joins an emulated LAN Select IEEE8023 if you want the client to join only Ethernet emulated LANs Select IEEE8025 if you want the client to join only token ring emulated LANs 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 6 MTU Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes 4608 0 to 9188 Specifies the MTU in bytes that this service record can send
123. 11 1 0 324 delete pvc service boston 6 24 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Using Site Manager To delete a PVC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the PVC service record containing the PVC that you want to delete 5 Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 6 Click on the PVC that you want to delete 7 Click on Delete Site Manager deletes the PVC 8 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window 9 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 6 25 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Where to Go Next Use the following table to determine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about ATM concepts Chapter 1 Learn about MPLS concepts Chapter 2 Start ATM or MPLS Chapter 3 Change default settings for ATM interface Chapter 4 p
124. 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Adding the LDP Session Record After you create an ATM circuit over which MPLS can operate you must add an LDP session record to that circuit For information about creating an ATM circuit see Creating an ATM Circuit on page 3 30 Note This release supports only one LDP session record per ATM interface To add an LDP session record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Add Circuit window opens 2 Click on OK to accept the default circuit name 3 Click on MPLS The Select Connection Type window opens The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 4 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 5 Click on Add The LDP Session Record Parameters window opens 6 Set the following parameters e Local IP Address Remote IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 79 7 Click on OK The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 8 Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 9 Go to the following section Adding Protocols to the LDP Session or go to step 10 to exit this procedure 10 Click on Cancel You return to the LDP Session Records List window continued
125. 2 Click on Interface Attributes The ATM Interface Attributes window opens 3 Set the MAC Address Override parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 14 4 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 4 20 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing an ATM Interface Defining the Maximum Number of VPCs You can define the maximum number of virtual path connections VPCs that the ATM interface can have To change the maximum number of VPCs navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 11 1 atm interface 11 1 and enter vpcs maximum lt integer gt integer is the maximum number of VPCs the ATM interface can use For example the following command limits the number of VPCs to 128 atm interface 11 1 vpes maximum 128 atm interface 11 1 Defining the Maximum Number of VCCs You can define the maximum number of virtual channel connections VCCs that each ATM virtual path can have To change the maximum number of VCCs navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 11 1 atm interface 11 1 and enter vcecs maximum lt integer gt integer is the maximum number of VCCs each virtual path can use For example the following command limits the number of VCCs to 128 atm interface 11 1 vecs maximum 128 atm interface 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 4 21 Configuring
126. 2 anda subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 on ATM PVC 0 130 pvc 0 130 ip address 2 2 2 2 mask 255 255 255 0 LPL 2 23 202 295 5299 209 0F Adding IPX To add IPX to a service record navigate to the ATM service record prompt for LEC service records or the ATM PVC to which you want to add IPX and enter ipx address lt address gt address is a valid IPX address expressed in either dotted decimal notation or in bit notation For example the following command configures an IPX address of 0000001a on ATM PVC 0 130 pvc 0 130 ipx address 0000001a ipx 0000001a 117374 C Rev 00 3 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To start ATM on a router using Site Manager 1 2 3 4 Create an ATM circuit Define an ATM service record Enable protocols on the ATM service record If you defined a PVC service record add at least one virtual circuit to that service record Creating an ATM Circuit To create an ATM circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Add Circuit window opens 2 Click on OK to accept the default circuit The Select Connection Type window name opens 3 Click on ATM The Initial ATM Signaling Config window opens 4 Click on OK to accept the default settings 5 Go to the next section to define a serv
127. 20 117374 C Rev 00 Site A Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Using Hybrid PVCs for Transparent Bridging In Figure 1 9 traffic is bridged between site A and site B The bridge router 1 is running on the ATM network interface and its PVCs are not defined as hybrid bridged VCs Site B P eF Figure 1 9 Bridge port sees one Router 2 path to Sites A and B Router 1 a L ATM network Router 3 a Lo a z e 3 D gt Example of a Bridged Network In this example when the bridge receives data from site A and does not recognize the destination address it tries to direct traffic through another bridge port However because the PVCs are not defined as hybrid bridged VCs the ATM bridge port views the paths to site A and site B as the same A bridge does not send the same data over the bridge port from which it just received the data so the bridge cannot direct the data to site B To resolve this problem you need to designate the PVCs on router 1 as hybrid bridged VCs If you define the PVCs as hybrid VCs each PVC acts as a separate bridge port This enables the bridge running on the ATM interface to view the traffic from site A as arriving on a different port from that of site B When the bridge se
128. 34 Seung the Maximum Retry Count access ee ieaie ad ceases nni NENANA A 8 36 Setting the Aging Time hrni piai ee re rarer errr no PR cT xii 117374 C Rev 00 Setting the Forward Delay TNE aisimsssessasteesinmrend gender nedisariotaaanneeOe Specifying the Expected LE_ARP Response Time 2 c ccescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 8 40 Setting the Path Switching Delay cases cscietisdocendacteteedeser ate aden ai a 8 42 Modiiying Flush Protecal Yanablgs 5 03 nissd sine pea ER 8 44 Disabling and Reenabling the Flush Protocol i cepacia meee eee 8 44 Seting he Fush TINGE srice aaar ne Eaa A ar OR 8 46 Speciiying a LECS ATM Address aisstissuianessei taasan aaan kaiia kaaa aadatan 8 48 Enabling and Disabling LAN Emulation Version 2 sssssssesesssriresseerrssrrerresrrrrssere ee 8 49 Deleng a Service Rocard ontgin aa N EST NN 8 50 MOI O OO NE iinan lias A aadubne et dante saneaminumitiuaey 8 52 Chapter 9 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Disabling and Reenabling the MPOA Service Record ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneees 9 2 Setting the MPS Address Generating Mode sN EET aeniei T E E E Specifying the MPS Control ATM Address ccecccceseseeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaaaesseneeesaeeseeaeees 9 4 Setting the Control ATM Address Network Prefix ccccceseseeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeeeetaeeeeaes 9 4 Setting the Control ATM Address User Patt 1cccisccctccsicssetscercntsensntedenessecetsteercuss
129. 374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM An ATM LIS can replace an IP LAN In Figure 1 11 for example three IP host systems and an IP router have interfaces to an Ethernet LAN To communicate with each other on the LAN the devices use the MAC addresses that they obtain using ARP or static routes For communication beyond the LAN the devices use IP addresses E 140 250 200 1 Router 00 00 A2 00 00 01 140 250 200 0 E a A B c 140 250 200 2 140 250 200 3 140 250 200 4 00 00 A2 00 10 20 00 00 A2 00 10 30 00 00 A2 00 10 40 ATM0035A Figure 1 11 IP Local Area Network In Figure 1 12 an ATM network replaces the LAN interfaces creating a LIS For communication within the LIS the devices use ATM addresses obtained using ATMARP for communication beyond the LIS the devices use IP addresses For example to send a message to host B host A uses host B s ATM address To send a message to a host beyond the LIS host A uses an IP address to identify the remote host and sends the message to the local router router A using the router s ATM address The router then forwards the message 117374 C Rev 00 1 29 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services ATMAPP client Router A ATM network ATMARP server a Router B
130. 4 show lane stats 0 008 sates cinerea EEEE E cr weer re B 25 te SONET GUN Ser cira a e anctenioeatincasnppeateomendescaadeaetcgadaeedacaeaars B 26 ON SUN CIN a seca darts Sun A P N PE E A E waters A E A EE E T B 27 show sonet history n anaa an E Uan AT T nn PRS B 30 xvi 117374 C Rev 00 Appendix C Configuring NHRP for ATM Services IP OYEFE ccccccaisniasesonaetascesndteindad arena take soetanioesdae dharedceaashuedusceebesebiegatenenes C 2 NAP Message MONG saini sacra innceasseraed teas aarti A ASA C 2 Configuring NHRP on an Unconfigured ATM Pa Peete eee oii oera ee ee re Adding NHRP to an Existing ATM ImterfagE siraiciisiesmiris irentsia C 6 Editing an NHRP ROCO sic ctisciorteisit satin ssseimia sii aandlatinin Aai C 8 Disabling an NHRP Record PEE E EE ee E E C 9 Deleting HARE ainainen A ent enEaas C 9 Index 117374 C Rev 00 xvii Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 117374 C Rev 00 Figures Fa hei A P A errr tre treet rer E E N tere ere eye cree ey mr reer 1 2 PEON RAG surendra a a 1 3 AIM TRANSMISSION ComponEmiS seica aan 1 5 B ISDN ATM Protocol Reference Model sesssssseseeseesssresrresssessreesrees 1 6 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 P A T AE PT R he Multiple P
131. 7 7013 for agencies of the Department of Defense or their successors whichever is applicable 6 Use of Software in the European Community This provision applies to all Software acquired for use within the European Community If Licensee uses the Software within a country in the European Community the Software Directive enacted by the Council of European Communities Directive dated 14 May 1991 will apply to the examination of the Software to facilitate interoperability Licensee agrees to notify Bay Networks of any such intended examination of the Software and may procure support and assistance from Bay Networks 7 Term and termination This license is effective until terminated however all of the restrictions with respect to Bay Networks copyright in the Software and user manuals will cease being effective at the date of expiration of the Bay Networks copyright those restrictions relating to use and disclosure of Bay Networks confidential information shall continue in effect Licensee may terminate this license at any time The license will automatically terminate if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms and conditions of the license Upon termination for any reason Licensee will immediately destroy or return to Bay Networks the Software user manuals and all copies Bay Networks is not liable to Licensee for damages in any form solely by reason of the termination of this license 8 Export and Re export Licensee agrees not to e
132. A 73 7 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 9 13 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Setting the Maximum Retry Time The maximum retry time is used by the MPOA retry mechanism By default the value is 5 seconds However you can set this value from 1 to 300 seconds To set the maximum retry time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify Click on ATM The Select Connection Type window opens The Edit ATM Connector window opens Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Click on MPS The MPS List window opens 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify 6 Set the Maximum Retry Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 73 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window Click on Done Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window
133. AL TYPE ssescscciostste tea seneacsetataivetnoceeuinendgace 11 28 Specifying the Default VC Congestion Indication ccccssseeeesssteeeeeesneeeeeees 11 28 Enabling and Disabling the Default VC Cell Loss Priority mna PE 11 28 Enabling and Disabling Default VC Transmit Tagging cccceeecteeseeeeeereeeeee 11 28 Enabling and Disabling Default VC Receive Tagging c cccsccessecesestteeteeeaes 11 28 Customizing LDP Static Route Parameters sau ari gisua PT EET aan 11 29 Enabling and Disabling Statie ROUTES siscnarmiionsininiiininonin aaia 11 29 Specifying a Destination Route Prefix cccccccceseceeeseceeeceeeceeeseaeeeeaeseeeeneeeeaes 11 30 Specio a Rote Mask cde acct neck ccencendigzneeddccconunne a S 11 31 Where to Go Noki niin aa T Appendix A Site Manager Parameters Pee SSC ATN Farana BPS acs c sssiaoeng saatvaean oastensis iteacbin assent lassen ean RN eS A 2 Usmagthe Window PA Ses tictitcrcaxieneincai ata ghainanceueiniabteeeind a a aiik A 2 Select Connection Type WHY siucisiccncancciaiatangedscetnieiatdcotesdcadasmtessaienmedcscuanene A 2 Edit ATM Connector WINdOW sai ssisssicssaitiaannt dant ienieieammiieantmiannnmenis A 3 Edit MPLS Connector Window reer EE re Pere Pare ahaa a A 4 Using thie Menu Pa sccdacciivanjeatarhasaicsintasscstaalvcncdesiivadsiuniiyhladuebataudobaindeduniaucamis A 4 Accessing Global ATM Signaling Attributes ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeteteeeenee
134. ATM Based Networks Reading Mass Addison Wesley 1991 Heinanen J Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 1483 Network Working Group July 1993 ITU T B ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol SSCOP Final Draft March 10 1994 Laubach M Classical IP and ARP over ATM RFC 1577 Network Working Group January 1994 1 46 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Where to Go Next Use the following table to determine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about MPLS concepts Chapter 2 Start ATM or MPLS Chapter 3 Change default settings for ATM interface Chapter 4 parameters Change default settings for ATM signaling Chapter 5 parameters Change default settings for ATM PVC service record Chapter 6 and PVC parameters Change default settings for classical IP service Chapter 7 record parameters Change default settings for LAN Emulation client Chapter 8 service record parameters Change default settings for Multi Protocol over ATM Chapter 9 server parameters Change default settings for the ATM router Chapter 10 redundancy parameter Change default settings for MPLS parameters Chapter 11 Obtain information about Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B Configure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 117374 C R
135. ATM address can range from XX000000000000000000000000 to XXFFFFFRFRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF The XX byte must contain a value of 39 45 or 47 These values define the authority and format identifier AFI The AFI byte identifies the group responsible for allocating the prefix and the format the prefix uses For more information about the AFI byte refer to the ATM Forum UNI specification Entering an ATM address network prefix is optional If you do not enter a network prefix in the specified range the service record accepts the first prefix value that it receives from the switch Entering an ATM Address User Part The ATM address user part suffix consists of a 6 byte end station identifier and a 1 byte selector field This 7 byte portion of the ATM address can range from 00000000000000 to FEFFFFFFFFFFFF You can either allow the router to generate this value automatically or you can enter the value manually ATM Traffic Parameters The ATM User Network Interface Specification defines the following traffic parameters e Peak cell rate PCR The upper traffic rate limit for an individual VC e Sustainable cell rate SCR The upper bound on the conforming average rate of an individual PVC or control VC e Maximum burst size MBS The maximum length of a cell stream allowed on a particular VC These parameters help to prioritize and control the traffic on each VC How you configure your ATM traffic parameters depends on the chara
136. ATM and MPLS Services Where to Go Next Use the following table to determine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about ATM concepts Chapter 1 Learn about MPLS concepts Chapter 2 Start ATM or MPLS Chapter 3 Change default settings for ATM signaling Chapter 5 parameters Change default settings for ATM PVC service record Chapter 6 and PVC parameters Change default settings for classical IP service Chapter 7 record parameters Change default settings for LAN Emulation client Chapter 8 service record parameters Change default settings for Multi Protocol over ATM Chapter 9 server parameters Change default settings for the ATM router Chapter 10 redundancy parameter Change default settings for MPLS parameters Chapter 11 Obtain information about Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B Configure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 4 22 117374 C Rev 00 Chapter 5 Customizing Signaling When you start ATM on the router all parameters use their default values Depending on the requirements of your network you may want to change some of these values This chapter describes how to customize signaling details and includes the following information Topic Page Defining Signaling 5 2 Defining Signaling Timers 5 15 Defining ILMI 5 26 Defining Control VCs Defining SSCOP Signaling AAL 5 57 Wher
137. Accept the default 20 or enter a value from 1 to 120 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 11 Initial Cache Size Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS 100 50 to 500 Specifies the maximum amount of cache information that the MPS can keep upon initialization Accept the default 100 or enter a value from 50 to 500 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 13 A 74 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Maximum Cache Size Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS Default 500 Options 50 to 500 Function Specifies the maximum amount of cache information that the MPS can store at any time Instructions Accept the default 500 or enter a value from 50 to 500 MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 14 ATM Router Redundancy Parameter This section describes the ATM Monitoring Timer parameter for implementing ATM router redundancy For information about all other router redundancy parameters see Configuring Interface and Router Redundancy Parameter ATM Monitoring Timer Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Configure ATM Router Redundancy Default 3000 Options 1 to 65535 Function Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds ms that the secondary router waits before beginning the process of becoming the primary router By default
138. C gt Add None 0 to 255 Identifies the virtual path of the PVC The VPI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 8 VPI bits for a UNI connection This bit range allows for path identifiers from 0 to 255 Enter a value from 0 to 255 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 3 117374 C Rev 00 A 21 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID VCI Number Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC gt Add None 32 to 65535 Identifies the virtual channel of the PVC The VCI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 16 VCI bits This bit range allows for path identifiers from 0 to 65535 Enter a value from 32 to 65535 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 4 Note Following the recommendation of the ATM Forum virtual channel identifiers from 0 to 31 are reserved for signaling and added functionality Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Hybrid Bridged VC Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC No Yes No Specifies whether the PVC is set to hybrid access mode Accept the default No if you want the PVC to work in group access mode only Set to Yes if you want the PVC to operate as a hybrid VC For more information about the group and hyb
139. C address override value redefines the hardware MAC address for the interface It also defines the end station identifier for the interface when automatically generating the user part suffix of an SVC ATM address Using a MAC address override value is very helpful when you want to hot swap ATM link modules For example when hot swapping ATM link modules you can enter the MAC address of the original ATM link module as the MAC address override value for the new ATM link module This allows you to keep the information already configured on the existing ATM link module while maintaining the integrity of the existing client information on the network 117374 C Rev 00 4 19 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using the BCC To change the MAC address override value navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 11 1 atm interface 11 1 and enter mac override lt mac_address gt mac_adaress is the MAC address you want this interface to use For example the following command changes the MAC address for the ATM interface atm interface 11 1 mac override 000011111aaa atm interface 11 1 Using Site Manager To change the MAC address that the ATM interface uses complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM link module interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens
140. C bit severely errored seconds CSESs for each interval category The number of unavailable seconds UASs for each interval category The number of C bit coding violations CCVs for each interval category The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line A historical breakdown of intervals including e The current interval incomplete All but the last two intervals that is all intervals except the current interval and the previous interval e The previous interval that is the last complete interval All of the intervals total The number of C bit errored seconds CESs for each interval category The number of C bit severely errored seconds CSESs for each interval category The number of unavailable seconds UASs for each interval category The number of C bit coding violations CCVs for each interval category B 32 117374 C Rev 00 SONET Plcp Stats Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Interval SEFSs UASs Status Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line A historical breakdown of intervals including The current interval incomplete All but the last two intervals that is all intervals except the current interval and the previous interval The previous interval that is the last complete interval All of the i
141. Ce per Service Record sscisiiirsimirisisomissiiissinennisina 1 17 One PVC per Service Record onsieusmirsisineeoianii indani innnan 1 19 PDO ACESS F I O i wiamrniemenenenetirnenias 1 20 Example of a Bridged NSIWORK ersnnekini 1 21 ATM Addresse Componeme sirvrsianssu ianiai a aaa 1 22 IP Local Arca NGIWOIR susiiiostinsioidina oinc na iaaa 1 29 IP Logical IP Subo sinuni eabiveilennalasnendaenieiseniend 1 30 LAN Emulation States ssssiriscsisnsserviiiinieea i P PET PEET 1 36 MPOA WIM CT IRQ VG wiccnnccnccetasuntaicacinnns deessiteanlalaeutcteannienduecomuse 1 42 Router PANG seiso is sSadcgaevasauuush n aaa adana iiia n dienik 1 43 The MPLS System isiat E AEPA TT gests P 2 3 Sampe MPLS NEWOK asunder naeaA wanes 2 5 SVP WG Signaling Protocol Stak coc ccssncesinsinerisee sarin atten 5 2 SVGIP MC Signaling Protocol SACK cccciiccxticiciesscenstcmnrtiaseterneranscaanie 5 57 xix Tables Table 1 1 Maximum Bandwidth by Media Type ccscecseeeeeeeeeeseneeeseeeeeeneeeeaes 1 8 Table 1 2 Protocols Supported for Standard PVCs and SVCs cceecececeseeeeeseeees 1 10 Table 1 3 Locating and Using Site Manager Protocol Menus cccssceeeeeee 1 12 Table 1 4 Assigning Data Encapsulation to Individual PVCs cc seeeeeereeee 1 16 Table 3 1 Service Record Protocol Support Pe re eee gitene een PEC e Table 3 2 Valid Data Encapsulation Types for PVCs and SVCS eeeceesteeeeteeeteneees 3 9 Table 4 1 Support
142. Chapter 5 Customizing Signaling COSTAR SSCA ie pcst cence E E E E E E E E 5 2 Disabling and Reenabling Signaling scissccimerniivianiedimnniiaaicaroniiaansern Assigning the UNI Signaling Protocol Standard ce emirate E Specifying the Maximum Number of SVC Applications cccccccsssceeesesteeeeeeeneaes 5 7 Setting Connection Thresholds iis scerccaetrarieseccuminanatetinintiaieiineunindnsonaaiaseertubndts 5 9 Setting the Maximum Number of Point to Point Connections esee ee Setting the Maximum Number of Point to Multipoint Connections 5 10 Setting the Maximum Number of Parties in Multipoint Connections 5 12 Setting the Minimum Memory Threshold c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 5 13 Defining Signaling Timer Resolutio sacs ssciecceessstientsscsivesadatetdeadaaavendasentientiontes 5 14 Defining Signaling Timers a Se er Cre ree mee aa D15 Defining RetransMisSiOng scccccccnctccoccoussccccancicacdeniwes n Aa 5 22 Setting the Number of Allowable Restart Messages cssscecesteeesteeeees 5 22 Setting the Number of Allowable Status Enquiries aeei Getta a 5 23 Disabling and Reenabling Restaris ssssiurirneiesn A 5 24 PF Gale aran a reat ia inaadiecel a erunay to suteton Gudea 5 25 DSTI ILMIN secciones E 5 26 Disabling and Recnabling ILNI ernassnasin 5 26 Modifying ILMI Timers and Retry Counters T T PT G 5 28 Setting the ILMI G
143. Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI 3 1 to 120 Specifies the ILMI Get Next Request timer value in seconds The Get Next Request timer sets the amount of time allowed to receive a GET_NEXT_RESPONSE message after sending a GET_NEXT_REQUEST message Accept the default 3 or enter a value from 1 to 120 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 9 1 15 ILMI Get Next Retry Count Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI 3 1 to 100 Specifies the number of retransmissions of the I LMI GET_NEXT_REQUEST message before the link is considered down Accept the default 3 or enter a value from 1 to 100 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 9 1 16 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID ILMI Set Timer Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI 3 1 to 120 Specifies the ILMI Set Request timer value in seconds The Set Request timer sets the amount of time allowed to receive a SET_RESPONSE message after sending a SET_REQUEST message Accept the default 3 or enter a value from 1 to 120 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 9 1 17 ILMI Set Retry Count Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt E
144. D Site Manager Parameters Framing Mode Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes SONET for OC 3 lines DS3_CBIT for DS 3 lines E3_G832 for E 3 lines SDH SONET DS3_CBIT CBITNOFALLBACK CLEARCHANNEL E3_G751 E3_G832 Specifies the transceiver mode for the physical interface Select a transceiver mode as follows SDH or SONET for OC 3 modules DS3_CBIT CBITNOFALLBACK or CLEARCHANNEL for DS 3 modules e E3_G751 or E3_G832 for E 3 modules 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 17 Clocking Signal Source Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes Internal Loop Internal Specifies whether the platform uses its internal clock or derives timing signals externally from an incoming clock on this interface Select Loop to use external timing signals from an incoming clock select Internal to use the clock in the platform 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 18 117374 C Rev 00 A 9 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID DS3 Line Build Out Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes Short Short Long Conditions router signals to mitigate attenuation which depends on the physical length of the line You can set this paramete
145. D for which it was originally acquired b to copy the Software solely for backup purposes in support of authorized use of the Software and c to use and copy the associated user manual solely in support of authorized use of the Software by Licensee This license applies to the Software only and does not extend to Bay Networks Agent software or other Bay Networks software products Bay Networks Agent software or other Bay Networks software products are licensed for use under the terms of the applicable Bay Networks Inc Software License Agreement that accompanies such software and upon payment by the end user of the applicable license fees for such software 2 Restrictions on use reservation of rights The Software and user manuals are protected under copyright laws Bay Networks and or its licensors retain all title and ownership in both the Software and user manuals including any revisions made by Bay Networks or its licensors The copyright notice must be reproduced and included with any copy of any portion of the Software or user manuals Licensee may not modify translate decompile disassemble use for any competitive analysis reverse engineer distribute or create derivative works from the Software or user manuals or any copy in whole or in part Except as expressly provided in this Agreement Licensee may not copy or transfer the Software or user manuals in whole or in part The Software and user manuals embody Bay Networks and its licens
146. Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Note When you initially add a LECS ATM address you do so by configuring a separate ATM network prefix and ATM user part However when you modify an existing LECS ATM address you need only change one parameter that contains the entire address that is both the ATM network prefix and the ATM user part suffix portion of the LECS address 117374 C Rev 00 9 9 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Defining the MPS Control ATM Address Selector Byte An ATM address user part consists of a 6 byte end station identifier and a 1 byte selector field In manual ATM address generate mode the MPS uses the end station identifier from the control ATM address user part that you specify for the MPOA service record However you must specify a unique 1 byte selector field for each MPS in the network To specify the MPS control ATM address selector byte complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click
147. EC receives a flush response for that MAC address or the flush timeout expires see Setting the Flush Timeout on page 8 46 When the flush protocol is disabled cells containing the destination MAC address are dropped until the path switching delay times out After the path switching delay time elapses the data automatically begins flowing over a new virtual circuit 8 44 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using the BCC To disable the flush protocol navigate to the LANE service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter flush protocol disabled For example the following command disables the flush protocol on LANE service record newyork lec service newyork flush protocol disabled lec service newyork To reenable the flush protocol navigate to the LANE service record prompt and enter flush protocol enabled For example the following command reenables the flush protocol on LANE service record newyork lec service newyork flush protocol enabled lec service newyork Using Site Manager To disable or reenable the flush protocol complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Serv
148. EC to the MPS Repeat steps 8 and 9 to map any additional LECs 10 Click on Done You return to the MPS List window 11 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 12 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 13 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 14 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 3 19 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Configuring an SVC Control Connection MPOA requires a connection between each MPS in an MPOA network over which it can send NHRP control data If you configure each LEC with NHRP you do not need an SVC control connection However you can configure a separate control SVC to manage control traffic from the LEC When configuring the SVC control connection keep the following in mind e The SVCs must use LLC SNAP encapsulation you cannot use NLPID or NULL encapsulation on the SVC e You must configure the SVC with IP and NHRP e Bay Networks recommends that you configure the SVC to run RIP to avoid manually configuring adjacent hosts for each MPS e You must set the client mode for the SVC to client on one MPS and server on the other MPS For instructions on configuring an SVC service record with LLC SNAP encapsulation see Defining Classical IP Service on page 3 4 BCC or Adding a Service Record for Classi
149. ES Addresses on page 8 17 Using the BCC To change the LEC configuration mode navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter config mode lt mode gt mode is the configuration mode that you want the LEC to use either manual or automatic For example the following command changes the LEC configuration mode to manual lec service newyork config mode manual lec service newyork 8 8 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To change the LEC configuration mode complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Configuration Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 28 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You r
150. Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 4 1 to 24 Specifies the Connect Sent timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit sends a CONNECT message to the network The Connect Sent timer stops when the circuit receives a CONNECT ACKNOWLEDGE message from the network indicating the completion of the ATM connection for that interface If the timer expires before the circuit receives a CONNECT ACKNOWLEDGE message the circuit clears the connection Accept the default 4 or enter a value from 1 to 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 29 A 48 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters T316 Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 120 1 to 720 Specifies the Restart Request Sent on Interface timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit sends a RESTART message to the network The circuit uses the RESTART message to return all VCs on the interface to the idle condition The Restart Request Sent on Interface timer stops when the circuit receives a RESTART ACKNOWLEDGE message from the network If the timer expires before the circuit receives a RESTART ACKNOWLEDGE message the circuit can transmit as many RESTART messages as specified with the Num Restarts ReXmitted parameter see the parameter description o
151. FFFRFRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF The XX byte must contain 39 45 or 47 These values define the authority and format identifier AFI The AFI byte identifies the group responsible for allocating the prefix and the format the prefix uses For more information about the AFI byte refer to the ATM Forum UNI specification Entering an ATM address network prefix is optional If you do not enter a network prefix in the specified range the service record accepts the first prefix value that it receives from the switch Using the BCC To assign an ATM address network prefix to a service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter network prefix lt address gt address is the ATM address network prefix that you want the service record to use For example the following command defines the ATM address network prefix on the service record as 39000000000000000000000000 lec service newyork network prefix 39000000000000000000000000 lec service newyork 117374 C Rev 00 8 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To assign an ATM address network prefix to a LANE service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds al In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on Service Att
152. FRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF where XX 39 45 or 47 Display only You can configure this parameter only at the service record level None 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 5 Ctrl ATM Addr User Part Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS None 00000000000000 to FFFFFFFFFFFFFF Display only You can configure this parameter only at the service record level None 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 5 Keep Alive Time Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS 10 1 to 300 Specifies how often in seconds the MPS must transmit MPOA KEEP_ALIVE packets Accept the default 10 or enter a value from 1 to 300 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 6 A 72 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Keep Alive Life Time Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS 35 3 to 1000 Specifies the length of time in seconds that an MPS can consider a KEEP_ALIVE packet as valid Accept the default 35 or enter a value from 3 to 1000 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 7 Initial Retry Time Configuration Manage
153. I receiving yellow remote alarm indication e TRAI transmitting yellow remote alarm indication e RAIS receiving Alarm Indications Signal AIS failure state e TAIS transmitting AIS failure state e LOF receiving Loss of Frame LOF failure state e LOS receiving Loss of Signal LOS failure state e Loopback looping the received signal e TestCode receiving a test pattern e LowSignal low signal B 26 117374 C Rev 00 Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command show sonet current The show sonet current command displays portions of the SONET entries table The output includes the following information Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Sec into Interval of Intervals Line Coding Line Type Status Line Stats Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Interval LESs SEFSs UASs LCVs The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line The number of seconds into the current 15 minute interval The number of complete 15 minute intervals The line coding on this circuit The line coding options are B83ZS HDB3 The line status of the interface The possible status values are e NoAlarm no alarm present e RRAI receiving yellow remote alarm indication e TRAI transmitting yellow remote alarm indication e RAIS receiving Alarm Indications Signal AIS failure state e TAIS transmitting AIS failure state e LOF receiving Loss of Frame LOF fa
154. LS gt LDP gt Default VC 0 128 to 353207 Specifies the upper traffic limit in cells s that the MPLS egress connection can submit The default value 0 indicates that the PCR is attempting to run at line rate Set the peak cell rate within the specified range 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 10 A 86 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Xmt Sustainable Cell Rate Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC Default 0 Options 0 128 to 353207 Function Specifies the upper limit of the ATM connection conforming average rate on the transmitting side The average rate equals the total number of cells transmitted divided by the duration of the connection The default value 0 indicates that the transmit SCR is off Using the sustainable cell rate SCR you can define the future cell flow of a VC in greater detail than by using only the peak cell rate The SCR maps directly to the minimum cell rate MCR The MCR defines the minimum amount of guaranteed bandwidth allowed for the default VC on the ATM line When setting the SCR keep the following in mind To be useful the SCR must not exceed the PCR e If you know the average rate set the SCR approximately 10 percent higher than this value e VCs may fail to operate with SCR values lower than 128 cells s e Entering O for the SCR turns off this function Instructions After you determin
155. M Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens continued 5 22 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 4 Set the Num Restarts ReXmitted parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 53 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the Number of Allowable Status Enquiries By default the circuit can retransmit three STATUS ENQUIRY messages before it considers the link down However you can set the number of STATUS ENQUIRY messages that the circuit can send to a value from 1 to 100 Using the BCC To change the number of times the ATM circuit can retransmit STATUS ENQUIRY messages navigate to the signaling timer prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 timers 11 1 and enter status enquiries lt nteger gt integer is the number of times a circuit can retransmit STATUS ENQUIRY messages For example the following command changes the number of times to 8 timers 11 1 status enquiries 8 timers 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 5 23 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To change the number of times the circuit can retransmit STATUS ENQUIRY messages complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure
156. MPOA Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID This section describes the MPOA parameters for configuring an ATM MPOA server MPS Enable Disable Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the MPOA service record on this interface Accept the default Enable if you want the MPOA service record to remain enabled on this interface Select Disable if you do not want the MPOA service record enabled on this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 1 1 2 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID MPS Address Generate Mode Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes Automatic Automatic Manual Specifies whether the MPS uses address information it receives from the well known LECS automatic mode or uses address information that you specify manual mode Accept the default Automatic if you want the server to use address information it receives from the well known LECS Select Manual if you want the server to use the address information that you specify 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 1 1 7 Ctrl ATM Addr Network Prefix Optional Config
157. MPS parameter description A 69 Enable Disable service record parameter description A 15 using 6 2 7 2 8 2 encapsulation multiprotocol 1 12 error checking 1 27 117374 C Rev 00 Expected LE_ARP Response Time parameter description A 33 specifying 8 40 F Flush Protocol defined 8 44 enabling disabling 8 44 parameter description A 35 Flush Timeout parameter description A 34 setting 8 46 Forward Delay Time parameter description A 33 setting 8 39 Framing Mode assigning 4 9 parameter description A 9 G generate mode MPS 9 3 Get Next Retry Count See ILMI Get Next Retry Count Get Next Timer See ILMI Get Next Timer Get Retry Count See ILMI Get Retry Count Get Timer See ILMI Get Timer Give Up Time parameter description A 74 setting 9 15 group configuration files router redundancy creating 3 24 H Hardware MAC Address enabling disabling 4 18 parameter description A 13 Hold Time parameter A 81 Hold Time specifying 11 8 Host Encapsulation parameter A 105 117374 C Rev 00 hybrid access PVCs described 1 19 to 1 21 designating 6 7 Hybrid Bridged VC parameter A 22 ILMI control VCs customizing 5 54 customizing 5 26 to 5 34 enabling disabling 5 26 parameters descriptions of A 55 support 5 26 ILMI Get Next Retry Count parameter description A 57 setting 5 31 ILMI Get Next Timer parameter description A 57 setting 5 30 ILMI Get Retry Count parameter descript
158. Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the service record to which you want to add protocols The Protocols menu selection becomes active 5 Click on Protocols The Protocols menu opens 6 Choose Add Delete The Select Protocols window opens 7 Click on the protocols that you want to add A check mark appears in the box for each protocol that you select 8 Click on OK For each protocol you select the Configuration Manager displays a protocol specific window prompting you for required information Click on Help for any parameter or see the appropriate protocol specific guide 117374 C Rev 00 3 13 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Adding PVCs You must add at least one virtual circuit to a PVC service record for that service record to operate When you finish configuring the protocols for a PVC service record the ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens To add a PVC to a PVC service record complete the following tasks You do this Site Manager Procedure System responds ATMI1 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM 3 Click on
159. OSI OSPF PCR PD PDN PDU PHY PMD PT PVC RDI RIP RS SAAL SAP SAR SCR SD SDU SMDS SNAP SNMP SONET SDH SPE SRM SSCOP SSCS STP Optical Carrier level 3 Open Systems Interconnection Open Shortest Path First peak cell rate poll data Public Data Network protocol data unit physical layer physical medium dependent payload type permanent virtual circuit remote defect indication Routing Information Protocol resynchronization signaling AAL service access point segmentation and reassembly sustainable cell rate sequenced data service data unit Switched Multimegabit Data Service Subnetwork Access Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol Synchronous Optical Network Synchronous Digital Hierarchy synchronous payload envelope System Resource Module Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol service specific convergence sublayer shielded twisted pair xxviii 117374 C Rev 00 Preface SVC switched virtual circuit TOH transport overhead UNI user to network interface UTP unshielded twisted pair VBR variable bit rate VC virtual circuit VCC virtual channel connection VCI virtual channel identifier VCL virtual channel link VPC virtual path connection VPI virtual path identifier WAN wide area network Bay Networks Technical Publications You can now print Bay Networks technical manuals and release notes free directly from the Internet Go to support baynetworks com library tpubs Fin
160. P 0 0 0 0 Any valid IP address Identifies the local IP address that LDP uses to establish the TCP connection to the LSR Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation Bay Networks recommends that you use the IP address that you used when configuring the IP protocol on this interface You can however accept the default value 0 0 0 0 under specific circumstances for example if you are using circuitless IP 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 1 1 6 117374 C Rev 00 A 79 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Local TCP Port Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP 8192 1 to 65535 Specifies the TCP port number that LDP on the label edge router LER uses to establish the TCP connection to the label switching router LSR Accept the default 8192 or enter a TCP port number from 1 to 65 535 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 1 1 7 Remote IP Address Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP 0 0 0 0 Any valid IP address Specifies the IP address of the interface on the label switching router LSR that LDP on the label edge router LER uses to establish the TCP connection Enter the IP address in dotted decim
161. PI VCI pair for example 0 32 or a 40 digit ATM address for example 390000000000000000000000000000A20037B801 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 6 1 6 Host Encapsulation Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Adjacent Hosts Ethernet Ethernet SNAP PDN DDN SNAPIP NULL Specifies the adjacent host s encapsulation method Select Ethernet or SNAP if you are defining a point to point network interface or if the adjacent host resides on an Ethernet For an X 25 interface select Public Data Network PDN or Defense Data Network DDN For an adjacent host on an ATM logical IP subnet select SNAP SNAPIP and NULL also specify host encapsulation methods for ATM networks 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 6 1 7 117374 C Rev 00 A 105 Appendix B Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command This appendix describes how to use the BCC show command to obtain ATM LANE and classical IP statistical data from the management information base MIB The type and amount of data displayed depend on the specific ATM settings that you want to view This appendix includes descriptions of the following show commands Command Page show atm interfaces B 2 show atm line B 3 show atm services B 6 show atm signaling B 6 show atm stats vcs Ber show atm vcs B 8 show classical ip configuration B 9 show classical ip interface B 9 show classical ip stats B 10
162. PLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens Set the Aggregation parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 82 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 10 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPLS Configuration Disabling and Reenabling MLM Administrative Status MPLS label management MLM communicates with LDP It is responsible for the following Establishing the default VC 0 32 Responding to requests from LDP for example requests for a label and establishing VC communications Communicating with the ATM driver to set up and tear down VCs By default MLM is enabled when you apply the default setting You can disable and reenable MLM To disable or reenable MLM complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on MPLS 3 Click on MLM The Edit MPLS Connector window opens The MLM Parameters window opens 4 Setthe Admin Status parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 83 Click on Done You
163. PS first checks a local address resolution cache to map the known network layer address with an ATM equivalent If the cache search fails the MPC issues an MPOA resolution request to the local MPS function resident on the adjacent router The local MPS hands the resolution request to the MPOA router component The MPOA router generates an NHRP address resolution request for the ATM address of the destination host Standard routing protocols move the NHRP request through the network toward the destination host Eventually the NHRP request reaches the egress router that is the router that serves the host The egress router forwards the request to the remote MPS The remote MPS provides the ATM address of the destination host to the remote MPOA router If the destination host is connected to a legacy LAN the MPS provides the ATM address of the router that connects to the legacy LAN If the destination host is ATM attached the MPS provides the ATM address of the destination host 117374 C Rev 00 1 41 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services 8 The remote MPOA router generates an NHRP address resolution reply containing the ATM address provided by the MPS Standard routing protocols move the NHRP reply through the network to the local MPOA router After caching the address resolution information the MPOA router sends the resolved address to the MPS which in turn sends the resolved address to the MPC that initiated the resolut
164. Route List window 8 Click on Done You return to the LDP Session Records List window 9 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window You return to the Select Connection Type window 11 Click on Done Specifying a Destination Route Prefix You return to the Configuration Manager window The destination route prefix is a form of classless inter domain routing address The route prefix specifies the IP address of the destination network that you want to statically configure An example of a route prefix is 141 251 69 0 where the network portion is represented by first three octets 141 251 69 and the host portion by any value that appears in the last octet 0 To specify a destination route prefix complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens continued 11 30 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPLS Configuration Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 3 Click on LDP System responds The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Static Route The LDP Static Route List window opens 5 Select the static route that you want to modify Set the Destination Route Prefix
165. S Services For example the following command changes the PVC PCR value to 8000 pvc 11 1 0 32 per 8000 pvc 11 1 0 32 Using Site Manager To change the PVC PCR value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify Click on ATM The Select Connection Type window opens The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the PVC service record that you want to modify Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 6 Click on the PVC that you want to modify 7 Set the Xmit Peak Cell Rate cells s parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 23 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 6 12 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Setting the SCR The sustainable cell rate SCR is the upper bound on the conforming average rate of an individual PVC or control VC The average rate is the number of cells transmitted over the link divided by the duration of
166. SSCOP prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 sscop 11 1 and enter link connect arbitration passive For example the following command specifies that SSCOP waits for connections sscop 11 1 link connect arbitration passive sscop 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 5 59 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To change link connection arbitration to active navigate to the SSCOP prompt and enter link connect arbitration active For example the following command specifies that SSCOP initiates connections sscop 11 1 link connect arbitration active sscop 11 1 Using Site Manager To set the SSCOP link arbitration state complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Signaling AAL SAAL The ATM Signaling AAL Records List window opens Set the Link Connection Arbitration parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 63 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 60 117374 C Rev 00 Modifying SAAL Timers Customizing Signaling Note B
167. Server ATM Address User Part parameter A 103 ARP support 1 27 ATM address resolution 1 31 addresses assigning 1 22 autogenerating 4 18 7 4 8 3 MPS control 9 4 parts of 1 22 cell described 1 2 switching 1 4 technology 1 2 circuit adding 3 8 3 30 concepts 1 2 to 1 6 data transmission 1 4 deleting from router 3 29 interface customizing 4 1 layers AAL 5 1 8 ATM Adaptation Layer AAL 1 7 in protocol reference model 1 6 to 1 8 router redundancy customizing 10 1 described 1 43 parameter description of A 75 starting 3 1 3 23 signaling support 5 2 starting configuration tools 3 2 router redundancy 3 23 with BCC 3 2 with Site Manager 3 8 3 30 traffic parameters modifying control VCs 5 41 PVCs 6 11 windows accessing A 2 ATM Addr Net Prefix entering a value for 1 23 MPS control 9 4 parameter description A 18 service record classical IP 7 6 LEC LANE 8 5 Index 2 ATM Addr User Part entering a value for 1 23 MPS control 9 5 MPS selector byte 9 10 parameter description A 17 service record classical IP 7 8 LEC LANE 8 6 ATM ARP Mode parameter A 102 ATM layer described 1 8 ATM Monitoring Timer parameter description A 75 setting 10 2 ATMARP configuring 1 32 defined 1 31 parameters descriptions of A 102 BCC adding IP with 3 7 adding IPX with 3 7 protocols supported 3 6 show commands B 1 starting ATM with 3 2 Bogus NBMA Address parameter NHRP A 99 Broadba
168. Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the PVC service record that you want to modify 5 Set the MTU parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 20 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Changing the Service Name The service name is a value that uniquely defines each service record you create In the BCC you enter the service name when you create the service record You cannot change that name To use a different service name you must create a new service record In Site Manager however the router arbitrarily assigns a unique value to each service record you create You can accept the value that the router assigns or change that value to any alphanumeric string However each service record must have a unique service name Using the BCC You cannot change the service name in the BCC after you use it to create a service record To use a different service name you must create a new service record For information about creating a service record using the BCC see Defining an ATM Service Record on page 3 4 Using Site Manager To change the service name complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System res
169. Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Path Switching Delay parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 34 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 43 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Modifying Flush Protocol Variables The flush protocol ensures that data destined for a particular MAC address arrives in sequence This means that after the LEC issues a flush request the flush protocol drops any cells it receives for the particular MAC address until e The LEC receives a flush response from that MAC address e The flush timeout expires for that MAC address If the client receives a flush response from the MAC address the cells for this MAC address begin flowing over a new virtual circuit However if the flush timeout expires for this MAC address the cells begin flowing to the BUS Disabling and Reenabling the Flush Protocol You can disable or reenable the flush protocol for any LEC When enabled the default the flush protocol drops cells with the current destination MAC address until the L
170. TM address Enter the ATM address user part of the LECS that you want the MPS to use 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 15 MPS Address Generate Mode Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS Automatic Automatic Manual Display only You can configure this parameter only at the service record level None 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 1 7 MPS Ctrl ATM Address Selector Byte Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS gt Add None 00 to FF Specifies a 1 byte selector field for the MPS You need only configure this parameter when the control ATM address generate mode is manual The MPS uses the end station identifier of the service record control ATM address user part However each MPS must have a unique selector field value Enter a unique 1 byte selector field for the MPS 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 5 117374 C Rev 00 A 71 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Ctrl ATM Addr Network Prefix Optional Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS None XX000000000000000000000000 to XXFFF
171. This means that when you set the routes configuration mode to Manual LDP disregards the protocol setting To specify the routes configuration mode complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Set the Routes Configuration Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 81 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Specifying a Hold Time The hold time specifies the number of seconds that LDP can wait without receiving a keepalive packet from its peer entity before considering the LDP session down You can accept the default hold time 40 seconds or specify a hold time from 1 to 240 seconds To specify a hold time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window o
172. Using Site Manager To assign the framing mode to an ATM line complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Inthe Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on Line Attributes The ATM ARE Line Driver Attributes window opens 3 Set the Framing Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 9 4 Click on OK You return to the Select Connection Type window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Defining the Clocking Signal Source You can specify either an internal or external clocking source for time signals Internal clocking uses the router clock external clocking uses the line clock Using the BCC To change the source of the ATM clocking signal navigate to the atm prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter clock signal source lt source gt source is either internal default or external For example the following command changes the ATM clocking signal source to external atm 11 1 clock signal source external atm 11 1 4 10 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing an ATM Interface Using Site Manager To change the clocking signal source for the ATM line complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window
173. Y ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS LICENSEE FURTHER AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN BAY NETWORKS AND LICENSEE WHICH SUPERSEDES ALL PRIOR ORAL AND WRITTEN AGREEMENTS AND COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE PARTIES PERTAINING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT NO DIFFERENT OR ADDITIONAL TERMS WILL BE ENFORCEABLE AGAINST BAY NETWORKS UNLESS BAY NETWORKS GIVES ITS EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT INCLUDING AN EXPRESS WAIVER OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT iv 117374 C Rev 00 Contents Preface PSY RUUD E E tae css uea aah areas tases TE E ecnlalis xxiii Fa ME cds cas cata T A peasants xxiv ATO E a A xxvi Bay Networks Technical Publications csc cccisedssucsesedveetsestverssarrescnessicaceesssy cea ann aea xX X Fonto Ger HEI asparit a aa XXX Chapter 1 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM ATM General iniormalilon seesinsonsussnn a 1 2 PENEGE E iin A A A EN 1 2 Doa a AEA E E T A IA T EE E IAA E einai 1 3 MRNA Felo riina a aa aaa a 1 4 POCE ee E E E E E E A ren rr rath 1 4 Permanent and Switched Virtual Connections sssssessseesssesesrressetsrneesnnesreessreesens 1 6 ATM LAVOS sorsra ES dcuasaseetciadsanriaiaamanpaiaasiarieas 1 6 P SUC SP aa S E 1 7 ATM Layar sessensrirsssaisasenaa an E ere nee T anes 1 8 PI ves Ba Ss anaa daiaae eRe 1 8 Service Records and Virtual GiCUNG siciiiisiseccusssastniia nate ahi aiai 1 9 Supported Protos srianan anain o ea A inai 1 10 Tana O Pomem O aaraa aaenenaianei eae
174. a new virtual circuit Accept the default Enable if you want the flush protocol to operate on this LAN emulation client Select Disable if you do not want the flush protocol to operate on this LAN emulation client 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 25 117374 C Rev 00 A 35 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID LE Config Server ATM Address Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC None Any valid LAN emulation configuration server LECS ATM address Specifies the LECS ATM address Entering an address for this parameter is optional If you do not enter an address the LE client uses the well known LECS ATM address to open a configuration VCC to the configuration service Leave blank or enter the ATM address of the LECS 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 30 LAN Emulation Version 2 Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC Disable Enable Disable Enables and disables LAN emulation Version 2 Accept the default Disable if this LAN emulation client operates in a standard LAN emulation network Select Enable if you want this LAN emulation client to operate in an MPOA network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 30 A 36 117374 C Rev 0
175. able Server Max Next Hop Entries Server Max Pending Request Entries DNS Proxy Port Override NBMA Address Bogus NBMA Address Max Next Hop Cache Size Max QOS Cache Size Max Addr Translation Cache Size Server Load Balancing Server Negative Caching Server Negative TTL Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 94 System responds 16 Click on OK The ATM Service Records List window opens and displays a summary of the NHRP record that you configured 17 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 18 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 19 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 C 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Adding NHRP to an Existing ATM Interface To add NHRP to an existing ATM interface complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 on which you want to add NHRP The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the ATM LANE or LLC SNAP service record to which you want to add NHRP Click on the Protocols menu in the upper left hand corner of th
176. address user part to a LANE service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify 5 Set the ATM Addr User Part parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 17 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Selecting a LEC Configuration Mode A LEC can run in either automatic or manual mode In automatic mode the default selection the LE client uses the LAN emulation server LES address it receives from the LAN emulation configuration server LECS to join an ELAN You can bypass the LECS by choosing manual mode For manual mode you must specify the LES address and the LAN type of the ELAN you want the LE client to join For information about LAN types see Assigning an Emulated LAN Type on page 8 12 For information about configuring the LES address see Assigning ATM L
177. al notation Bay Networks recommends that you use the IP address that you used when configuring the IP protocol on the remote interface You can however accept the default value 0 0 0 0 under specific circumstances for example if you are using circuitless IP 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 1 1 8 Remote TCP Port Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP 8192 1 to 65535 Specifies the remote TCP port number of the label switching router LSR that the label edge router LER uses to establish the TCP connection Accept the default 8192 or enter a TCP port number from 1 to 65 535 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 1 1 9 A 80 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Routes Configuration Mode Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP Default AUTO Options AUTO MANUAL Function Specifies what kind of route table LDP uses When you accept the default Auto MPLS uses either the OSPF or RIP route table When you specify Manual LDP uses static routes Instructions Accept the default AUTO if you want MPLS to configure routes using OSPF MIB Object ID or RIP Specify MANUAL if you want MPLS to use static routes 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 1 1 10 Note The routes configuration mode takes precedence over the protocol you set see Protocol on page A 82 This means that when you set the routes configuration mode to Manual LDP disre
178. aling and ILMI messages These VCs remain in an operational state as long as signaling is enabled on the ATM interface Having dedicated PVCs defined for signaling and ILMI allows the ATM router to send and receive initial registration data to and from an ATM switch Caution Because most ATM devices use standard VPI VCI pairs for signaling Bay Networks recommends that you not change the control VC values However you can redefine the signaling and ILMI control VCs for your specific network 117374 C Rev 00 5 35 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Changing VPI Numbers By default the VPI for both the signaling and ILMI control VC is 0 However you can change the VPI number to any value from 0 to 255 Using the BCC To change the signaling VPI number navigate to the signaling prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 and enter vpi lt integer gt integer is the VPI number that you want the signaling VC to use For example the following command changes the signaling VPI number to 8 signaling 11 1 vpi8 signaling 11 1l To change the ILMI VPI number navigate to the ILMI prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi 11 1 and enter vpi lt integer gt integer is the VPI number that you want the ILMI VC to use For example the following command changes the ILMI VPI number to 8 ilmi 11 1 vpi8 ilmi 11 1 5 36 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signaling To
179. ample box atm 11 1 atm interface 11 1 and enter state disabled For example the following command disables the ATM interface atm interface 11 1 state disabled atm interface 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 4 15 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To reenable the ATM interface navigate to the ATM interface prompt and enter state enabled For example the following command reenables the ATM interface atm interface 11 1 state enabled atm interface 11 1 Using Site Manager To disable or reenable the ATM interface complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM link module interface ATM1 that you want to modify System responds The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on Interface Attributes The ATM Interface Attributes window opens 3 Set the Administrative State parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 12 4 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing an ATM Interface Disabling and Reenabling Signaling on an Interface By enabling ATM signaling the default setting you can configure switched features for example SVCs and LAN emulation on the interface If you do not intend to configure any switched features on the interface that is y
180. an set it to any value from 5 to 32 767 seconds Using the BCC To change the control timeout navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter control timeout lt value gt value is the timeout period you want the LEC to use for control frame interactions For example the following command changes the control timeout to 10 seconds lec service newyork control timeout 10 lec service newyork 8 32 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To change the control timeout complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Control Timeout parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 30 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to
181. and PVCs When you start ATM on the router all parameters use their default values Depending on the requirements of your network you may want to change some of these values This chapter describes how to customize PVC service record parameters and how to define the PVCs that operate on PVC service records It includes the following information Topic Page Disabling and Reenabling a PVC Service Record 6 2 Defining the Service Record MTU 6 3 Deleting a Service Record 6 6 Designating a PVC as Hybrid Bridged 6 7 Disabling and Reenabling a PVC 6 9 Modifying ATM Traffic Parameters 11 Modifying the Maximum AAL CPCS SDU Size 6 17 Assigning a Data Encapsulation Type 6 20 Changing PVC OAM Parameters 6 22 Copying a PVC 6 23 Deleting a PVC 6 24 Where to Go Next 6 26 117374 C Rev 00 6 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services This chapter describes how to customize existing PVC service records and PVCs For instructions on how to define a new PVC service record and PVC see Chapter 3 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Disabling and Reenabling a PVC Service Record By default you enable a service record when you add it to the interface However you can disable and reenable a specific service record at any time Disable the service record to stop traffic flow over it and any of its VCs Otherwise enable the service record Using the
182. ant to modify 2 Click on MPLS System responds The Select Connection Type window opens The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the VC Range VPI parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 85 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 11 15 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Specifying the Default VC VCI Minimum Range The default VC VCI minimum range identifies the lowest virtual channel number that MPLS can use when creating SVCs The VCI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 16 VCI bits This bit range allows for channel identifiers from 32 to 65 535 To specify a minimum VCI number complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify 2 Click on MPLS System responds The Select Connection Type window opens The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens
183. arameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 8 4 Set the SVC Inactivity Timeout Secs parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 8 5 Click on OK You return to the Select Connection Type window 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing an ATM Interface Assigning the Framing Mode You can assign various framing modes to an ATM line depending on the interface type your device uses Refer to Table 4 1 to match the appropriate framing modes to the correct interface type You can assign the following transceiver framing modes to the ATM line By default the ATM line uses SONET framing for OC 3 interfaces Cbit framing for DS 3 interfaces and G 832 framing for E 3 interfaces Table 4 1 Supported Framing Modes for ATM Interfaces Framing Mode Interface Type SDH SONET DS3_CBIT E3_G751 E3_G832 CBITnofallback ClearChannel OC 3 v v DS 3 M v v E 3 v v Using the BCC To change the framing mode navigate to the atm prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter framing mode lt mode gt mode is one of the following framing modes e sdh e g832 e sonet e cbitnofallback e cbit e clearchannel e g751 For example the following command sets the framing mode to SDH atm 11 1 framing mode sdh atm 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 4 9 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services
184. arameters Change default settings for ATM signaling Chapter 5 parameters Change default settings for classical IP service Chapter 7 record parameters Change default settings for LAN Emulation client Chapter 8 service record parameters Change default settings for Multi Protocol over ATM Chapter 9 server parameters Change default settings for the ATM router Chapter 10 redundancy parameter Change default settings for MPLS parameters Chapter 11 Obtain information about Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B Configure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 6 26 117374 C Rev 00 Chapter 7 Customizing Classical IP Service Records When you start ATM on the router all parameters use their default values Depending on the requirements of your network you may want to change some of these values This chapter describes how to customize ATM classical IP service record parameters and includes the following information Topic Page Disabling and Reenabling a Classical IP Service Record 7 2 Disabling and Reenabling User Part Autogeneration 7 4 Entering an ATM Address Network Prefix 7 6 Entering an ATM Address User Part Fe Deleting a Service Record 7 10 Where to Go Next 211 For general information about classical IP see Classical IP over ATM Concepts on page 1 28 117374 C Rev 00 7 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services
185. ardware MAC address feature you must enter a MAC address override value Using the BCC To disable the hardware MAC address feature navigate to the ATM interface prompt for example box atm 11 1 atm interface 11 1 and enter use hardware mac disabled For example the following command disables the use of the hardware MAC address atm interface 11 1 use hardware mac disabled atm interface 11 1 To reenable the hardware MAC address feature navigate to the ATM interface prompt and enter use hardware mac enabled For example the following command reenables the use of the hardware MAC address atm interface 11 1 use hardware mac enabled atm interface 11 1 4 18 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing an ATM Interface To disable or reenable the use of the hardware MAC address complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens Click on Interface Attributes The ATM Interface Attributes window opens Set the Use Hardware MAC Address parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 13 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Entering a MAC Address Override Value The MA
186. arting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Staring coniguiation TOIS saccrescccansetacscaanestccedonensduar canons aA ES 3 2 E EIE WIS e A EE EAA E AOE eae 3 2 Using the BCC sses PET cee EEE T T A ree PE Adding ATM to Mhe Configttatiaii sarrerea snisenepnsror osmini aai 3 3 Enabling Signaling LANE and Classical IP Service Records Only 3 3 Defining an ATM Service Record sss ccisdssccacsicesss ocsarcctwnnesvasaebosadaacteceiszosesanenieaiees 3 4 PCI Pe naian did tenia naman Oe niet Eni 3 5 Adding Protocols to an ATM Service Record cccceceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeees 3 6 Using Sile WEE saeh a dee 3 8 Gisan an ATN CEUTE doniis an N NR 3 8 Defining an ATM Service Record P EE E PERN erenetet 3 9 Enabling Protocols on an ATM Service Record cccceceesesceceeseetteeesseeeaeees 3 12 KOGNO PUGO Maiada eai kaaa a AANST a aAA cannes 3 14 Starting the MPOA Server eases rae mateo ruai PAT T E oeeie 3 15 Gonigornng LAN Emulation Cuents ices ji uneseaniiacnsunieihedeni enone oO Creating an MPS Service FSCO cccciis cs tsiisinnieesttiadaterivne sskinderteriederedses alee 3 17 Adding an MPS tothe MPS Service Record 22 cccccccccsccececccenecteeesctneesceaeecerennsanes 3 18 Vappi an MPS i9 a LEG hian a ERE eens 3 19 Configuring an SVC Control Connection seatseble RT T T ET 3 20 Conioonng DE MIPS skie a 3 22 Starting ATM Router Red ndahG cosisesisiss
187. as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Bay Networks Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Bay Networks Inc does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written
188. assical IP service record that you want to modify 5 Set the ATM Addr Net Prefix parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 18 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Entering an ATM Address User Part The ATM address user part suffix consists of a 6 byte end station identifier and a 1 byte selector field This 7 byte portion of the ATM address can range from 00000000000000 to FERFFFFFFFFFFFF You can either autogenerate this value see Disabling and Reenabling User Part Autogeneration on page 7 4 or you can enter the value manually Using the BCC To assign an ATM address user part to a classical IP service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 classical ip service dallas and enter user suffix lt address gt address is the ATM address user part that you want the VCs on the service record to use For example the following command defines the ATM address user part on the service record as 00000000000001 classical ip service dallas user suffix 00000000000001 classical ip service dallas 7 8 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Classical IP Service Records Using Site Manager To assign an ATM address user part to a classical IP s
189. at you intend this VC to receive Bay Networks recommends that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes Most packets fall well within this limit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 20 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID AAL Encaps Type Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC LLCENCAPS UNKNOWN LLCENCAPS NULL OTHER Specifies the data encapsulation type for the default VC and all VC connections Accept the default LLCENCAPS or select a data encapsulation type 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 21 Congestion Indication Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC OFF OFF ON This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default OFF for this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 22 Cell Loss Priority Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC OFF OFF ON This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default OFF for this pa
190. ata Encapsulation Methods Bay Networks ATM routers support multiprotocol encapsulation as defined in RFC 1483 enabling the router to multiplex combine and demultiplex separate bridged or routed protocol data units PDUs For transmission the encapsulation process adds a header from 2 to 8 octets in length to the PDU to allow decoding The decoding process determines the proper service access point SAP When receiving information the encapsulation method evaluates the header to determine whether the PDU is a valid routed or bridged cell If it is valid the encapsulation method then strips the header from the cell and passes the cell to the appropriate SAP for routing or bridging 1 12 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM You can choose from four data encapsulation types e LANE e LLC SNAP e NULL e NLPID How you assign a data encapsulation type and which type takes precedence depends on the virtual circuit type and for PVCs the order in which you assign the encapsulation type Each ATM device must encapsulate PDUs before sending them to the SAR sublayer LANE Encapsulation LANE provides Ethernet IEEE 802 3 or token ring IEEE 802 5 encapsulation of ATM PDUs for transmission over an emulated LAN You can assign LANE encapsulation to SVCs only LLC SNAP Encapsulation Logical Link Control Subnetwork Access Protocol LLC SNAP RFC 1483 allows multiplexing of multiple pr
191. ata vcs command displays portions of the ATM LAN emulation client table This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument service lt servicename gt Displays information about the specified service record only The output includes the following information Slot Slot number on which the LAN emulation client resides Conn Physical port number on which the LAN emulation client resides Service Name of the service record containing the client Data Direct The VPI VCI pair that identifies the data direct VCCs if they exist at the point where they connect to this LEC B 20 117374 C Rev 00 show lane le arp Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command The show lane le arp command displays the ATM LAN emulation client MAC to ATM cache table This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument service lt servicename gt Displays information about the specified service record only The output includes the following information Slot Conn Service IsRemote EntryType Status VPI VCI MAC Address ATM Address Slot number on which the LAN emulation client resides Physical port number on which the LAN emulation client resides Name of the service record containing the client Indicates whether the MAC address belongs to a remote client Indicates how this table entry was created LEARNED LEARNED CTRL LEARNED DATA STATIC VOL STATIC NONVOL or OTHER
192. ate value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 12 117374 C Rev 00 A 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID SVC Inactivity Timeout Enable Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes Enable Enable Disable If you select Enable the router disables any switched virtual circuits S VCs on which the router receives or transmits no cells for the number of seconds you specify using the SVC Inactivity Timeout Secs parameter If you select Disable the router keeps SVCs open unless you close them by another method Select Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 13 SVC Inactivity Timeout Secs Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes 1200 seconds 60 to 3600 seconds If the router receives or transmits no cells on an SVC for this number of seconds it closes the SVC providing that you set the SVC Inactivity Timeout Enable parameter to Enable Enter an appropriate time and be sure to set the SVC Inactivity Timeout Enable parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 14 A 8 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object I
193. aximum cache size to any value from 50 to 500 To set the maximum cache size complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Click on MPS The MPS List window opens 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify 6 Set the Maximum Cache Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 75 7 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 9 18 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Deleting an Individual MPS To delete an individual MPS complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes T
194. ay Networks recommends that you leave these timers set to their default values unless instructed to change them by Bay Networks Customer Service or your switch provider You can change the default values for SSCOP SAAL timers For each timer Table 5 4 provides the BCC name Site Manager name default value range and description Table 5 4 SSCOP SAAL Timer Descriptions Site Manager Default BCC Name Name Value Range Description poll timer Poll Timer 7 1to 120 Specifies the SSCOP poll timer value in tenths of a second This value sets the allowable time between POLL PDU transmissions The poll timer ensures that the receiver continues to return a solicited status STAT PDU to the sender on a regular basis The timely receipt of STAT PDUs restarts the poll timer and allows for more efficient transmission error recovery keep alive Keep Alive 20 1to120 Specifies the SSCOP keep alive timer value in tenths of timer Timer a second This value sets the allowable time between POLL PDU transmissions if there are no pending sequence data SD PDUs The keep alive timer is generally greater than the poll timer and greater than the length of one round trip delay continued 117374 C Rev 00 5 61 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Table 5 4 SSCOP SAAL Timer Descriptions continued Site Manager Default BCC Name _ Name Value Range Description no response No 70 1 t
195. back cell in the data stream Instructions Specify an interval from 1 to 255 seconds MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 32 A 76 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters OAM Threshold 1 Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC 1 1 to 255 Specifies the number of cells that the PVC can lose after not receiving an OAM loopback response before declaring that the PVC service record is not operational Specify a threshold value from 1 to 255 cells 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 33 OAM Threshold 2 Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC 2 1 to 255 Specifies the number of OAM loopback response cells that the PVC service record must receive before declaring that the PVC is operational again Specify a threshold value from 1 to 255 cells 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 34 117374 C Rev 00 A 77 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID OAM Alarm Enable Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC Disable Enable Disable When enabled this parameter tells the upp
196. bled classical ip service dallas 7 4 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Classical IP Service Records Using Site Manager To disable or reenable user part autogeneration on a classical IP service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on Service Attributes The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the classical IP service record that you want to modify 5 Set the User Part Autogeneration parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 17 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Entering an ATM Address Network Prefix The ATM address network prefix specifies the ATM domain of which the service record is a part This 13 byte portion of the ATM address can range from XX000000000000000000000000 to XXFFFFFRFRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF The XX byte must contain 39 45 or 47 These values define the authority and format identifier AFI The AFI byte identifies the group responsible for allocating
197. cal IP on page 3 11 Site Manager After you create an SVC service record the Add Protocols window opens To add IP NHRP and RIP to an SVC service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Click on IP A check mark appears in the IP box 2 Click on RIP A check mark appears in the RIP box 3 Click on NHRP A check mark appears in the NHRP box 4 Click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 5 Set the following parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Transmit Beast Address Click on Help or see Configuring IP Services for parameter descriptions continued 3 20 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 6 Click on OK System responds The ATM ARP Configuration window opens 7 Set the following parameters ATM ARP Mode ARP Server ATM Address Network Prefix ARP Server ATM Address User Part Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 102 8 Click on OK The NHRP Network Configuration window opens 9 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window 10 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 11 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 12 Click on Done You return to the Configura
198. ce MTU navigate to the atm prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter mtu lt integer gt integer is the MTU size in octets For example the following command sets the MTU size to 9188 octets atm 11 1 mtu 9188 atm 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 4 3 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To modify the MTU value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on Line Attributes The ATM ARE Line Driver Attributes window opens 3 Set the MTU parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 6 4 Click on OK You return to the Select Connection Type window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 4 4 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing an ATM Interface Defining the Data Path Notify Function The data path notify function specifies whether the router disables the interface between the driver and the higher level software the data path interface when you disconnect the cable from the ATM interface If you enable this function the default when you disconnect the cable from the interface the router disables the data path interface after a time you specify If you disable this function the router does not disable the data path interfa
199. ce Records and Clients Setting the Forward Delay Time As long as there are no changes occurring in the network topology the forward delay time parameter specifies the maximum amount of time that a LEC can maintain an entry in its LE_ARP cache without having to verify the relationship of that entry By default the LEC maintains entries for 15 seconds as long as the network topology does not change However you can set the forward delay time to a value from 4 to 30 seconds Using the BCC To change the forward delay time navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter forward delay time lt va ue gt value is the number of seconds from 4 to 30 that you want the LEC to maintain LE_ARP cache entries For example the following command changes the forward delay time to 15 seconds lec service newyork forward delay time 15 lec service newyork Using Site Manager To change the forward delay time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify continued 117374 C Rev
200. ce and continues to send information to the higher level software When you enable the data path notify function you can also change how long you want the ATM router to wait before disabling the data path interface By default when the state of the physical interface changes from operational to nonoperational the router waits 1 second However you can set this timer to any value from 0 to 3600 seconds Using the BCC To disable the data path notify function navigate to the atm prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter dp notify disabled For example the following command disables the data path notify function on the ATM interface atm 11 1 dp notify disabled atm 11 1 To reenable the data path notify function navigate to the atm prompt and enter dp notify enabled To change the data path notify timeout value navigate to the atm prompt and enter dp notify timeout lt integer gt integer is the amount of time in seconds that the router can wait before the data path notify function activates 117374 C Rev 00 4 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services For example the following command sequence reenables the data path notify function on the ATM interface and sets the data path notify timeout value to 2400 seconds atm 11 1 dp notify enabled atm 11 1 dp notify timeout 2400 atm 11 1 Using Site Manager To disable or reenable the data path notify function or to change the data path notify timeout value c
201. ces Specifying an Emulated LAN Segment ID You must specify an emulated LAN segment ID when The LANE client is a token ring end station A LANE client is a token ring end station when it resides at the edge of a token ring network You are routing IP or IPX across a source route bridging SRB token ring network The emulated LAN segment ID specifies the ring ID in decimal on which the LANE client resides By default this value is set to 0 However you can specify a value from 0 to 4095 for the token ring segment ID To change the emulated LAN segment ID complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM 3 Click on Service Attributes The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify 5 Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens 6 Set the Emulated LAN Segment ID parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 35 7 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configu
202. cifying a Remote TCP Port The remote TCP port number specifies the remote TCP port of the label switching router LSR that the label edge router LER uses to establish the TCP connection Accept the default 8192 or enter a TCP port number from 1 to 65 535 To change the remote TCP port number complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Set the Remote TCP Port parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 80 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Specifying the Routes Configuration Mode Customizing MPLS Configuration The routes configuration mode specifies what kind of route table LDP uses When you accept the default Auto MPLS uses either the OSPF or RIP route table When you specify Manual LDP uses static routes Note The routes configuration mode takes precedence over the protocol that you set see Specifying a Protocol for MPLS Route Configuration on page 11 9
203. cifying the Default VCL VPI Number Customizing MPLS Configuration The default VCL VPI number identifies the virtual path of the MPLS default VC The VPI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 8 VPI bits for a UNI connection This bit range allows for path identifiers from 0 to 255 To specify a VPI number for the default VCL complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Default Vcl VPI parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 85 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 11 13 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Specifying the Default VCL VCI Number The default VCL VCI number identifies the virtual channel of the MPLS default VC The VCI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 16 VCI bits This bit range al
204. ck on Help or see the parameter description on page A 60 Click on Done You return to the ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the MBS The maximum burst size MBS specifies the maximum number of sequential cells allowed on a VC before that VC must relinquish bandwidth to other VCs waiting to transmit This burst occurs at or close to the peak cell rate When setting the MBS you should select a value larger than the largest packet your control VC can transmit that is the size of the maximum AAL CPCS transmit SDU For example if your VC accepts packets that are less than 4608 bytes long PVC default set your MBS value between 45 and 50 cells By default the MBS is set to 40 cells However you can set the MBS to any value from 1 to 65535 cells 117374 C Rev 00 5 47 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services For additional information about the MBS see Using the MBS on page 1 26 For information about setting the maximum AAL CPCS transmit SDU size see Modifying the Maximum AAL CPCS SDU Size on page 5 51 Using the BCC To change the MBS value for signaling VCs navigate to the signaling VC prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 signaling ve 11 1 0 5 and enter
205. click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on Line Attributes The ATM ARE Line Driver Attributes window opens Set the Clocking Signal Source parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 9 Click on OK You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Specifying DS 3 Line Buildout On modules that use a DS 3 interface you can specify how the router conditions signals to migrate attenuation Specify a short line the default for a line less than 225 feet ft long Specify a long line for a line length of 225 ft or more Using the BCC To change the DS 3 line buildout navigate to the atm prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter ds3 line build out lt ength gt length is either short default or long For example the following command changes the DS 3 line buildout to long atm 11 1 ds3 line build out long atm 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To modify the DS 3 line buildout complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM link module interface opens ATM1 that you want to modify 2 Click on Line Attributes The ATM ARE Line Driver At
206. complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management Interface ILMI The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window opens Set the ILMI Get Retry Count parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 57 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the ILMI Get Next Request Timer The ILMI Get Next Request timer specifies the amount of time allowed for the circuit to receive a GET_NEXT_RESPONSE message after sending a GET_NEXT_REQUEST message By default the circuit waits 3 seconds for a response However you can set this timer to a value from 1 to 120 seconds Using the BCC To change the ILMI Get Next Request timer value navigate to the ILMI prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi 11 1 and enter get next timer lt integer gt 5 30 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling integer is the time value in seconds that you want the timer to use For example the following command changes the ILMI Get Next Request
207. cription control VCs A 62 MPLS LDP A 91 PVCs A 26 setting control VCs 5 54 MPLS LDP 11 26 PVCs 6 19 AAL CPCS Transmit SDU Size parameter description control VCs A 62 MPLS LDP A 91 PVCs A 25 setting control VCs 5 51 MPLS LDP 11 25 PVCs 6 17 AAL Encaps Type parameter A 92 AAL Encaps Type specifying 11 27 AAL Type parameter A 91 AAL described 1 8 accessing ATM networks PVCs 1 17 to 1 20 SVCs 1 22 ATM windows A 2 Add Party Sent timer See T399 adding adjacent hosts to LDP 3 35 ATM circuit 3 8 3 30 ATM to the router 3 14 LDP session 3 31 117374 C Rev 00 Index protocols to existing LDP session 3 33 to existing service record 3 13 to new LDP session 3 32 to new service record 3 12 PVCs 3 14 service records classical IP 3 11 LANE 3 11 PVC 3 10 address resolution ATM 1 31 addresses assigning 1 22 autogenerating 4 18 7 4 8 3 parts of 1 22 adjacent host parameters descriptions of A 104 adjacent hosts adding to LDP 3 35 adjacent hosts defined 1 33 Admin Status default VC enabling disabling 11 12 Admin Status parameter MLM A 83 Admin Status parameter MPLS default VC A 84 Administrative State assigning to interfaces 4 15 PVCs 6 9 parameter description A 12 A 23 Aggegation enabling disabling 11 10 Aggregation parameter A 82 Aging Time parameter description A 33 setting 8 37 Index 1 ARP Server ATM Address Network Prefix parameter A 102 ARP
208. ct Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify 5 Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens 6 Click on LES The ATM LES List window opens 7 Set the LE Service Name parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 38 continued 117374 C Rev 00 8 21 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 8 Click on Done System responds You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window Inserting a LES Address Out of Sequence secondary and so on Note You cannot insert a LES address out of sequence using the BCC The BCC uses the first LES that you enter as the primary the second LES as the Using Site Manager you can insert a LES address between two existing LES addresses by completing the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify Click on ATM The Select Connectio
209. cteristics of the individual connections that you want to set up for example the desired maximum cell rate average cell rate and burst size 117374 C Rev 00 1 23 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services You can change ATM traffic parameters several times before deciding on a particular set The following sections describe the traffic parameters and provide some basic guidelines for customizing them on an ATM PVC or ATM control VC that is the signaling VC or ILMI VC Note You do not need to manually configure traffic parameters for SVCs as you must for PVCs and control VCs because SVCs dynamically negotiate these parameters before sending data Using the PCR The PCR specifies the upper traffic limit in cells second that the ATM connection can support How you set the PCR depends on e The optical transmission rate of your ATM device e The amount of traffic you expect on a particular VC e The rate you want for each VC When setting the PCR keep the following considerations in mind e Each VC can have its own PCR e The PCR cannot exceed the maximum rate for the physical media For example you cannot exceed 149 76 Mb s for an OC 3c line e The PCR specifies the desired rate for the attached physical media that is OC 3c DS 3 or E 3 It does not specify the rate for the ATM network as a whole For example you can specify a full 149 76 Mb s for each PVC or control VC on an OC 3c connection However if the VC u
210. cument LAN Emulation Over ATM Version 1 0 For instructions on how to customize LAN emulation on your ATM router see Chapter 8 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients LAN Emulation Connectivity An emulated LAN can provide Ethernet IEEE 802 3 or token ring IEEE 802 5 connectivity With an emulated Ethernet or token ring network over ATM software applications can interact as if they were connected to a traditional LAN 117374 C Rev 00 1 33 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services LAN Emulation Components Each ATM domain contains a LAN emulation configuration server LECS Each emulated LAN comprises a group of LAN emulation clients LECs a LAN emulation server LES and a broadcast and unknown server BUS These servers provide specific LAN emulation services LAN Emulation Configuration Server The LAN emulation configuration server LECS assigns individual LE clients to different emulated LANs The LECS does this by giving the client the ATM address of the LAN emulation server LES This method allows you to assign a client to an emulated LAN based on the client s physical location ATM address or the identity of a LAN destination it represents LAN Emulation Clients The LAN emulation client LE client or LEC is the interface or virtual portion of an interface through which an end station forwards data resolves addresses and provides other control functions The LE client provides the MAC
211. d 1 6 virtual path identifier VPI defined 1 5 virtual path defined 1 5 VPCs defining maximum number of 4 21 117374 C Rev 00 VPI signaling parameter description A 43 See also ILMI VPI VPI Number parameter A 21 VPI VCI pairs setting 3 5 See also VPI Number or VCI Number WwW window path using A 2 A 3 A 4 windows accessing A 2 X Xmit Burst Size parameter description control VCs A 61 PVCs A 25 Xmit Peak Cell Rate parameter description control VC A 59 PVC A 23 Xmit Sustainable Cell Rate parameter description control VC A 60 PVC A 24 Xmt Burst Size parameter MPLS A 88 Xmt Peak Cell Rate parameter MPLS A 86 Xmt QOS Class parameter A 88 Xmt Sustainable Cell Rate parameter MPLS A 87 Xmt Tagging parameter A 93 117374 C Rev 00 Index 13
212. d SONET applications this is the count of coding violations reported via the C bits For C bit Parity it is a count of CP bit parity errors occurring in the accumulation interval B 28 117374 C Rev 00 FarEnd Cbit Stats Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Interval CESs CSESs UASs CCVs DS3 Plicp Stats Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Interval SEFSs Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line The current interval The number of C bit errored seconds CESs in the current interval A CES is a second with one or more CCVs one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS This count is only for C bit Parity DS3 applications The CES value does not increment when counting UASs The number of C bit severely errored seconds CSESs in the current interval A CSES is a second with 44 or more CCVs one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS This count applies only to C bit Parity DS3 applications The CSES value does not increment when counting UASs The number of unavailable seconds UASs in the current interval The number of C bit coding violations CCVs in the current interval For C bit Parity SONET applications this is the count of coding violations reported via the C bits For C bit Parity it is a count of CP bit parity errors occurring in the accumulation interval The slot module and co
213. d secondary configuration file for each member of an ATM router redundancy group you must download those files to each router See Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager for instructions on downloading files When downloading the configuration files keep the following in mind e Bay Networks recommends that the routers all have the same primary and secondary configurations e You should name the secondary configuration file config The router boots using the config file if it restarts e Each router must have a unique member ID e Each router should have a unique priority If the primary and secondary routers have identical configurations you can repeat the primary and secondary file configurations using a different member ID If the configurations differ you can modify the nonredundant parts of the configuration before saving the configuration file 3 28 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Deleting ATM from the Router You can use the BCC or Site Manager to delete ATM from the router Using the BCC To delete ATM from the router navigate to the ATM prompt and enter delete For example the following command deletes ATM from slot 5 connector 1 atm 5 1 delete box Using Site Manager To delete ATM from the router using Site Manager complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window c
214. d the Bay Networks product for which you need documentation Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product Using Adobe Acrobat Reader you can open the manuals and release notes search for the sections you need and print them on most standard printers You can download Acrobat Reader free from the Adobe Systems Web site www adobe com You can purchase Bay Networks documentation sets CDs and selected technical publications through the Bay Networks Collateral Catalog The catalog is located on the World Wide Web at support baynetworks com catalog html and is divided into sections arranged alphabetically e The CD ROMs section lists available CDs e The Guides Books section lists books on technical topics e The Technical Manuals section lists available printed documentation sets 117374 C Rev 00 XXix Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Make a note of the part numbers and prices of the items that you want to order Use the Marketing Collateral Catalog description link to place an order and to print the order form How to Get Help For product assistance support contracts information about educational services and the telephone numbers of our global support offices go to the following URL http www baynetworks com corporate contacts In the United States and Canada you can dial 800 2LANWAN for assistance XXX 117374 C Rev 00 Chapter 1 Understan
215. dancy and OAM The following layers relate directly to how Bay Networks routers support ATM e Physical layer e ATM layer e ATM adaptation layer AAL Physical Layer In a Bay Networks Backbone Node BN router Intelligent Link Interface ILD pairs provide access and processing An ILI pair consists of a link module and a processor module that work together to process and transmit information over a network Bay Networks provides an ATM Routing Engine ARE link module in conjunction with an ARE processor In addition Bay Networks provides a hub version of the ATM ARE ILI pair the Model 5782 ATM router This single hub module incorporating the ILI functions of both the link module and processor module resides in a System 5000BH chassis See Using the Model 5782 ATM Virtual Network Router for more information The ILI pair and the Model 5782 ATM router are functionally identical and you configure them in much the same way Unless otherwise noted the remainder of this guide treats the router ILI pair and the Model 5782 as if they were the same Depending on the ATM router type you can connect directly to an ATM network over any of the following physical interfaces e Optical carrier level 3 OC 3 e Digital service level 3 DS 3 e E 3 the European equivalent of the North American DS 3 117374 C Rev 00 1 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Although Bay Networks uses raw bandwidth to describe line rates inherent over
216. ded with your switching device Label Edge Router A label edge router LER is an LSR that resides between the IP and MPLS networks This router performs two generalized functions e It receives non MPLS traffic labels that traffic and forwards it to another label switching interface e It receives labeled MPLS traffic strips the label from the packets and forwards the traffic over a non MPLS interface Note This guide describes how to configure the LER For information about how to start MPLS on the router see Starting MPLS on page 3 30 For information about how to customize the ATM router interface for MPLS see Chapter 11 Customizing MPLS Configuration 2 6 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding MPLS Supported Protocols MPLS supports the following protocols e IP e RIP e BGP e OSPF For More Information For more information about MPLS refer to the following documents Black D Switching Solutions Expanding Networks Draft document Expected publication date 1999 LDP Specification Andersson Doolan Feldman Fredette Thomas work in progress Internet Draft lt draft ietf mpls ldp 01 txt gt August 1998 Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture Callon Rosen Viswanathan work in progress Internet Draft lt draft ietf mpls arch 01 txt gt March 1998 117374 C Rev 00 2 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Where to Go Next Use the following table to d
217. ding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM This chapter describes the concepts underlying ATM and where appropriate the specific ways Bay Networks implements these concepts on its routers It contains the following information Topic Page ATM General Information 1 2 Classical IP over ATM Concepts 1 2 ATM LAN Emulation Concepts 1 33 Multi Protocol over ATM Concepts 1 39 ATM Router Redundancy Concepts 1 4 PVC Operations and Management Concepts 1 44 For More Information 1 46 Where to Go Next 1 47 117374 C Rev 00 1 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services ATM General Information ATM Cells Asynchronous transfer mode ATM is a connection oriented cell based technology that relays traffic across a Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network B ISDN ATM provides a cost effective way of transmitting voice video and data across a network An ATM cell is a fixed length packet of 53 bytes It consists of a 5 byte header containing address information and a fixed 48 byte information field Figure 1 1 shows a diagram of an ATM cell 5 byte 48 byte header information field ATMOO01A Figure 1 1 ATM Cell This fixed length cell size allows you to predict network delays making ATM suitable for carrying real time information for example voice and video as well as data ATM allows the network to operate at a much higher rate than typical packet switching protocols
218. dit ATM Connector window 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 6 10 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Modifying ATM Traffic Parameters You can modify the following traffic parameters for PVCs e Peak cell rate PCR e Sustainable cell rate SCR e Maximum burst size MBS For additional information about traffic parameters see ATM Traffic Parameters on page 1 23 Setting the PCR The peak cell rate PCR specifies the upper traffic limit in cells s that the ATM connection can support By default the PCR is set to 4716 cells s Table 6 1 lists the valid ranges for each Bay Networks ATM router Table 6 1 Valid PCR Ranges ATM Router Range Cells s ATM ARE OC 3 SONET SDH ILI pairs 128 to 353 207 Model 5782 VNR 128 to 353 207 ATM ARE DS 3 ILI pairs 128 to 96 000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 832 framing mode 128 to 80 000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 751 framing mode 128 to 72 000 For additional information about the PCR see Using the PCR on page 1 24 Using the BCC To change the PCR value for a PVC navigate to the PVC prompt for example box atm 11 1 pvc service boston pvce 11 1 0 32 and enter per lt integer gt integer is the PCR value that you want the PVC to use 117374 C Rev 00 6 11 Configuring ATM and MPL
219. dit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Emulated LAN Name parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 30 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 11 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Assigning an Emulated LAN Type The emulated LAN type specifies the data frame format that the LEC uses when it joins an emulated LAN ATM allows you to choose from three emulated LAN types unspecified the default IEEE 802 3 or IEEE 802 5 When you assign unspecified as the LAN type the client obtains the ELAN type from the LECS when it joins an emulated LAN When you assign IEEE 802 3 or IEEE 802 5 the client joins only Ethernet or token ring ELANSs respectively Note If you set the LE client to run in manual configuration mode see Selecting a LEC Configuration Mode on page 8 8 you must specify an ELAN type of IEEE 802 3 or IEEE 802 5 Using the BCC To change the emulated LAN type navigate to the service record p
220. dit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI 3 1 to 100 Specifies the number of retransmissions of the ILMI SET_REQUEST message before the link is considered down Accept the default 3 or enter a value from 1 to 100 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 9 1 18 Signaling and ILMI Control VC Parameters The parameters for signaling and ILMI control VCs are identical A 58 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Xmit Peak Cell Rate cells s Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling gt Sig VC or Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI gt ILMI VC 4716 128 to 353207 ATM ARE OC 3 SONET SDH ILI pairs and Model 5782 ATM routers 128 to 96000 ATM ARE DS 3 ILI pairs 128 to 80000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 832 framing mode 128 to 72000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 751 framing mode Specifies the upper traffic limit in cells s that the ATM connection can support How you set the peak cell rate depends on e The optical transmission rate of your ATM device e The amount of traffic you expect on a particular VC e The rate you want for each VC After you determine the transmission rate of your ATM device set the peak cell rate within the specified range 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 8 117374 C Rev 0
221. dow You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 21 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Defining Retransmissions The ATM circuit can retransmit a specified number of RESTART and STATUS ENQUIRY messages before it considers the link down You can control how many of these messages the circuit retransmits Setting the Number of Allowable Restart Messages By default the circuit can retransmit three RESTART messages before it considers the link down However you can set the number of RESTART messages that the circuit can send to a value from 1 to 100 Using the BCC To change the number of times the ATM circuit can retransmit RESTART messages navigate to the signaling timer prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 timers 11 1 and enter restarts retransmitted lt nteger gt integer is the number of times a circuit can retransmit RESTART messages For example the following command changes the number of times to 8 timers 11 1 restarts retransmitted 8 timers 11 1 Using Site Manager To change the number of times the circuit can retransmit RESTART messages complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on AT
222. dress User Part Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 102 8 Click on OK The NHRP Network Configuration window opens 9 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window 10 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 11 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 12 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 3 16 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Creating an MPS Service Record To run MPS over ATM you must create an MPS service record that ATM recognizes The MPS service record is the base on which you add MPOA servers MPSs To create an MPS service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on an ATM link module interface opens ATM1 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Server Parameters window opens 4 Click on OK The MPOA Service Record window opens 5 Got to the next section Adding an MPS to the MPS Service Record to add an MPS to the MPOA service record or go to the next step to exit this procedure 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Sel
223. dress for this interface Also defines the end station identifier for this interface when automatically generating the user part suffix of an SVC service record ATM address Using the MAC Address Override parameter is very helpful when you want to hot swap ATM link modules For example when hot swapping ATM link modules you can enter the MAC address of the original ATM link module as the MAC Address Override value for the new ATM link module This allows you to keep the information already configured on the existing ATM link module while maintaining the integrity of the existing client information on the network Enter a valid MAC address 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 1 1 19 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters ATM Service Record Parameters Service record parameters define the ATM service records for an interface The ATM Service Records List window also provides access to the following e PVC parameters PVC service records only in the ATM Virtual Channel Link window e A list of all SVCs on that service record SVC service records only in the ATM Switched Virtual Circuit List window e LEC parameters SVC service records using LANE data encapsulation in the LAN Emulation Parameters window Parameter Enable Disable Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Enables or disables this service record Instruc
224. dule physical interface errors table for the ATM routing engine ARE The output includes the following line receive error statistics Slot Slot number on which the ATM physical interface resides Conn Connector number of the physical interface Circuit Circuit name assigned to the interface Invalid Headers Number of received cells dropped because of incorrect header format Over Sized SPDUs Number of packets dropped because their size was greater than the MTU specified for the interface Crc Errors Cyclical redundancy check errors Crc10 Errors Number of OAM cells dropped because they had an invalid CRC 10 Rx Lack of Rsrcs Number of packets dropped because no host buffers were available to hold the incoming data phy config enabled disabled slot lt s ot gt slot lt s lot gt lt connector gt sample Displays the ATM module physical interface table for the ATM routing engine ARE The output includes the following physical interface statistics Slot Slot number on which the ATM physical interface resides Conn Connector number of the physical interface Circuit Circuit name assigned to the interface Phy State Physical state of the ATM line Up or Down Speed Mbps Estimate of the interface s current bandwidth 155 520 000 Mb s 140 000 000 Mb s 100 000 000 Mb s 44 736 000 Mb s or 34 368 000 Mb s Type Interface type OC 3 MM multimode OC 3 SM single mode DS 3 or E 3 Framing Mode Transce
225. e You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window 6 16 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Modifying the Maximum AAL CPCS SDU Size The maximum AAL common part convergence sublayer CPCS service data unit SDU value defines the maximum packet size you intend the PVC to transmit or receive Setting the Transmit SDU Size Bay Networks suggests that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes for the maximum AAL CPCS SDU size that the VC supports in the transmit direction Most packet sizes fall well within this limit However you can set the transmit SDU size to any value from 1 to 65 535 bytes Using the BCC To change the transmit SDU size for the PVC navigate to the PVC prompt for example box atm 11 1 pvc service boston pvc 11 1 0 32 and enter tx sdu maximum lt integer gt integer is the maximum SDU size that you want the PVC to transmit For example the following command changes the maximum transmit SDU size to 65 535 bytes pvc 11 1 0 32 tx sdu maximum 65535 pvc 11 1 0 32 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To change the maximum transmit SDU size for a PVC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type
226. e Each ATM service record globally controls All protocols for any standard PVCs and SVCs that it contains All nonbridging protocols for any hybrid PVCs that it contains Selecting LANE to run on an SVC service record defines that service record as belonging to an emulated LAN Any protocols on that service record operate as if they were running over a traditional Ethernet or token ring LAN When running IP over a NULL encapsulated PVC service record you must change the Address Resolution parameter to None You must then add an IP adjacent host with the MAC address equal to the VPI VCI of the PVC See Configuring IP Services for information about the Address Resolution parameter 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Rules for Editing Protocols Depending on the type of virtual circuit you are using Site Manager requires you to add additional protocols or delete and edit existing protocols from specific protocol menus Use Table 1 3 to locate the appropriate protocol menu for each access mode Table 1 3 Locating and Using Site Manager Protocol Menus Site Manager Menu Location PVCs and SVCs Hybrid PVCs Only ATM Service Records List window v vt ATM Virtual Channel Link window v For nonbridging protocols tFor bridging protocols Remember hybrid PVCs use their service record configurations for nonbridging protocols and their individual configurations for bridging protocols D
227. e ATM service record For more information about PVC access methods including hybrid access see PVC Access Methods on page 1 17 117374 C Rev 00 6 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To designate a PVC as hybrid bridged complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the PVC service record that you want to modify Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens Set the Hybrid Bridged VC parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 22 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 6 8 117374 C Rev 00 Disabling Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs and Reenabling a PVC By default a PVC is enabled Up when you add it to the service record However you can disable or reenable the PVC at any time When the PVC is enabled traffic can flow over it When the PVC i
228. e LAN Emulation Parameters window 10 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window 11 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 12 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 13 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 8 20 117374 C Rev 00 Changing Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients the LE Server Name The LE server name is a value that uniquely defines each LAN emulation server LES that you create In the BCC you enter the LE server name when you create the LES You cannot change that name To use a different name you must add a new LE server to the configuration In Site Manager however the router arbitrarily assigns a unique value to each LE server that you add You can accept the value that the router assigns or change that value to any alphanumeric string However each LE server must have a unique name Using the BCC You cannot change the LE server name in the BCC after you use it to add a LES To use a different name you must add a new LES to the configuration For information about adding a LES using the BCC see Assigning ATM LES Addresses on page 8 17 Using Site Manager To change the LE server name complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Sele
229. e MAC Address Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Interface Attributes Enable Enable Disable Specifies whether or not to use the hardware MAC address for this interface When enabled the Configuration Manager uses the ATM hardware MAC address of the link module as the end station identifier when automatically generating the user part suffix of an SVC service record ATM address When disabled the Configuration Manager uses the value specified in the MAC Address Override parameter to assign the end station identifier when automatically generating the user part suffix of an SVC service record ATM address Accept the default Enable if you want to use the MAC address of the ATM interface when automatically generating the end station identifier portion of the ATM address user part Set this parameter to Disable if you want to use the MAC Address Override value when automatically generating the end station identifier portion of the ATM address user part If you set this parameter to Disable you must enter a value for the MAC Address Override parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 1 1 18 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID MAC Address Override Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Interface Attributes None Any valid MAC address Specifies the hardware MAC ad
230. e MPS obtains configuration parameters for example timers from the LAN emulation configuration server LECS or from the settings you provide You can set the MPS configuration mode to either automatic or manual In automatic mode the default selection the MPS uses the configuration parameters it receives from the LECS You can set the LECS ATM address that the MPS uses see Specifying a LECS ATM Address on page 9 8 or you can let the MPS use the well known LECS address to obtain this information You can bypass the LECS by choosing manual mode In manual mode you must accept the timer defaults or change these values see Defining MPS Timers on page 9 11 To change the MPS configuration mode complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 9 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes System responds The MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Click on MPS The MPS List window opens 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify 6 Set the MPS Config Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter descrip
231. e Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the VCC Timeout Period Enable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 32 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 35 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Setting the Maximum Retry Count The maximum retry count specifies the maximum number of times a LEC can retry an LE_LARP_REQUEST following the original request for any given frame MAC address You can allow either one the default or two retries Using the BCC To change the maximum retry count navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter maximum retry count lt value gt value is the maximum number of times 1 or 2 that you want the LEC to retry an LE_ARP_REQUEST for any given frame MAC address For example the following command changes the maximum retry count to 2 lec service newyork maximum retry co
232. e aes er oera T brelan emer 11 15 Specifying the Default VC VCI Minimum Range ccccccccseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeenaeeetaes 11 16 Specifying the Default VC VCI Maximum Range c cccccsccccsssecesseeeesseeeeesseeeees 11 17 Modifying Default VC Traffic Parameters ccccccceesseceeeeeeneeeeessaeeeeeesenaeeeesenas 11 18 Setting the Default VC Transmit POR siisscsscciesssndians tattciasarideedentianiansade 11 18 Setting the Default VC Transmit SCR parit ET REET T P dW cal 2 Setting the Default VC Transmit MBS cccccccecssesceeceeeseeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeaaees 11 20 Setting the Default VC Receive PCR cccceecccceecseseceeeeeeeeeeeessneeeeseseeaaees 11 22 Setting the Default VC Receive SCR cce A errr P 11 22 Setting the Default VC Receive MBS ccceccceesesseeceeseeeeeeeessseeeesseesaaees 11 24 Modifying the Default VC Maximum AAL CPCS SDU Size ccceeeceeesteeeeeeees 11 25 Setting the Tansmit SDU SIZO ccisscecess vesnnecceveshaetecdannaecaniaetueecacvehhuteateedetciense 11 25 Seiting the Receive SDU SIZE cisssscisssavensiasiveivigsievagnn a aN RNa 11 26 Specifying the AAL Encapsulation Type arai PEE E E rer ee 11 27 xiv 117374 C Rev 00 Specifying the Default VC Transmit QOS Class ccccceeesceeceeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeenaeeeeaes 11 28 Specifying the Default VC Receive QOS Class ccceeccccccssceesseeceseeeeesseeessseeeees 11 28 Specifying the Default VC A
233. e circuit enters the null state until the appropriate maintenance action is taken status enquiry tx timer T322 1 to 24 Specifies the Status Enquiry Sent timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit sends a STATUS ENQUIRY message to the network This message checks the validity of a call by requesting the call state that is active in progress or null The Status Enquiry Sent timer stops when the circuit receives a STATUS message from the network If the timer expires before the circuit receives a STATUS message the circuit can retransmit the STATUS ENQUIRY message see Setting the Number of Allowable Status Enquiries on page 5 23 If the circuit still does not receive a response the circuit clears the call continued 5 18 117374 C Rev 00 Table 5 1 Customizing Signaling Signaling Timer Descriptions continued BCC Name disconnect timer Site Manager Name TDisc Default Value 4 Range 1 to 180 Description Specifies the SAAL Data Link Disconnect timer value in seconds This internal timer alerts upper layers that the link is down The timer begins if the entire link goes down for any reason When the link goes down the SAAL sends a DISCONNECT REQUEST message to the upper layer application manager The SAAL sends a disconnect request every time the SAAL Data Link Disconnect timer expires and continues to send this
234. e interdependent how you edit some parameters depends on how you set others This appendix contains the Site Manager parameter descriptions for ATM and MPLS services You can display the same information using Site Manager online Help This appendix contains the following information Topic Page Accessing ATM Parameters A 2 ATM Line Parameters A 6 ATM Interface Parameters A 12 ATM Service Record Parameters A 15 ATM Virtual Channel Link Parameters A 21 LAN Emulation Parameters A 27 LES Parameters A 37 ATM Signaling Parameters A 39 ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters A 55 Signaling and ILMI Control VC Parameters A 58 ATM Signaling AAL Parameters A 63 MPOA Parameters A 67 ATM Router Redundancy Parameter A 75 OAM Parameters A 76 continued 117374 C Rev 00 A 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Topic Page MPLS Parameters A 79 NHRP Parameters A 94 ATMARP Parameters A 102 Adjacent Host Parameters A 104 Accessing ATM Parameters You can access ATM parameters using either e A window path ATM and MPLS e A menu path ATM only Both of these paths begin at the Configuration Manager window The window path provides detailed information about individual ATM interfaces The menu path provides global information about all interfaces on the router Using the Window Path ATM uses three main windows to acces
235. e next hop NHRP server Retain the default value Static NHRP configuration is not supported in the current BayRS release 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 4 Client Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the NHRP client entity on this ATM interface Select Disable to disable the NHRP client entity Accept the default Enable to enable the NHRP client entity 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 5 Client Reg Interval Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 25 1 to 65535 Specifies the registration interval in seconds for the NHRP client entity The registration interval determines how often the NHRP client generates NHRP registration requests to refresh and update its next hop cache In most configurations accept the default value If using other than default values ensure that this value is smaller than the value of the Client Hold Time parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 6 A 94 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Client Hold Time Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 30 1 to 200 Specifies the length of time in seconds during which client information is valid In most configurations
236. e not retried Calls Accepted Number of received calls that were accepted show classical ip table The show classical ip table command displays information for each classical IP interface This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument ipaddr lt ip_address gt Displays information about the specified IP address only The output includes the following information IP Address IP address of the classical IP interface Life The interval between registration refreshes the duration a registration is considered valid ATM Address ATM address associated with the classical IP client Vpi Vci VPI VCI pair associated with the classical IP client 117374 C Rev 00 show dsx3 circuits Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command The show dsx3 circuits command displays information about the DSX3 circuits in the configuration The output includes the following information Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Sec into Interval of Intervals Line Coding Line Type Status The slot module and connector number of the DSX3 circuit The name of the circuit associated with this line The number of seconds into the current 15 minute interval The number of complete 15 minute intervals The value is 96 unless the interface was brought online within the last 24 hours In that case the value is the number of complete 15 minute intervals since the interface has been online The line coding on this c
237. e the transmission rate of your ATM device set the sustainable cell rate within the specified range Enter 0 to turn off this function MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 11 117374 C Rev 00 A 87 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Xmt Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 40 1 to 65535 Specifies the maximum number of sequential cells that the default VC can transmit at the peak cell rate before the VC must relinquish bandwidth to other VCs When you set the MBS you should select a value larger than the largest packet your default VC can transmit that is the Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU size For example if your VC accepts packets that are less than 4608 bytes long set your MBS value from 45 to 50 cells Set a value in the specified range 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 12 Xmt QOS Class Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC CLASS3 CLASSO CLASS1 CLASS2 CLASS3 This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default CLASS3 for this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 13 A 88 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path De
238. e to Go Next 5 68 117374 C Rev 00 5 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Defining Signaling ATM signaling allows the router to dynamically establish maintain and clear a switched virtual connection at the UNI Using a series of messages as defined by the Q 2931 standard for signaling protocol Figure 5 1 the router 1 Assesses the availability of an ATM end point device 2 Establishes a connection with that device 3 Maintains that connection for the duration of the data transfer 4 Clears the connection when the transfer is complete Data encapsulation ATM adaptation layer AAL5 ATM layer Physical layer ATM0039A Figure 5 1 SVC PVC Signaling Protocol Stack Bay Networks ATM routers support ATM signaling functions as defined in the ATM Forum ATM User Network Interface specification Versions 3 0 and 3 1 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Disabling and Reenabling Signaling By default signaling is enabled on an interface when you create the signaling object BCC or when you create the circuit Site Manager However you can disable and reenable signaling on an interface at any time Note Disabling ATM signaling on an interface automatically sets the data encapsulation type to LLC SNAP and the virtual connection type to PVC for any new service records Using the BCC To disable signaling navigate to the signaling prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 and e
239. e to the atm prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter state disabled For example the following command disables the line driver on the ATM connector atm 11 1 state disabled atm 11 1 To reenable the line driver navigate to the prompt and enter state enabled For example the following command reenables the line driver on the ATM connector atm 11 1 state enabled atm 11 1 4 2 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing an ATM Interface To disable or reenable the line driver complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM link module interface ATM1 that you want to disable or reenable The Select Connection Type window opens Click on Line Attributes The ATM ARE Line Driver Attributes window opens Set the Enable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 6 Click on OK You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done Defining the Interface MTU You return to the Configuration Manager window The maximum transmission unit MTU is the largest possible unit of data that the physical medium can transmit By default the interface allows an MTU size of 4608 octets This value can handle most packet sizes However you can set the MTU to any value from 1 to 9188 octets Using the BCC To modify the interfa
240. e window Choose Add Delete The Select Protocols window opens Select IP RIP and NHRP Click on OK The IP Configuration window opens ojo N D Set the following parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Transmit Beast Address Click on Help or see Configuring IP Services for parameter descriptions 10 Click on OK The ATM ARP Configuration window opens 11 Set the following parameters ATM ARP Mode ARP Server ATM Address Network Prefix ARP Server ATM Address User Part Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 102 12 Click on OK The NHRP Network Configuration window opens continued C 6 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring NHRP for ATM Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 13 Set the following parameters or use default values NHRP Request Path Client Enable Client Reg Interval Client Hold Time Client Request Timeout Client Request Retry e Client Max Pending Request Entries Server Enable e Server Forward Enable Server Max Next Hop Entries Server Max Pending Request Entries DNS Proxy Port Override NBMA Address Bogus NBMA Address Max Next Hop Cache Size Max QOS Cache Size Max Addr Translation Cache Size Server Load Balancing Server Negative Caching Server Negative TTL Click on Help or see the parameter descriptio
241. ect Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window By default when you enter and then exit the MPOA Service Record window you automatically create and enable the MPOA service record using the default settings You need only enter and exit this window one time to create and enable the MPOA service record However for MPOA to operate you must add at least one MPS to the service record Note You can currently have only one MPOA service record per ATM interface However this service record can contain up to four MPOA servers 117374 C Rev 00 3 17 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Adding an MPS to the MPS Service Record To run MPS over ATM you must create an MPS service record that ATM recognizes However for MPOA to operate you must add at least one MPS to the service record To add an MPS to an MPS service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on an ATM link module interface opens ATM1 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Server Parameters window opens 4 Click on OK The MPOA Service Record window opens 5 Click on MPS The MPS List window opens 6 Click on Add The MPS Configuration Parameters window opens 7 Click on OK You return
242. ect Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the PVC service record that you want to delete Click on Delete Site Manager deletes the service record continued 6 6 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Designating a PVC as Hybrid Bridged PVCs do not typically allow for bridging in nonmeshed environments If your network combines bridging and routing over the same interface you need to use the service record portion of each PVC for routing while at the same time allowing bridging to operate To do this you must define the PVC as a hybrid bridged VC By default a PVC does not operate as a hybrid bridged VC However you can configure any PVC to operate as one Note When you define a PVC as a hybrid bridged VC Site Manager provides additional Bridge Spanning Tree Source Routing SR SR Spanning Tree Translational Learning bridge Translate LB and Native Mode LAN NML protocol options These protocols run on the PVC along with the protocols defined in th
243. ection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 29 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Specifying a Maximum Unknown Frame Time The unknown frame time specifies the maximum amount of time allowed to send unknown frames to the BUS For instructions on setting the unknown frame count see Setting a Maximum Unknown Frame Count on page 8 28 By default the LEC can send the allowable number of unknown frames for a maximum of 1 second However you can specify up to 60 seconds for the maximum unknown frame time For example if you accept the default values for the unknown frame count and frame time a LEC can send one unknown frame within 1 second for any given MAC address without having to initiate the Address Resolution Protocol ARP to resolve that MAC address Using the BCC To change the maximum unknown frame time navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter maximum unknown frame time lt va ue gt value is the maximum amount of time allowed from 1 to 60 seconds to send the number of unknown frames For example the following command changes the maximum unknown frame time to 10 seconds lec service newyork maximum unknown frame time 5 lec service newyork 8 30 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To change the maximum
244. ed Framing Modes for ATM Interfaces cccccecseeesteeeeeseeeees 4 9 Table 5 1 Signaling Timer Desciptiona sas sieceiceccncgen sarcatetestianactsansieanseccaieacempaeees 5 15 Table 5 2 Val PGR Ranges concsnsiienradiueianisiiaa ae 5 41 Table 5 3 v SORRE E acs Suwa dean situa tiara downs NARA AAE Ai 5 45 Table 5 4 SSCOP SAAL Timer Descriptions ccocts cits eerie heia dete 5 61 Table 6 1 Va POR PRUNES cosas ances hess deat eerg NNNNA 6 11 Table 6 2 Vali SCR Range sccasecovientonadscscncass earemnevideae raneaensseuies ere 6 13 117374 C Rev 00 xxi Preface This guide describes asynchronous transfer mode ATM and Multiprotocol Label Switching MPLS and what you do to start and customize these services on a Bay Networks router You can use the Bay Command Console BCC or Site Manager to configure ATM on a router BCC supports some ATM features However some features are not supported and must be configured using Site Manager In this guide you will find instructions for using both the BCC and Site Manager To configure MPLS you must use Site Manager Before You Begin Before using this guide you must complete the following procedures For a new router e Install the router see the installation guide that came with your router e Connect the router to the network and create a pilot configuration file see Quick Starting Routers Make sure that you are running the latest version of Bay Networks BayRS and Si
245. ee the parameter description on page A 68 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window The control ATM address user part consists of a 6 byte end station identifier and a 1 byte selector field This 7 byte portion of the ATM address can range from 00000000000000 to FEFFFFFFFFFFFF To set the control ATM address user part complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 9 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 4 Set the Ctrl ATM Addr User Part parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 69 System responds Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Disabling and Reenabling Individual MPOA Servers By default though it is not ope
246. eeeees A 5 Accessing Global ATM Interface Attributes aapna cernrmocenat P A 5 AIM Gine ParamelkiS ores asniideinoaias a a a aaa Oe AIN Menace PaAramMElErS iaiia aE AAS AASE Ea ia AR EANAN DRA A 12 ATM Service Record Paraimelers crass scdcatcdscctanncrcessceduunsntuedncndebaieeencdsnddy ea ani A 15 ATM Virtual Channel Link Parameters scissicaisivskcsedshivsiirdesorviiadesanviiadpnrenionnmedsonin A 21 LAN Emulation Parameters rer peepee P E oes ees ere mni A 27 LE S FAA GM o en etataicrndicdeicegcbdcanasne dcmncaneedacasneuelanesdae sdtesateencaedamenndie toned A 37 ATM Signaling PENA IGTEIS aasioisdcannwatsc tvs ncsusdwanntsasrencsarasveadenriverd sxinadarsiisexsasiusbexasvaaidiuns A 39 ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters ccesceeseeeeeteeeeeeees E E E nai A 55 Signaling and ILMI Control VC Parameters siisssriiimiisniinininanniien aii A 58 ATM Signaling AAL Parameters ic iascscccsecasieiearciasanncasieanediasinion costs deeendsetiennmrntinateduass A 63 ISP COA Farane OIS aia deeeecacaaiinr ack Uaere sctaceaedacs Uaacepadaneniees saveadaee sail taangecaceaniesede tonne A 67 AIM Router Redundancy Parameler secsrsenssieniinsn A 75 OAM Parameters 0 cceseeeeeee cena fei ets oda PE T asi feae ornet Gehan A 76 117374 C Rev 00 XV LDP Parameters 0 05 T ere ere wate ET EN Geman A 79 RE ea a a E enc iced cu ctaie A E E A 83 Static Route Parameters aisi cccsiescicesicericnceaswaivenssance
247. eeiais ORT eee lenis ee r 1 27 AM Emor ING eaacea ise tcerte denice ian eaieearn ceeds need Sadeiuehs arene en eed i 1 27 simulated Multicast Packet SUPPO ccccciieetiscs sence desiieesasetiseenteasindenienesseeteenateeennes 1 27 Converting Mb s to Cells s R ones ee Hee ee re i re pene 1 27 Classical IP over ATM CONS nies catia ra AAA 1 28 ATM Address PSS ONIN srianan aae AEE Ea 1 31 Configuring an ATM Service Record for ATMARPP cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 32 Configuring an ATM Address for an Adjacent Host ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 1 33 ATM LAN Emulation Concepts re Seep cecum meas setaaties pera ete OO LAN Emiatt Conme CHANEY ciciau aa ee a ae ESS 1 33 LAN Emulation Compane Mie sasssa aa aiaa 1 34 LAN Emulation Configuration Server seems ferian oe P paisai n 1 34 LAN Emulation IS iiion nania EG 1 34 LAN Emulation SENE ess cisertcn ceataetenata nuuincossilobin ai aN 1 34 Broadcast and Unkhown SErYET secerni annan enr e inr Aaa E 1 35 Redondan LES BUS ecankadaa a a ISOe vi 117374 C Rev 00 LAN Emulation States sike E N A A 1 36 a UE r E N EA OA AAT A S E TAA A A EA 1 37 LECS COMMGCE GIAE sionin Ea 1 37 Cora Ur E a a N AA 1 37 Jo SIAE saci iciaicccesetarcasespanees iaa E hendina R aean ere lead Lait TGA AUN TANS ccscsscctscsccnscedacedaatepcaecependeianniniegscacscaungrcacaaseedadescamidalatants 1 38 pe ELE oly E Gc fc ae een ete Ree ery eer ern enn ee Rene te
248. eive SDU size to 65 535 bytes pvc 11 1 0 32 rx sdu maximum 65535 pvc 11 1 0 32 Using Site Manager To change the maximum receive SDU size for a PVC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the PVC service record that you want to modify 5 Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 6 Click on the PVC that you want to modify continued 117374 C Rev 00 6 19 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 7 Set the Maximum AAL CPCS Receive SDU Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 26 8 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window 9 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Assigning a Data Encapsulation Type You can choose LLC SNAP the default value NULL or NLPID data encapsulation to operate on the PVC Assigning the data encapsulation type a
249. enerates NHRP registration requests If an NHRP registration response is not received after the specified number of attempts the NHRP client returns an error indication to the local requesting entity that is the MPS In most configurations accept the default value If using other than the default value keep in mind that higher values may degrade application responsiveness 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 9 Client Max Pending Request Entries Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 100 1 to 100 Specifies the maximum number of pending requests that the NHRP client will accept from the local requesting entity that is the MPS In most configurations accept the default value Ensure that you have sufficient memory space to accommodate the number of pending requests that you specify 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 10 Server Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the NHRP server entity on this ATM interface In virtually all configurations accept the default value Select Disable to disable the NHRP server entity Accept the default Enable to enable the NHRP server entity 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 11 A 96 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter
250. enmuees 9 5 Disabling and Reenabling Individual MPOA Servers cceseeeseeeseeesneeeneeeeeeeaeeseeeees 9 6 Specifying the MPS Configuration Mode Peer IA A errr aonan T onna 9 7 Speciving a LECS ATM AAIrESE exceedances taecesare tase cine tess Needeanetamteaed 9 8 Defining the MPS Control ATM Address Selector Byte cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaes 9 10 Defining MPS Timers 05 econ EEA PE PEP PA m Seng ihe Keepalive TITE mnsusnssnsnrema na a EIN he eI LUTE rsrsrs iaasa nim oiaaukecdan cudesbaaiadeeadaneutts 9 12 Seting he Mital Retry TIME mieria aar eea a reer ene eater 9 13 Seting ihe Maximum Roty TINE araniniirnisiiinirn ikana ARN NAESSENS 9 14 Setting the Give Up Time aeia PE rere serene wees aa re 9 15 Seting he Default Holding TIME ac iccccanceiacctastedctesasnedeancoakeeysedaaerpcicncbiedetausdategastecane 9 16 Delning MPS Cache VANES vacansiitsidioriss maune aN EnaA Ea NaS 9 17 Setting the Initial Cache Size doian PE A derin Aann 9 17 Setting the Maximum Cache Size siiani anA A 9 18 Deleting an Individual MPS soinaren eaaa a aaa iia 9 19 Deleting MPOA fromthe Merate si ictessscasttcssvindend sand enseeistacaundscatcanercacqreiieescuadsiedaaioniees 9 20 bere 1s NERE ir N E T aae 9 21 117374 C Rev 00 xiii Chapter 10 Customizing ATM Router Redundancy Setting the ATM Router Redundancy Monitoring Timer 0 cccececeeeseeeceeeeeeeseeeeeees 10 2 Where 10 Go Noki i
251. er gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling UNI_V30 UNI_V30 UNI_V31 Specifies how the interface defines Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol SSCOP frames Version 3 0 and Version 3 1 SSCOP frames are incompatible You must assign the same protocol standard for both the router interface and the switch Accept the default UNI_V30 if the switch uses UNI Version 3 0 to define SSCOP frames Select UNI_V31 if the switch uses UNI Version 3 1 to define SSCOP frames 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 15 Max Number of SVC Applications Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 20 1 to 32767 Specifies the maximum number of SVC applications allowed for this circuit The number of SVC applications corresponds to the number of LAN emulation or IP RFC 1577 clients allowed for the circuit Accept the default 20 or enter a value from 1 to 32767 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 6 A 40 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Max Point to Point Connections Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Sig
252. er window 117374 C Rev 00 8 51 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Where to Go Next Use the following table to determine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about ATM concepts Chapter 1 Learn about MPLS concepts Chapter 2 Start ATM or MPLS Chapter 3 Change default settings for ATM interface Chapter 4 parameters Change default settings for ATM signaling Chapter 5 parameters Change default settings for ATM PVC service record Chapter 6 and PVC parameters Change default settings for classical IP service Chapter 7 record parameters Change default settings for Multi Protocol over ATM Chapter 9 server parameters Change default settings for the ATM router Chapter 10 redundancy parameter Change default settings for MPLS parameters Chapter 11 Obtain information about Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B Configure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 8 52 117374 C Rev 00 Chapter 9 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Bay Networks supports Multi Protocol over ATM MPOA server configuration MPOA is the ATM Forum standard that specifies a way to efficiently transport intersubnet unicast data in a LANE environment For general information about the Bay Networks implementation of MPOA see Multi Protocol over ATM Concepts on page 1 39 This chapter describes how to customize an MPOA server configu
253. er Negative Caching Server Negative TTL Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 94 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window C 8 117374 C Rev 00 Disabling an NHRP Record Configuring NHRP for ATM Services To disable an NHRP record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose IP The IP menu opens Choose NHRP Choose Interfaces The NHRP menu opens The NHRP Interface List window opens ay wo py Click on the NHRP interface that you want to disable Set the Enable parameter to Disable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 101 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Deleting NHRP To globally delete NHRP complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose NHRP The NHRP menu opens 4 Choose Delete NHRP Site Manager prompts whether you want to delete NHRP Click on Yes You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 C 9 A AAL CPCS Receive SDU Size parameter des
254. er layer protocol that the PVC has received an OAM alarm and that the service record is down When disabled OAM alarms are ignored and no message is sent to the upper layer protocol Select Enable if the connecting switch has OAM alarm capability and if you want the ATM PVC to notify the upper layer protocol of any OAM alarms Select Disable if the connecting switch does not have OAM alarm capability or if you do not want the ATM PVC to notify the upper layer protocol of any OAM alarms 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 35 A 78 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters MPLS Parameters This section describes MPLS parameters MPLS parameters include LDP parameters MLM parameter Static route parameters Default VC parameters LDP Parameters The following parameters define the LDP Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Enable Disable Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the Label Distribution Protocol LDP for this MPLS interface Accept the default Enable to allow MPLS LDP to operate over the interface Disable the session to turn off MPLS LDP on the interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 1 1 2 Local IP Address Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LD
255. er you determine the transmission rate of your ATM device set the peak cell rate within the specified range 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 8 117374 C Rev 00 A 23 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Xmit Sustainable Cell Rate cells s Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC Default 2358 Options 0 128 to 353207 ATM ARE OC 3 SONET SDH ILI pairs and Model 5782 ATM routers 0 128 to 96000 ATM ARE DS 3 ILI pairs 0 128 to 80000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 832 framing mode 0 128 to 72000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 751 framing mode Function Specifies the upper limit of the ATM connection conforming average rate The average rate equals the total number of cells transmitted divided by the duration of the connection Using the sustainable cell rate SCR you can define the future cell flow of a VC in greater detail than by using only the peak cell rate For ATM ARE ILI pairs and Model 5782 ATM routers the SCR maps directly to the minimum cell rate MCR The MCR defines the minimum amount of guaranteed bandwidth allowed for PVCs and control VCs on the ATM line When setting the SCR keep the following in mind The SCR maps directly to the MCR The MCR provides guaranteed bandwidth for PVCs and control VCs while allowing sufficient bandwidth for SVCs to operate To be useful the SCR must not exceed the PCR If you know the average rate
256. erface resides Connector number of the physical interface Circuit name assigned to the interface Number of packets received at the transceiver receive interface that have not been discarded Number of packets transmitted at the transceiver transmit interface Number of invalid headers detected by the transceiver interface Number of receive CRC errors detected by the transceiver interface Total number of errors detected by the transceiver interface 117374 C Rev 00 B 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services show atm services The show atm services command displays all ATM service record instances or a subset of service record instances along with the AAL data encapsulation type state VC type and ATM address a combination of network prefix and user part This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments slot lt s ot gt lt connector gt Displays information about the specified slot or slot connector pair only service lt servicename gt Displays information about the specified service record only The output includes the following information Service Service name associated with this service record Encaps Encapsulation type of this VC LAN Emulation LLC SNAP NLPID or NULL State State of the ATM line Up Down Init initializing Reject or Absent Type Type of virtual circuit PVC or SVC ATM Address ATM address of this service record This parameter applies only to
257. ervice record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on Service Attributes The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the classical IP service record that you want to modify 5 Set the ATM Addr User Part parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 17 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Deleting a Service Record You can use the BCC or Site Manager to delete a classical IP service record Using the BCC To delete a classical IP service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 classical ip service dallas and enter delete For example the following command deletes classical IP service record dallas classical ip service dallas delete atm 11 1 Using Site Manager To delete a classical IP service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager wind
258. es Configuring an ATM Service Record for ATMARP When configuring a service record to act as an ATMARP client or server e Define a classical IP service record Specify SVC as the virtual circuit type for the service record All network devices on a LIS must connect over SVCs Specify LLC SNAP or NULL as the encapsulation type for the service record RFC 1577 defines LLC SNAP as the encapsulation type for ATMARP For more information about how to create an SVC service record to run classical IP see Chapter 3 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS e Add IP and IP routing protocols to the circuit e Configure ATMARP Mode as either a client or a server For a description of the ATM specific IP parameters necessary for classical IP ATMARP operation over ATM see ATMARP Parameters on page A 102 For full compatibility with RFC 1577 you may have to specify a maximum transmission unit MTU size of 9188 bytes See Defining the Interface MTU on page 4 3 for the BCC or the Site Manager Interface MTU parameter description on page A 6 for additional information about setting the MTU size When configuring the router as a client you must define the server switch address The client sends ATMARP requests to the server switch address Note If you remove and replace a link module that is configured as an ATMARP client the client loses connectivity until the ATMARP server registration refre
259. escription A 49 setting 5 17 T316c parameter description A 50 setting 5 18 T322 parameter description A 51 setting 5 18 T398 parameter description A 52 setting 5 19 T399 parameter description A 53 setting 5 20 TCP port specifying 11 4 11 6 TCP configuring for LDP 3 38 TDisc parameter description A 52 setting 5 19 technical publications xxix technical support xxx template group configuration file creating 3 23 text conventions xxiv thresholds connection 5 9 timer resolution defining 5 14 Index 12 timers modifying ILMI 5 28 to 5 34 LEC LANE 8 32 to 8 42 MPS 9 11 signaling 5 15 to 5 21 SSCOP SAAL 5 61 See also specific timer traffic parameters modifying control VCs 5 41 MPLS LDP 11 18 PVCs 6 11 transmission path defined 1 5 U UNI version assigning 5 5 unknown frames controlling 8 28 User Part Autogeneration enabling disabling 7 4 8 3 parameter description A 17 V Vc Range Maximum VCI parameter A 86 Vc Range Minimum VCI parameter A 86 Vc Range VPI parameter A 85 VCC Timeout Period Enable enabling disabling 8 34 parameter description A 32 VCCs defining maximum number of 4 21 VCI signaling See also ILMI VCI VCI Number parameter A 22 VCI parameter signaling A 44 virtual channel identifier VCT defined 1 4 virtual channel defined 1 4 virtual circuits See PVCs or SVCs Virtual Connection Type parameter A 16 virtual connections compare
260. et Request TIMET scccsccetsetscatsestiaaterteneavenstateatadenns 5 28 Setting the ILMI Get Request Retry Count sseessessssssssssssrrssrrsssrrsssrnesrnesnees 5 29 Setting the ILMI Get Next Request Timer ccccceseecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeaes 5 30 Setting the ILMI Get Next Request Retry Count s sssssssseeesseesseeersesseerseeee D 1 Setting the ILMI Set Request Timer 006 eens T bekan eraai are Setting the ILMI Set Request Retry Count 00 cc cseeeeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeenaes 5 34 RTT MIs Comal VOS asin cwisceaenis asta Sa tae untied aetna inane eas later al a a agen 5 35 Changing VPI Numbers PE E T serene neers PEE E PE eee CRN NO OFS smira e a SN ENAN nin NNA 5 38 Maditying Control VG Traffic Parameters c ciscc ins siasncssccnnanocndanedieancmennancinedaneanee 5 41 Seting Me POR 4g ccceniey caste sae dS heana a asd dae rs 5 41 SUMO CIN ra 5 carne in ans E A phan aenN pila 5 45 Setting the MES ceccscsscnspsiacsassaavaaaebeocsec PT ume E ependi pice 5 47 x 117374 C Rev 00 Modifying the Maximum AAL CPCS SDU Size oo eee eereeteneeereeteeeeeeeeee DOT Seting the Tansmit SDU SIZE sss cansivosensarnauouissearnsueatadvantuaid aiotasiaccunstacaaennins 5 51 Seting the Receive SDU Slee sisinio ir a evade 5 54 Defining SSCP Sgnaling AAL srescsinainiia a ere rer tener rey perce rere ter ree 5 57 Disabling and Reenabling SSCOP SAAL 06 reer apadi meas 5 58 Defining the Link Connectl
261. etermine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about ATM concepts Chapter 1 Start ATM or MPLS Chapter 3 Change default settings for ATM interface Chapter 4 parameters Change default settings for ATM signaling Chapter 5 parameters Change default settings for ATM PVC service record Chapter 6 and PVC parameters Change default settings for classical IP service Chapter 7 record parameters Change default settings for LAN Emulation client Chapter 8 service record parameters Change default settings for Multi Protocol over ATM Chapter 9 server parameters Change default settings for the ATM router Chapter 10 redundancy parameter Change default settings for MPLS parameters Chapter 11 Obtain information about Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B Configure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 2 8 117374 C Rev 00 Chapter 3 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS This chapter describes how to create a basic ATM or MPLS configuration by specifying values for required parameters only and accepting default values for all other parameters This chapter contains the following information Topic Page Starting Configuration Tools 3 2 Starting ATM Services 3 2 Starting the MPOA Server 3 15 Starting ATM Router Redundancy 3 23 Deleting ATM from the Router 3
262. eturn to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 9 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Assigning an Emulated LAN Name Emulated LAN ELAN names are optional values that provide administrative assistance when you need to distinguish a LEC as belonging to one of several ELANSs You can specify an ELAN name up to 128 alphanumeric characters If you choose not to enter an ELAN name the LECS assigns the LE client to an ELAN for this domain However because some switches do not support a default emulated LAN Bay Networks recommends that you assign an ELAN name to the LEC Using the BCC To assign an emulated LAN name navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter emulated lan name lt value gt value is the alphanumeric string that identifies the emulated LAN that you want this LEC to join For example the following command assigns the LEC to the emulated LAN marketing lec service newyork emulated lan name marketing lec service newyork 8 10 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To assign an emulated LAN name to a LEC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The E
263. ev 00 1 47 Chapter 2 Understanding MPLS This chapter describes the concepts underlying MPLS and where appropriate the specific ways Bay Networks implements these concepts on its routers It contains the following information Topic Page MPLS General Information 2 2 The MPLS Network 2 5 rted Pr 2 7 For More Information 2 7 Where to Go Next 2 8 117374 C Rev 00 2 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services MPLS General Information Multiprotocol Label Switching MPLS is an emerging Internet Engineering Task Force IETF standard that is currently in draft form Its primary goal is to provide a standardized solution that supercedes existing proprietary solutions for integrating label swapping and forwarding with network layer routing MPLS works in an environment where traditional network layer routing protocols for example OSPF and BGP are used to maintain the routing topology and forwarding information base FIB for each router In connectionless networks those using connectionless network layer protocols as a packet travels from one hop to another each router must determine where to forward the packet based on the individual packet header This decision process can be broken down into two major tasks classifying a set of packets as part of a forwarding equivalence class FEC and mapping each FEC to a next hop By classifying a set of packets as part of an FEC the router uses the same f
264. f the server with which the classical IP client communicates show classical ip interface The show classical ip interface command displays information for all classical IP interfaces on the ATM router or for one specific IP address This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument ipaddr lt ip_address gt Displays information about the specified IP address only The output includes the following information Interface IP address of the classical IP interface Address ATM address of the server with which the classical IP client communicates Server Conn State The state of the connection to the ATMARP server 117374 C Rev 00 B 9 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services show classical ip stats The show classical ip stats command displays statistics for all classical IP interfaces on the ATM router or for one specific IP address This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument ipaddr lt ip_address gt Displays statistical information about the specified IP address only The output includes the following information Interface IP address of the classical IP interface Open SVCs Number of open SVCs Calls Attempted Number of calls ATMARP has attempted Calls Succeeded Number of originated calls that have completed successfully Failed May Retry Number of attempted calls that failed but were retried Failed No Retry Number of attempted calls that failed but wer
265. fault Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Rev Peak Cell Rate Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 4716 128 to 353207 Specifies the upper traffic limit in cells s that the MPLS ingress connection can accept The default value 0 indicates that the PCR is attempting to run at line rate Set the peak cell rate within the specified range 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 14 Rev Sustainable Cell Rate Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 4716 0 128 to 353207 Specifies the upper limit of the ATM connection conforming average rate on the receiving side The average rate equals the total number of cells transmitted divided by the duration of the connection The default value 0 indicates that the transmit SCR is off Using the sustainable cell rate SCR you can define the future cell flow of a VC in greater detail than by using only the peak cell rate The SCR maps directly to the minimum cell rate MCR The MCR defines the minimum amount of guaranteed bandwidth allowed for the default VC on the ATM line When setting the SCR keep the following in mind To be useful the SCR must not exceed the PCR e If you know the average rate set the SCR approximately 10 percent
266. fault Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Aging Time Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC 300 10 to 300 Specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that a LAN emulation client can maintain an entry in its LAN emulation ARP cache without verifying the relationship of that entry Accept the default 300 or enter a value from 10 to 300 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 15 Forward Delay Time Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC 15 4 to 30 When there are no changes occurring in the network topology this parameter specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that a LAN emulation client can maintain an entry in its LAN emulation ARP cache without verifying the relationship of that entry Accept the default 15 or enter a value from 4 to 30 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 16 Expected LE_ARP Response Time Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC 3 1 to 30 Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the LAN emulation client expects an ARP request and ARP response cycle to take The LAN emulation client uses this value during retries and verifications Accept the default 3 or enter a value from 1 to 30 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 1 117374 C Rev 00 A 33 Co
267. fication Setting this parameter is optional If you do not enter an ATM address network prefix in the range specified above the service record accepts the first prefix value that it receives from the switch 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 2 1 8 A 18 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Emulated LAN Name Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt Add Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC Default ELAN Leave blank or enter up to 128 alphanumeric characters Specifies the name of the emulated LAN that this LE client joins when it joins an emulated LAN Clients that use automatic configuration mode use this parameter in their LE_LCONFIGURE_REQUEST frames Clients that use manual configuration mode use this parameter in their LE_JOIN_REQUEST frames Entering an ELAN name is optional If you choose not to enter an ELAN name the LAN emulation configuration server LECS assigns the LE client to an ELAN for this domain However because some switches do not support a default emulated LAN Bay Networks recommends that you assign an ELAN name to the LE client Either leave this parameter blank or enter an ELAN name up to 128 alphanumeric characters that identifies the emulated LAN you want this client to join 1 3 6 1 4
268. for Classical IP To add a service record for classical IP complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on Add The ATM Service Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Data Encapsulation Type parameter to LLC SNAP or NULL Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 16 6 Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 7 Go to Enabling Protocols on an ATM Service Record on page 3 12 Adding a Service Record for LANE To add a service record for LANE complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on Add The ATM Service Record Parameters window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 3 11 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Click on OK System
269. fy a LES entry complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify continued 117374 C Rev 00 8 23 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 5 Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens 6 Click on LES The ATM LES List window opens 7 Click on the LES that you want to modify parameters Enable Prefix 9 Click on Done 8 Set one or more of the following LE Server ATM Address Network LE Server ATM Address User Part Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 37 You return to the LAN Emulation Parameters window 10 Click on OK 11 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 12 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 13 Click on Done Deleting a LES Entry You can delete a LES entry at any time Using the BCC You return to the Configuration Manager
270. g and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 10 1 to 540 Specifies the SAAL Data Link Connect timer value in seconds This timer begins when a signaling AAL malfunction occurs The SAAL Data Link Connect timer stops when the circuit reestablishes SAAL that is when the circuit sends an AAL ESTABLISH REQUEST and receives an AAL ESTABLISH CONFIRM message If the timer expires before the circuit can reestablish SAAL the circuit clears the connection Accept the default 10 or enter a value from 1 to 540 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 27 T310 Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 10 1 to 60 Specifies the Call Proceeding Received timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit receives a CALL PROCEEDING message from the network If the router does not receive a CONNECT or RELEASE message before this timer expires it clears the connection for that virtual circuit Accept the default 10 or enter a value from 1 to 60 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 28 117374 C Rev 00 A 47 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID T313 Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt
271. g MPLS Configuration Specifying a Remote IP Address The remote IP address parameter specifies the IP address of the interface on the label switching router LSR that LDP on the label edge router LER uses to establish the TCP connection The default address 0 0 0 0 is useful only under specific circumstances for example when using circuitless IP In most cases you must enter a valid IP address for this interface in dotted decimal notation If you started MPLS with the default IP address of 0 0 0 0 you can change the address Note Bay Networks recommends that you use the IP address that you used when configuring the IP protocol on the remote interface To change the remote IP address complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Set the Remote IP Address parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 80 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 11 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Spe
272. g the Receive SDU Size deaan iene niena PEPR ii T ioe 6 19 Assigning a Data Encapsulation Typ sccccccecdscnneciecanwreinenwnisinincerraienieeenewrancann 6 20 Ghangding PYG OAM APS NUNS discs cosarnsencsoernsaircaa so vusverdonuisind sranmaseteaa rnin deaduntaemnansid 6 22 Copying a PVC meals onac aaa Recetas orkoi ET besteusiade Neeti meus ei 6 23 Deleni a ah CUP nneree reer ener Treat Perere rey et rere Tener ree ire tee N tr reer rrr r 6 24 NOE Tt OO NE cchcrnn sahitne sian AA NR a R tian dieeennamn aE 6 26 117374 C Rev 00 xi Chapter 7 Customizing Classical IP Service Records Disabling and Reenabling a Classical IP Service Record ceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeee 7 2 Disabling and Reenabling User Part AUtogeneration eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseteeeeetteeee LOA Entering an ATM Address Network Prefix ere T T aain ET muniad O Entering an ATM Address User Part sicccsinaissiciricinisioa aiina 7 8 Deleting a Senice Recon oaroionnonssai niii a A R 7 10 Where to Go Next pred eer re E EE E T ee E T 7 11 Chapter 8 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Disabling and Reenabling a LANE Service Record E T ortai rarai re Disabling and Reenabling User Part Autogeneration ccceceeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 8 3 Entering an ATM Address Network Prefix 0 c cecccseecccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeseseeceeeenseeeeeeeeneees 8 5 Entering an ATM Address U
273. gards the protocol setting Parameter Hold Time Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP Default 40 Options 1 to 240 Function Specifies the number of seconds that LDP can wait without receiving a keepalive packet from its peer entity before considering the LDP session down Instructions Accept the default hold time 40 seconds or specify a hold time from 1 to 240 MIB Object ID seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 1 1 11 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Protocol Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP OSPF OSPF RIP OTHER Specifies the protocol that LDP uses to configure routes or allows LDP to use both a protocol and IP static routes Accept the default OSPF for OSPF routing Specify RIP to use the Routing Information Protocol By using either the OSPF or RIP setting LDP does not use any of the IP static routes in the route table To use static routes based on the entries in the forwarding information base FIB along with OSPF specify HYBRIDOSPE To use static routes along with RIP specify HYBRIDRIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 1 1 12 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Note The routes configuration mode takes precedence over the protocol you set see Routes
274. ger gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables ILMI on this interface Accept the default Enable if you want ILMI to remain enabled on this interface Select Disable if you do not want ILMI enabled on this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 9 1 2 ILMI VPI Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI 0 0 to 255 Specifies the virtual path identifier VPI for the ILMI VC Accept the default 0 or enter a value from 0 to 255 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 9 1 8 Caution The signaling VC 0 5 and the ILMI VC 0 16 are reserved These VCs remain in an operational state as long as signaling is enabled on the ATM interface Because most ATM devices use these VPI VCI pairs for signaling Bay Networks recommends that you not change these values 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID ILMI VCI Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI 16 1 to 65535 Specifies the virtual channel identifier VCT for the ILMI VC Accept the default 16 or enter a value from 1 to 65535 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 9 1 9 Caution The signaling VC 0 5 and the ILMI VC 0 16 are reser
275. gnaling Config window opens 4 Click on OK The Edit ATM Connector window opens 5 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 C 3 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Click on Add The ATM Service Record Parameters window opens 7 Set the Data Encapsulation parameter to LANE or LLC SNAP 8 Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 9 Select IP RIP and NHRP 10 Click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 11 Set the following parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Transmit Bcast Address Click on Help or see Configuring IP Services for parameter descriptions 12 Click on OK The ATM ARP Configuration window opens 13 Set the following parameters ATM ARP Mode ARP Server ATM Address Network Prefix ARP Server ATM Address User Part Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 102 14 Click on OK The NHRP Network Configuration window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring NHRP for ATM Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 15 Set the following parameters or use default values NHRP Request Path Client Enable Client Reg Interval Client Hold Time Client Request Timeout Client Request Retry e Client Max Pending Request Entries Server Enable Server Forward En
276. h the MPS is a part This 13 byte portion of the ATM address can range from XX000000000000000000000000 to XXFFFFFRFRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF The XX byte must contain 39 45 or 47 These values define the authority and format identifier AFI The AFI byte identifies the group responsible for allocating the prefix and the format the prefix uses For more information about the AFI byte refer to the ATM Forum UNI specification Entering an ATM address network prefix is optional If you do not enter a network prefix in the specified range the MPS accepts the first prefix value that it receives from the switch Note Each MPS obtains its ATM network prefix from the network prefix assigned to the MPOA service record This means that all MPOA servers that you add to an MPOA service record will have the same ATM network prefix 9 4 117374 C Rev 00 Setting the Control ATM Address User Part Customizing MPOA Server Configuration To specify the control ATM address network prefix complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Set the Ctrl ATM Addr Network Prefix parameter Click on Help or s
277. hat operates above the ATM layer The PVC Operations and Management OAM feature provides a mechanism by which ATM devices can receive prompt failure information PVC OAM has two methods of detecting PVC failure loopback and alarms You can use either of these methods separately or both methods together When using OAM loopback cells the time can decrease to only a few seconds when using OAM alarms the detection is almost instantaneous 1 44 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM OAM Loopback The OAM loopback method uses loopback cells to detect a lost connection When OAM loopback is enabled the PVC sends loopback cells at a designated interval If a remote device does not return loopback responses and the PVC loses a specified number of cells the service record alerts the upper layer protocol that the link is down The PVC continues to send OAM loopback cells over the service record When it receives a specified number of OAM loopback responses it declares the link operational and begins sending traffic again Note For OAM loopback to function properly you must configure it on all PVCs on an interface Link status is based on the OAM loopback status of all PVCs on the interface OAM Alarms If the ATM router connects to an ATM switch that uses OAM alarms you can enable alarm detection on the ATM router With OAM alarms enabled when the router receives an alarm indication signal
278. hat you opens want to modify 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Set the Enable Disable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 79 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPLS Configuration Changing the Local IP Address The local IP address identifies the local IP address that LDP uses to establish the TCP connection to the LSR The default address 0 0 0 0 is useful only under specific circumstances for example when using circuitless IP In most cases you must enter a valid IP address for this interface in dotted decimal notation If you started MPLS with the default IP address of 0 0 0 0 you can change the address Note Bay Networks recommends that you use the IP address that you used when configuring the IP protocol on this interface To change the local IP address complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP
279. he LDP Session Records List window 9 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 32 117374 C Rev 00 Where to Go Next Customizing MPLS Configuration Use the following table to determine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about ATM concepts Chapter 1 Learn about MPLS concepts Chapter 2 Start ATM or MPLS Chapter 3 Change default settings for ATM interface Chapter 4 parameters Change default settings for ATM signaling Chapter 5 parameters Change default settings for ATM PVC service record Chapter 6 and PVC parameters Change default settings for classical IP service Chapter 7 record parameters Change default settings for LAN Emulation client Chapter 8 service record parameters Change default settings for Multi Protocol over ATM Chapter 9 server parameters Change default settings for the ATM router Chapter 10 redundancy parameter Obtain information about Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B Configure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 117374 C Rev 00 11 33 Appendix A Site Manager Parameters After you enable an ATM circuit you can use Site Manager to edit ATM and MPLS parameters Many ATM parameters ar
280. he MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Click on MPS The MPS List window opens 5 Click on the MPS that you want to delete 6 Click on Delete Site Manager deletes the MPS 7 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 9 19 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Deleting MPOA from the Interface To delete MPOA from the interface entirely you must delete the MPOA service record To delete the MPOA service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens Click on Delete 5 Click on Yes Site Manager asks whether you really want to delete MPOA from this interface Site Manager deletes the service record 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window
281. he PVC that you want to modify 7 Set the Data Encapsulation Type parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 26 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 6 21 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Changing PVC OAM Parameters The Operations and Management OAM feature provides a mechanism by which ATM devices can receive prompt notification of PVC failures OAM uses special loopback cells or alarms to detect PVC failures These mechanisms decrease the amount of time between an actual PVC failure and when the router is aware of this failure When using OAM loopback cells the time can decrease to only a few seconds when using OAM alarms the detection is almost instantaneous To change the PVC OAM parameters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the PVC service record that you wan
282. he circuit can retransmit three ILMI SET_REQUEST messages However you can set the number of retries to a value from 1 to 100 Using the BCC To change the ILMI Set Request retry count value navigate to the ILMI prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi 11 1 and enter set retry count lt nieger gt integer is the count value that you want the timer to use For example the following command changes the ILMI Set Request retry count value to 6 ilmi 11 1 set retry count 6 ilmi 11 1 5 34 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signaling To change the ILMI Set Request retry count value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management Interface ILMI The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens Set the ILMI Set Retry Count parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 58 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Defining Control VCs Control VCs are dedicated VPI VCI pairs reserved for sign
283. he specified virtual path identifier VPI only Displays statistical information for the specified virtual channel identifier VCI only The output includes the following information Service VPI VCI Cells Tx Cells Rx Packets TX Packets Rx Name of the service record containing the virtual channel VC Virtual path identifier VPI of the VC Virtual channel identifier VCI of the VC Number of assigned ATM layer cells transmitted at the transceiver transmit interface T count Number of ATM layer cells received at the transceiver receive interface that were not discarded R count Number of packets transmitted at the transceiver transmit interface Number of packets received at the transceiver receive interface that were not discarded 117374 C Rev 00 B 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services show atm vcs The show atm vcs command displays the ATM interface VCL table This table contains information about all ATM virtual channel links on the router or specific information based on the filters you use This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments Slot lt s ot gt lt connector gt Displays VC information about the specified slot or slot connector pair only service lt servicename gt Displays VC information about the specified service record only Vpi Displays VC information for the specified virtual path identifier VPI only vci Displays VC informatio
284. head within the media limits maximum bandwidth for the line Use Table 1 1 to determine the maximum bandwidth for the media you are using Table 1 1 Maximum Bandwidth by Media Type Raw Maximum Media Bandwidth Mb s Bandwidth Mb s Maximum Cells s OC 3 SONET SDH 155 149 76 353207 DS 3 Chit and M23 44 736 40 704 96000 framing E 3 G 832 framing 34 368 33 920 80000 E 3 G 751 framing 34 368 30 528 72000 ATM Layer The ATM layer defines how two nodes transmit information between them It is concerned with the format and size of the cells and the contents of the headers The addresses of the cells are meaningful only to the two adjacent local nodes that is usually not to the end nodes ATM Adaptation Layer The ATM adaptation layer AAL converts upper layer protocol data into formats that are compatible with the requirements of the ATM layer enabling ATM to handle different types of information within the same format The AAL is divided into two sublayers the convergence sublayer CS and the segmentation and reassembly SAR sublayer These two sublayers convert variable length messages into 48 byte segments while ensuring the integrity of the data The CCITT now ITU T has defined different types of AALs to handle different kinds of traffic Bay Networks ATM routers support a CS function compatible with AAL 5 as defined in Section 1 of the CCITT now ITU T B JSDN Protocol Reference Model
285. hin the ATM protocol reference model Parameter Enable Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Signaling AAL SAAL Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Enables or disables SAAL on this interface Instructions Accept the default Enable if you want SAAL to remain enabled on this MIB Object ID interface Select Disable if you do not want SAAL enabled on this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 8 1 2 Parameter Link Connection Arbitration Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Signaling AAL SAAL Default Active Options Active Passive Function Determines whether SAAL initiates link connections or waits for connections Instructions Accept the default Active if you want this interface to initiate connections MIB Object ID Select Passive if you do not want this interface to initiate connections 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 8 1 8 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Poll Timer Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Signaling AAL SAAL 7 1 to 120 Specifies the Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol SSCOP poll timer value in tenths of a second This value sets the allowable time be
286. how lane stats command B 25 show sonet circuits command B 26 show sonet current command B 27 show sonet history command B 30 117374 C Rev 00 signaling customizing 5 1 enabling initially 3 3 enabling disabling 4 17 5 3 parameters descriptions of A 39 to A 54 support 5 2 timer resolution defining 5 14 VCI changing 5 38 VPI changing 5 36 Signaling AAL See SAAL Site Manager starting ATM with 3 8 SSCOP connection control 5 63 customizing 5 57 to 5 67 enabling disabling 5 58 poll data 5 65 STAT PDU elements 5 66 support 5 57 starting ATM services 3 1 static route parameters descriptions of A 83 static routes customizing 11 29 enabling disabling 11 29 static routes defining for LDP 3 36 Status Enquiry Sent timer See T322 support Bay Networks xxx Sustainable Cell Rate described 1 25 setting control VC 5 45 MPLS VC 11 19 11 22 PVCs 6 13 SVC applications specifying number of 5 7 SVC Inactivity Timeout enabling disabling 4 7 parameter description A 8 specifying 4 7 SVC Inactivity Timeout Enable parameter A 8 SVCs access methods 1 22 and service records 1 9 encapsulation methods 1 13 to 1 15 Index 11 T T303 parameter description A 45 setting 5 15 T308 parameter description A 46 setting 5 16 T309 parameter description A 47 setting 5 16 T310 parameter description A 47 setting 5 16 T313 parameter description A 48 setting 5 17 T316 parameter d
287. ice record on the circuit The Edit ATM Connector window opens Note Accepting the defaults in the Initial ATM Signaling Config window enables signaling on the interface If you are running only PVCs on the interface you do not need signaling enabled 3 8 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Defining an ATM Service Record The Configuration Manager allows you to define service records for a specific data encapsulation type Depending on the data encapsulation type you choose the Configuration Manager also allows you to select a PVC or SVC connection type for that service record Caution You cannot edit the Data Encapsulation Type or Virtual Connection Type parameters after you assign them to a service record However you can edit the Data Encapsulation Type for individual PVCs Table 3 2 identifies which data encapsulation types you can apply to permanent and switched virtual circuits For an explanation of the different data encapsulation types and rules for assigning data encapsulation see Chapter 1 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Table 3 2 Valid Data Encapsulation Types for PVCs and SVCs Data Encapsulation Type Permanent Virtual Circuit Switched Virtual Circuit LANE v fucsnaP fw NLPID v NULL v v 117374 C Rev 00 3 9 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Adding a Service Record for PVCs
288. ice Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the PVC service record that you want to modify Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 6 Click on the PVC that you want to modify 7 Set the Xmit Sustainable Cell Rate cells s parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 24 Click on Done Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 10 Click on Done 11 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window 6 14 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Setting the MBS The maximum burst size MBS specifies the maximum number of sequential cells allowed on a VC before that VC must relinquish bandwidth to other VCs waiting to transmit This burst occurs at or close to the peak cell rate When setting the MBS you should select a value larger than the largest packet that the PVC can transmit that is the size of the maximum AAL CPCS transmit SDU For example if your PVC accepts packets that are less than 4608 bytes long PVC default set your MBS value between 45 and 50 cells By default the MBS is set to 40 cells However you can set the MBS to any value from 1 to 65 535 cells For additional information about the MBS see Using the MBS on page 1 26 For
289. ice Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify 5 Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 8 45 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Set the Flush Protocol parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 35 7 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the Flush Timeout The flush timeout specifies the amount of time that the LEC waits to receive a flush response after sending a flush request before it takes recovery action by switching to the BUS By default the LEC waits 4 seconds for a flush response However you can set the flush timeout to a value from 1 to 4 seconds Using the BCC To change the flush timeout value navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter flush timeout lt value gt value is the number of seconds from 1 to 4 that the LEC waits for a flush response For example the following command changes the flush timeout value to 2 seconds lec service newyork flush time
290. identifier VCT for the signaling VC The signaling VC is a dedicated VPI VCI pair reserved for signaling messages Accept the default 5 or enter a value from 1 to 65535 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 14 3 Caution The signaling VC 0 5 and the ILMI VC 0 16 are reserved These VCs remain in an operational state as long as signaling is enabled on the ATM interface Because most ATM devices use these VPI VCI pairs for signaling Bay Networks recommends that you not change these values A 44 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter T303 Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling Default 4 Options 1 to 24 Function Specifies the Setup Sent timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit initiates a call connection request by sending a SETUP message over the signaling VC The Setup Sent timer stops when the circuit receives a CONNECT message indicating connection a CALL PROCEEDING message indicating that the network received the SETUP message or a RELEASE COMPLETE message indicating the rejection of the SETUP message from the network If the circuit does not receive one of these messages within the allotted time it transmits the SETUP message again If the circuit still does not receive a response it clears the connection Instructions Accept the default 4
291. ignaling disabled PVC SVC Identifies the virtual connection type of this service record Accept the default SVC if you want the service record to contain switched virtual circuits Select PVC if you want the service record to contain permanent virtual circuits 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 2 1 7 A 16 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters User Part Autogeneration Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt Add and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables autogeneration of the ATM address user part Depending on the settings in the ATM Interface Attributes window the ATM address user part is either the hardware MAC address or a MAC address override value Accept the default Enable if you want the router to automatically generate the ATM address user part for the SVC service record 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 2 1 11 ATM Addr User Part Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt Add and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes None 00000000000000 to FEFFFFFFFFFFFF
292. ilure state e LOS receiving Loss of Signal LOS failure state e Loopback looping the received signal e TestCode receiving a test pattern e LowSignal low signal The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line The current interval The number of line errored seconds LESs in the current interval An LES is a second in which one or more coding violations occurred or one or more LOS defects were detected The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs in the current interval An SEFS is a second with one or more OOF errors or an AIS defect The number of unavailable seconds UASs in the current interval The number of line coding violations LCVs in the current interval A line coding violation is a count of both bipolar violations BPVs and excessive zero EXZ error events 117374 C Rev 00 B 27 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Pbit Status Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Interval PESs PSESs UASs PCVs Chit Stats Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Interval CESs CSESs UASs CCVs The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line The current interval The number of P bit errored seconds PESs in the current interval A PES is a second with one or more P bit coding violations one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS The PES does not increment when cou
293. inactivity timeout function navigate to the atm prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter vc inactivity control disabled For example the following command disables the SVC inactivity timeout function on the ATM interface atm 11 1 ve inactivity control disabled atm 11 1 To reenable the SVC inactivity timeout function navigate to the atm prompt and enter vc inactivity control enabled To change the SVC inactivity timeout value navigate to the atm prompt and enter vc inactivity timeout lt integer gt integer is the amount of time in seconds that the router can wait before it disables inactive SVCs For example the following command sequence reenables the SVC inactivity timeout function on the ATM interface and sets the SVC inactivity timeout value to 2400 seconds atm 11 1 ve inactivity control enabled atm 11 1 ve inactivity timeout 2400 atm 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 4 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To enable or disable the SVC inactivity timeout function or to modify the SVC inactivity timeout parameter complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on Line Attributes The ATM ARE Line Driver Attributes window opens 3 Set the SVC Inactivity Timeout Enable p
294. ine status of the interface The possible status values are e NoAlarm no alarm present e RRAI receiving yellow remote alarm indication e TRAI transmitting yellow remote alarm indication e RAIS receiving Alarm Indications Signal AIS failure state e TAIS transmitting AIS failure state e LOF receiving Loss of Frame LOF failure state e LOS receiving Loss of Signal LOS failure state e Loopback looping the received signal e TestCode receiving a test pattern e LowSignal low signal B 30 117374 C Rev 00 Line Stats Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Interval LESs SEFSs UASs LCVs Pbit Status Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Interval PESs PSESs UASs PCVs Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line A historical breakdown of intervals including e The current interval incomplete All but the last two intervals that is all intervals except the current interval and the previous interval e The previous interval that is the last complete interval e All of the intervals total The number of line errored seconds LESs for each interval category The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs for each interval category The number of unavailable seconds UASs for each interval category The number of line coding violations LCVs for each interval ca
295. information about setting the maximum AAL CPCS transmit SDU size see Modifying the Maximum AAL CPCS SDU Size on page 6 17 Using the BCC To change the PVC MBS value navigate to the PVC prompt for example box atm 11 1 pvc service boston pvc 11 1 0 32 and enter tx burst size lt integer gt integer is the MBS value that you want the PVC to use For example the following command changes the PVC MBS value to 80 cells pvc 11 1 0 32 tx burst size 80 pvc 11 1 0 32 117374 C Rev 00 6 15 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To change the PVC MBS value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the PVC service record that you want to modify Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 6 Click on the PVC that you want to modify 7 Set the Xmit Burst Size cells parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 25 Click on Done Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 10 Click on Done 11 Click on Don
296. ing 8 28 Max Unknown Frame Time parameter description A 31 specifying 8 30 Maximum AAL CPCS Receive SDU Size parameter description control VCs A 62 PVCs A 26 setting control VCs 5 54 PVCs 6 19 Index 7 Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU Size parameter description control VCs A 62 PVCs A 25 setting control VCs 5 51 PVCs 6 17 Maximum Burst Size described 1 26 5 47 6 15 formula for calculating 5 47 6 15 MPLS VC 11 20 11 24 parameter description control VCs A 61 PVCs A 25 setting control VCs 5 47 PVCs 6 15 Maximum Cache Size parameter description A 75 setting 9 18 Maximum Data Frame Size parameter description A 29 setting 8 26 Maximum Retry Time parameter description A 73 setting 9 14 maximum transmission unit See MTU MBS See Maximum Burst Size member configuration files router redundancy creating 3 26 menu path using A 4 messages retransmitting 5 22 Min Memory Threshold parameter A 42 minimum memory threshold setting 5 13 MLM enabling disabling 11 11 initiating 3 37 MLM parameters descriptions of A 83 Monitoring Timer parameter description A 75 setting 10 2 Index 8 MPLS customizing 11 1 deleting from interface 3 39 traffic parameters 11 18 MPLS parameters descriptions of A 79 MPOA deleting 9 20 described 1 39 starting 3 1 MPOA Server See MPS MPS configuration Mode defining 9 7 configuring 3 22 creating SVCs for 3 20 cus
297. ion A 57 setting 5 29 ILMI Get Timer parameter description A 56 setting 5 28 ILMI Set Retry Count parameter description A 58 setting 5 34 ILMI Set Timer parameter description A 58 setting 5 33 ILMI VCI changing 5 38 parameter description A 56 ILMI VPI changing 5 36 parameter description A 55 Initial Cache Size parameter description A 74 setting 9 17 Initial Registration State LAN emulation 1 38 Initial Retry Time parameter description A 73 setting 9 13 Index 5 initial state LAN emulation 1 37 Interface MTU defining 4 3 parameter description A 6 See also MTU interface parameters descriptions of A 12 to A 14 interface enabling disabling 4 15 Interim Local Management Interface See ILMI Inverse ARP support 1 27 IP address LDP changing 11 3 IP address LDP specifying 11 5 IP adjacent host Enable parameter A 104 Host Encapsulation parameter A 105 IP Adjacent Host Address parameter A 104 MAC Address parameter A 105 Next Hop Interface Addr parameter A 104 IP Adjacent Host Address parameter A 104 TP static routes defining for LDP 3 36 ISDN protocol model 1 6 J join state LAN emulation 1 37 K Keep Alive Life Time parameter description A 73 setting 9 12 Keep Alive Timer modifying 5 61 parameter description A 64 A 72 setting MPS 9 11 Index 6 L LAN emulation broadcast and unknown server BUS described 1 35 BUS connect state 1 38 client
298. ion Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 11 17 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Modifying Default VC Traffic Parameters You can modify the following transmit and receive traffic parameters for the MPLS default VC e Peak cell rate PCR e Sustainable cell rate SCR e Maximum burst size MBS For additional information about traffic parameters see ATM Traffic Parameters on page 1 23 Setting the Default VC Transmit PCR The transmit peak cell rate PCR specifies the upper traffic limit in cells s that the MPLS egress connection can submit The default value 0 indicates that the PCR is attempting to run at line rate To change the transmit PCR for the default VC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Xmt Peak Cell Rate parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 86
299. ion process 10 The local MPC caches the address resolution information and now establishes an SVC either directly to the destination host if that host is an ATM device or to the egress router that serves the destination host ATM network ATM MPS 10BASE T ATM MPS ATM MPC 10BASE T Key Cut through VC Logical connection lt lt _ NHPP control VC Figure 1 14 MPOA with Cut Through VC ATM0055A Note Creating a separate NHRP control VC is optional If you configure NHRP on each LEC the control information passes over the emulated LAN 1 42 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM ATM Router Redundancy Concepts Bay Networks ATM routers support warm standby router redundancy This redundancy protects a network from the irrecoverable failure of an entire ATM router You configure routers to be members of a router redundancy group Figure 1 15 illustrates router redundancy in a Bay Networks ATM environment ATM network Centillion 100 switch Token ring lt 5 Ce 100BASE T Centillion 100 switch 10BASE T SS Cen liu ATM router 2 E o m Token ring lt
300. ions Function Instructions MIB Object ID ATM signaling parameters define the connection and timer limits the router uses to set up maintain and clear a switched connection The ATM Signaling Parameters window also provides access to the signaling VC parameters The signaling VC provides a dedicated VPI 0 and VCI 5 for ATM signaling functions For control VC parameter descriptions see Signaling and ILMI Control VC Parameters on A 58 Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables ATM signaling on this interface When you disable signaling on the interface the ATM Service Record Parameters window automatically sets the Data Encapsulation Type parameter to LLC SNAP and the Virtual Connection Type parameter to PVC Accept the default Enable if you want signaling to remain enabled on this interface Set to Disable if you do not want signaling enabled on this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 2 117374 C Rev 00 A 39 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Protocol Standard Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manag
301. ircuit The line coding options are e B3ZS HDB3 The line coding specifies patterns of normal bits and bipolar violations used to replace sequences of zero bits of a certain length The line status of the interface The possible status values are e NoAlarm no alarm present e RRAI receiving yellow remote alarm indication e TRAI transmitting yellow remote alarm indication e RAIS receiving Alarm Indications Signal AIS failure state e TAIS transmitting AIS failure state e LOF receiving Loss of Frame LOF failure state e LOS receiving Loss of Signal LOS failure state e Loopback looping the received signal e TestCode receiving a test pattern e LowSignal low signal 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services show dsx3 current The show dsx3 current command displays line Pbit Cbit and Plcp statistics for the DSX3 circuits in the configuration The output includes the following information Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Sec into Interval of Intervals Line Coding Line Type Status Line Stats Circuit Interval LESs SEFSs UASs LCVs The slot module and connector number of the DSX3 circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line The number of seconds into the current 15 minute interval The number of complete 15 minute intervals The line coding on this circuit The line coding options are B8ZS HDB3 The line status of the interface The possible statu
302. it connects to this LEC The VPI that identifies the multicast send VCC if it exists at the point where it connects to this LEC The VCI that identifies the multicast send VCC if it exists at the point where it connects to this LEC The VPI that identifies the multicast forward VCC if it exists at the point where it connects to this LEC The VCI that identifies the multicast forward VCC if it exists at the point where it connects to this LEC 117374 C Rev 00 Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command show lane stats The show lane stats command displays the ATM LAN emulation statistics table This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument service lt servicename gt Displays statistical information about the specified service record only The output includes the following information Slot Conn Service Reg Out Req In ReplyOut Replyln FrameOut Frameln SVCFails Slot number on which the LAN emulation client resides Physical port number on which the LAN emulation client resides Name of the service record containing the client Number of MAC to ATM ARP requests this LEC sent over the logical user to network interface LUNI associated with this emulated packet interface Number of MAC to ATM ARP requests this LEC received over the LUNI associated with this emulated packet interface Number of MAC to ATM ARP replies this LEC sent over the LUNI associated with this
303. iver mode SDH SONET CBIT M23 G751 or G832 B 4 117374 C Rev 00 Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command phy errors enabled disabled slot lt s ot gt slot lt slot gt lt connector gt sample Displays the ATM module physical interface errors table for the ATM routing engine ARE The output includes the following physical interface error statistics Slot Conn Circuit Tc Alarm State HEC Detected HEC Corrected Out of Cell Delineation Slot number on which the ATM physical interface resides Connector number of the physical interface Circuit name assigned to the interface State of the driver Up Down Init initializing Download downloading Config configuring or Not Present Note that this parameter does not represent the state of the physical interface Number of uncorrectable header error check HEC errors detected Number of correctable HEC errors detected Number of times an out of cell delineation occurs An out of cell delineation occurs when 7 consecutive ATM cells have HEC errors stats enabled disabled slot lt s ot gt slot lt s ot gt lt connector gt sample Displays the ATM module I O statistics table for the ATM routing engine ARE The output includes the following module I O statistics Slot Conn Circuit Received Packets Transmitted Packets Invalid Headers Rx CRC Errors Total Errors Slot number on which the ATM physical int
304. izing Disabled or Absent Maximum number of virtual path connections supported by the ATM interface Maximum number of virtual channel connections supported by the ATM interface 117374 C Rev 00 Addr Type Signaling Sig Version show atm line Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command Type of ATM address configured for use by the ATM interface Private NSAP E 164 Native E 164 Other Null or NotDefined Whether signaling is enabled or disabled on the ATM interface The signaling standard configured for the ATM interface UNI3 0 or UNI3 1 The show atm line command displays information about the ATM Adaptation Layer Controller ALC link module service The show atm line command supports the following subcommand options errors phy errors phy config stats In addition you can specify any of the following filters flags with the above subcommand options slot lt s ot gt lt connector gt enabled disabled sample Displays ATM line information for the specified slot or slot connector pair only Displays ATM line information for enabled ATM lines only Displays ATM line information for disabled ATM lines only Displays a snapshot of ATM line information taken at 10 second intervals 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services errors enabled disabled slot lt s ot gt slot lt s ot gt lt connector gt sample Displays the ATM mo
305. k on atm 11 1 scrambling on atm 11 1 Using Site Manager To turn DS 3 scrambling on or off complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM link module interface opens ATM1 that you want to modify 2 Click on Line Attributes The ATM ARE Line Driver Attributes window opens 3 Set the DS3 Scrambling parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 10 4 Click on OK You return to the Select Connection Type window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 4 13 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Enabling and Disabling Per VC Clipping Per VC clipping provides an added traffic shaping option that allows you to modify how your ATM line responds to oversubscribed traffic By default per VC clipping is disabled on a line However you can enable or disable per VC clipping at any time When enabled this option clips frames intended for an oversubscribed VC when the number of frames in memory exceeds a predetermined limit Note Changing the state of this parameter tears down all active VCs on the interface The new state takes effect after VC connections are reestablished Using the BCC To enable per VC clipping navigate to the atm prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter clippi
306. ks during the warranty period along with proof of the date of shipment This warranty does not apply if the media has been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse The Licensee assumes all responsibility for selection of the Software to achieve Licensee s intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Software Bay Networks does not warrant a that the functions contained in the software will meet the Licensee s requirements b that the Software will operate in the hardware or software combinations that the Licensee may select c that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free or d that all defects in the operation of the Software will be corrected Bay Networks is not obligated to remedy any Software defect that cannot be reproduced with the latest Software release These warranties do not apply to the Software if it has been i altered except by Bay Networks or in accordance with its instructions ii used in conjunction with another vendor s product resulting in the defect or iii damaged by improper environment abuse misuse accident or negligence THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND LIMITATIONS ARE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Licensee is responsible for the security of 117374 C Rev 00 iii its own data and information and for main
307. level emulated Ethernet or token ring service interface to the upper layer protocol It also controls the LAN emulation UNI LUNI interface when communicating with other devices on the emulated LAN The LE client uses the configuration protocol to obtain information from the LECS This protocol allows the LE client to locate the LES and set up a bidirectional control direct virtual channel connection The LE client automatically obtains all of the necessary configuration data including the LES address from the LECS LAN Emulation Server The LES controls and coordinates LE client access to the emulated LAN When an LE client joins an emulated LAN it registers its ATM address with the LES When the LES obtains the ATM address of the LE client it also obtains the client s physical location from the MAC address or route descriptor LE clients query the LES to obtain the ATM address associated with a specific MAC address or route descriptor After an LE client receives the ATM address of the LE client it wants to reach the individual clients communicate directly 1 34 117374 C Rev 00 Redundant Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Broadcast and Unknown Server To emulate a traditional LAN the emulated LAN must provide the connectionless data delivery of a shared network to its LE clients and be able to handle broadcast and multicast data The broadcast and unknown server BUS fulfills this requirement by
308. lick on Protocols System responds The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose ATM The ATM menu opens 3 Choose Delete ATM Site Manager asks whether you really want to delete ATM 4 Click on OK Site Manager deletes ATM from the router You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 3 29 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Starting MPLS To start MPLS on a router using Site Manager 1 2 3 4 5 Create an ATM circuit Add the LDP session record Enable IP and any other appropriate protocols on the LDP session Add IP adjacent hosts Define IP static route information for LDP required if you plan to use IP static routes Enable MLM Configure TCP on the router Creating an ATM Circuit MPLS operates only over an ATM circuit for the current release You must create an ATM circuit before you can configure MPLS To create an ATM circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 System responds The Add Circuit window opens 2 Click on OK to accept the default circuit The Select Connection Type window name opens 3 Go to the following section Adding the LDP Session Record or go to step 4 to exit this procedure 4 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 3 30
309. llowing considerations in mind e The SCR maps directly to the MCR e The MCR provides guaranteed bandwidth for PVCs and control VCs while allowing sufficient bandwidth for SVCs to operate e Tobe useful the SCR must not exceed the PCR e Ifyou know the user average rate set the SCR approximately 10 percent higher than this value e ATM VCs may fail to operate with SCR values lower than 128 cells s e Entering 0 for the SCR turns off this function and specifies that the ATM router uses best effort for SCR e The E 3 framing mode setting affects the maximum SCR setting 117374 C Rev 00 1 25 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using the MBS The MBS specifies the maximum number of sequential cells allowed on a VC before that VC must relinquish bandwidth to other VCs waiting to transmit This burst occurs at or close to the peak cell rate When setting the MBS we suggest that you select a value larger than the largest packet your PVC or control VC can transmit that is the size of the maximum AAL CPCS transmit SDU For example if your VC accepts packets that are less than 4608 bytes long PVC default set your MBS value between 45 and 50 cells As a guideline use this formula to determine your MBS value Maximum packet size in bytes 48 bytes cell MBS value in cells For example 4608 bytes default 48 bytes cell 96cells ATMO0016A 1 26 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM R
310. lobal ATM signaling attributes 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on Protocols 2 Click on ATM 3 Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Records List window opens Accessing Global ATM Interface Attributes To access global ATM interface attributes 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on Protocols 2 Click on ATM 3 Click on Interfaces The ATM Interface List window opens Note Because MPLS uses ATM to operate the ATM Interface List window also displays MPLS interfaces However you cannot edit MPLS interface parameters from this window 117374 C Rev 00 A 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services ATM Line Parameters The type of ATM link module you use determines the line details you can edit This section describes how to edit the line details for ATM ARE link modules and the Model 5782 ATM router Parameter Enable Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Enables or disables the line driver Instructions Select Enable or Disable MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 2 Parameter Interface MTU Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes Default 4608 Options 1 to 9188 Function Specifies the largest packet size in octets that the router can transmit on this interface Instructions Enter a value that is appropriate for the
311. lows for channel identifiers from 32 to 65 535 To change the VCI number for the default VCL complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Default Vcl VCI parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 85 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 14 117374 C Rev 00 Specifying the Default VC VPI Range Customizing MPLS Configuration The default VC VPI range identifies the virtual path that MPLS can use when creating SVCs The VPI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 8 VPI bits for a UNI connection This bit range allows for path identifiers from 0 to 255 To specify a VPI range number complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you w
312. ls that is all intervals except the current interval and the previous interval e The previous interval that is the last complete interval All of the intervals total The number of P bit errored seconds PESs for each interval category The number of P bit severely errored seconds PSESs for each interval category The number of unavailable seconds UASs for each interval category The number of P bit coding violations PCVs for each interval category 117374 C Rev 00 Cbit Stats Circuit Interval CESs CSESs UASs CCVs FarEnd Cbit Stats Circuit Interval CESs CSESs UASs CCVs Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command Name of the circuit associated with this line A historical breakdown of intervals including e The current interval incomplete e All but the last two intervals that is all intervals except the current interval and the previous interval e The previous interval that is the last complete interval All of the intervals total The number of C bit errored seconds CESs for each interval category The number of C bit severely errored seconds CSESs for each interval category The number of unavailable seconds UASs for each interval category The number of C bit coding violations CCVs for each interval category Name of the circuit associated with this line A historical breakdown of intervals including e The current interval incomplete
313. ls s Several ATM traffic parameters require you to enter values in cells per second cells s To convert to cells s divide the number of bits s by 424 the number of bits per ATM cell 117374 C Rev 00 1 27 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Number of bits second Number of bits ATM cell Number of cells second For example 100 000 000 bits s 424 bits cell 235 849 cells s ATMO021A Classical IP over ATM Concepts RFC 1577 Classical IP and ARP over ATM describes an administrative entity within an ATM network called a logical IP subnet LIS Each ATM LIS consists of multiple network devices hosts and routers connected to the ATM network and configured with interfaces to the same IP subnet Each LIS operates and communicates independently in an ATM network A host connected to an ATM network communicates directly with other hosts in its own LIS To communicate with hosts in another LIS the host must use an IP router This router can connect to multiple LISs An ATM LIS must meet the following requirements All members of the LIS hosts and routers must have the same IP network subnet address and mask All members must be directly connected to the ATM network using SVCs All members must access hosts outside the LIS through a router All members must be able to communicate by means of ATM with every other member of the LIS that is the virtual connection topology must be fully meshed 1 28 117
314. ltimately connects to a lower speed link for example T1 or E1 your PCR is limited to the maximum rate for that media e ATM VCs may fail to operate with PCR values lower than 128 cells s e The E 3 framing mode setting affects the maximum PCR setting 1 24 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Using the SCR The SCR is the upper bound on the conforming average rate of an individual PVC or control VC The average rate is the number of cells transmitted over the link divided by the duration of the connection The duration of the connection is the total amount of time it takes from connection setup to connection release The SCR allows you to define future cell flow on a PVC or control VC in greater detail than by using only the PCR The SCR controls the rate over time not at a specific instant of time and can help you use your network resources more efficiently In other words the SCR allows sufficient bandwidth for operation but does not allow a bandwidth as high as the PCR The SCR value maps directly to an MCR minimum cell rate value In other words when you configure the SCR on a device you actually configure the upper bound of an average rate Like the SCR the MCR defines the minimum amount of guaranteed bandwidth allowed for PVCs and control VCs on the ATM line The MCR that is SCR not only controls the rate over time it guarantees this rate When setting the SCR keep the fo
315. lue in seconds This internal timer alerts upper layers that the link is down The timer begins if the entire link goes down for any reason When the link goes down the SAAL sends a DISCONNECT REQUEST message to the upper layer application manager The SAAL sends a disconnect request every time the SAAL Data Link Disconnect timer expires and continues to send this message until the link becomes operational Accept the default 4 or enter a value from 1 to 180 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 33 T398 Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 4 1 to 24 Specifies the Drop Party Sent timer value in seconds This timer applies to multipoint connections only and begins when the circuit sends a DROP PARTY message to a party the receiver of the message on the network The Drop Party Sent timer stops when the circuit receives a DROP PARTY ACKNOWLEDGE message indicating that the end point used for the party has been released or a RELEASE message indicating that the end point used for the party has been released and there are no remaining parties Accept the default 4 or enter a value from 1 to 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 34 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Objec
316. mber of protocols running on the circuits and the number of routing entries Hybrid Access PVCs PVCs do not typically allow bridging in nonmeshed environments If your network combines bridging and routing over the same interface you need to use the service record portion of each PVC for routing while at the same time allowing bridging to operate To do this you must define the PVC as a hybrid bridged VC Defining the PVC as a hybrid bridged VC allows the bridge to view each PVC as a separate bridge interface while allowing the routing protocols to view all PVCs as part of the same interface Figure 1 8 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Bridge protocol sees two interfaces ATM Direction of data to the network network interface lt gt Routing protocol Hybrid PVC Routing protocol sees one interface to the network I Interface ATMO0012B Figure 1 8 Hybrid Access PVCs Use hybrid PVCs when creating nonmeshed network configurations that use both bridging and routing over a single ATM interface These PVCs work best for spanning tree bridging Note When you define a PVC as a hybrid bridged VC Site Manager provides additional Bridge Spanning Tree Source Routing SR SR Spanning Tree Translational Learning bridge Translate LB and Native Mode LAN NML protocol options These protocols run on the PVC along with the protocols defined in the ATM service record 1
317. message until the link becomes operational drop party tx timer T398 1 to 24 Specifies the Drop Party Sent timer value in seconds This timer applies to multipoint connections only and begins when the circuit sends a DROP PARTY message to a party the receiver of the message on the network The Drop Party Sent timer stops when the circuit receives a DROP PARTY ACKNOWLEDGE message indicating that the end point used for the party has been released or a RELEASE message indicating that the end point used for the party has been released and there are no remaining parties continued 117374 C Rev 00 5 19 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Table 5 1 Signaling Timer Descriptions continued Site BCC Manager Default Name Name Value Range Description add party tx T399 14 1 to 84 Specifies the Add Party Sent timer value in timer seconds This timer applies to multipoint connections only and begins when the circuit sends an ADD PARTY message to a party the receiver of the message on the network The Add Party Sent timer stops when the circuit receives an ADD PARTY ACKNOWLEDGE message indicating the connection to the party an ADD PARTY REJECT message indicating the inability to add the party or a RELEASE message indicating the inability to add the party and the absence of any remaining parties If the timer expires before the circuit receives an ADD PARTY ACKNOWLEDGE
318. mum burst size MBS specifies the maximum number of sequential cells that the default VC can receive at the peak cell rate before the VC must relinquish bandwidth to other VCs When you set the MBS you should select a value larger than the largest packet that your default VC can receive that is the size of the Maximum AAL CPCS transmit SDU For example if your VC accepts packets that are less than 4608 bytes long set your MBS value from 45 to 50 cells To change the receive MBS for the default VC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Rev Burst Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 90 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 24 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPLS Configuration Modifying the Default VC Maximum AAL CPCS SDU Size
319. n and is generally referred to as cut through or zero hop routing Cut through routing is based on the fact that in most cases data transfer occurs at a steady rate of flow For example data or file transfer from one legacy Ethernet LAN to a remote counterpart usually involves multiple frames A file transfer of approximately 45 KB requires about 30 Ethernet frames all addressed to the same destination In an MPOA environment it is possible to identify the recipient from addressing data contained within the first frame and to establish an SVC to the recipient Then all 30 or so frames can be broken down into approximately 900 ATM cells and transmitted to the recipient via the virtual channel provided by the SVC Network performance improves as the cells follow a predetermined direct path in contrast to the hop by hop routing of the Ethernet frames Network performance improves markedly in the case of steady stream deterministic data flows such as video MPOA Logical Components MPOA operations are based on logical components which can be implemented in various configurations of hardware and software MPOA logical components include the following e MPOA client The MPOA client MPC resides in an ATM edge device adjacent to the router BayRS does not provide MPC functionality The primary function of the MPC is to act in ATM terminology as an ingress or egress point for traffic using network cut throughs 117374 C Rev 00
320. n your network The user part suffix consists of a 6 byte end station identifier and a 1 byte selector field The user part and the network prefix form a complete ATM address Enter the ATM address user part of the ATMARP server for your network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 113 Registration Refresh Interval Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Interfaces 900 seconds for a client 1200 seconds for a server Any interval in seconds For a client this parameter specifies the interval between registration refreshes For a server this parameter specifies the duration for which the registration is valid Determine whether ATMARP is running as a client or server on this interface and enter an appropriate value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 4 1 115 117374 C Rev 00 A 103 Adjacent Host Parameters This section describes ATM IP parameters for creating adjacent hosts in a classical IP over ATM environment For additional information about adjacent hosts see Configuring IP Services Parameter Enable Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Adjacent Hosts Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Specifies the state active or inactive of the adjacent host in the IP routing table Instructions Select Disable to make the adjacent host record inactive in the IP routing table MIB Object ID the IP router will not consider this adjacent host Select Enable to make the adjacent host record acti
321. n A 53 If the circuit still does not receive a response the circuit enters the null state until the appropriate maintenance action is taken Accept the default 120 or enter a value from 1 to 720 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 30 117374 C Rev 00 A 49 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID T316c Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 120 1 to 720 Specifies the Restart Request Sent on Channel timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit sends a RESTART message to the network The circuit uses the RESTART message to return this individual VC on the interface to the idle condition The Restart Request Sent on Channel timer stops when the circuit receives a RESTART ACKNOWLEDGE message from the network If the timer expires before the circuit receives a RESTART ACKNOWLEDGE message the circuit can transmit as many RESTART messages as specified with the Num Restarts ReX mitted parameter see the parameter description on A 53 If the circuit still does not receive a response the circuit enters the null state until the appropriate maintenance action is taken Accept the default 120 or enter a value from 1 to 720 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 31 A 50 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Option
322. n Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 25 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Setting the Maximum Data Frame Size The maximum data frame size is the largest frame that the LE client can e Send on the multicast send VCC e Receive on the multicast forward VCC e Send and receive on data direct VCCs When you accept the default unspecified the LEC obtains the maximum data frame size when it joins an ELAN However you can limit the maximum data frame size that the LEC can transmit or receive to 1516 octets Using the BCC To change the maximum data frame size navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter maximum data frame size lt value gt value is the maximum data frame size that you want the LEC to transmit either unspecified or 1516 For example the following command changes the maximum data frame size to 1516 octets lec service newyork maximum data frame size 1516 lec service newyork 8 26 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To change the maximum data frame size complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service A
323. n Type window opens The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify 5 Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens 6 Click on LES The ATM LES List window opens 7 Click on the LES address in the list after which you want to add the new address The settings for this LES appear in the parameter boxes Click on Add After The LANE Redundancy window opens continued 8 22 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 9 Set the following parameters LE Server ATM Address Network Prefix LE Server ATM Address User Part Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 37 System responds 10 Click on OK You return to the ATM LES List window 11 Click on Done 12 Click on OK You return to the LAN Emulation Parameters window You return to the ATM Service Records List window 13 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 14 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 15 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying a LES Entry You can modify the parameters associated with a LES entry at any time To modi
324. n for the specified virtual channel identifier VCI only The output includes the following information Service Name of the service record containing the virtual channel VC VPI Virtual path identifier VPI of the VC VCI Virtual channel identifier VCI of the VC Type Type of VC SVC or PVC State State of the ATM line Up Down Init initializing Disabled or Absent Hybrid Bridged VCs Whether this is a hybrid bridged VC Yes means the VC operates as a hybrid access mode VC No means the VC works in group access mode only AAL ATM Adaptation Layer type of this VC AALB5 Encaps Encapsulation type of this VC LLC SNAP NULL LANE8023 LANE8025 NLPID Unknown or OTHER Xmt PCR Transmit peak cell rate PCR for this VC in cells s Xmt SCR Transmit sustainable cell rate SCR for this VC in cells s B 8 117374 C Rev 00 Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command show classical ip configuration The show classical ip configuration command displays information for all classical IP interfaces on the ATM router or for one specific IP address This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument ipaddr lt ip_address gt Displays information about the specified IP address only The output includes the following information Interface The IP address of the classical IP interface Mode The mode of the classical IP interface client or server Server Address if client The ATM address o
325. n frame time Using the BCC To change the maximum unknown frame count value navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter maximum unknown frame lt value gt value is the maximum number of unknown frames from 1 to 10 that the LEC can send to the BUS within the maximum unknown frame time For example the following command changes the maximum unknown frame count to 5 lec service newyork maximum unknown frame 5 lec service newyork 8 28 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To change the maximum unknown frame count complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Max Unknown Frame Count parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 31 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Conn
326. n the router Accept the default CLASS3 for this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 17 A 90 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters AAL Type Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC TYPE5 TYPE1 TYPE34 TYPES OTHER UNKNOWN This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default TYPES for this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 18 AAL Cpcs Transmit Sdu Size Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 4608 1 to 65535 Specifies the maximum packet size in bytes that you intend this VC to transmit Enter the maximum packet size that you intend this VC to transmit Bay Networks recommends that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes Most packets fall within this limit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 19 AAL Cpes Receive Sdu Size Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 4608 1 to 65535 Specifies the maximum packet size in bytes that you intend this VC to receive Enter the maximum packet size th
327. naling 1000 0 to 32767 Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous point to point connections allowed for this circuit Accept the default 1000 or enter a value from 0 to 32767 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 7 Max Point to Multipoint Connections Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 40 0 to 32767 Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous point to multipoint connections allowed for this circuit Accept the default 40 or enter a value from 0 to 32767 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 8 117374 C Rev 00 A 41 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Max Parties in Multipoint Connections Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 1 0 to 32767 Specifies the maximum number of simultaneous parties in a point to multipoint connection allowed for this circuit Accept the default 1 or enter a value from 0 to 32767 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 9 Min Memory Threshold Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt
328. naling 5 54 defining 5 35 parameters descriptions of A 58 Maximum AAL CPCS Receive SDU Size A 62 Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU Size A 62 Xmit Sustainable Cell Rate A 60 traffic parameters 5 41 conventions text xxiv convergence sublayer CS described 1 8 counters modifying ILMI 5 28 to 5 34 Ctrl ATM Addr Network Prefix parameter A 68 Ctrl ATM Address Network Prefix parameter A 72 Ctrl ATM Address Selector Byte parameter A 71 Ctrl ATM Address User Part parameter A 69 A 72 customizing control VCs ILMI 5 54 signaling 5 54 default VC 11 12 ILMI 5 26 to 5 34 LE clients 8 48 9 8 PVCs 6 1 SAAL 5 57 to 5 66 SSCOP 5 57 to 5 67 D data encapsulation assigning PVCs 6 20 methods of 1 13 rules for PVCs 1 16 selecting 1 14 Data Encapsulation parameter NHRP C 4 Data Encapsulation Type assigning PVCs 6 20 parameter description PVCs A 26 service record A 16 data frame size setting 8 26 Data Link Connection timer See T309 Index 3 Data Link Disconnect timer See TDisc Data Path Enable parameter description A 7 Data Path Notify Timeout parameter description A 7 specifying 4 5 data path notify enabling disabling 4 5 data transmission described 1 4 Default Holding Time parameter description A 74 setting 9 16 default VC enabling disabling 11 12 MBR setting 11 20 11 24 PCR setting 11 22 SCR setting 11 19 11 22 traffic parameters modifying 11 18 VCI number s
329. naling 11 1l Using Site Manager To modify the maximum number of point to multipoint connections on the circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM 3 Click on ATM Signaling The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens Set the Max Point to Multipoint Connections parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 41 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 11 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Setting the Maximum Number of Parties in Multipoint Connections By default you can have one party in each multipoint connection on a circuit at any given time However you can specify a value from 0 to 32767 parties Using the BCC To change the maximum number of parties in multipoint connections navigate to the signaling prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 1 1 1 and enter parties multipoint maximum lt integer gt integer is a value from 0 to 32767 For example the following command sets the maximum number of parties in mul
330. nd Integrated Services Digital Network B ISDN 1 2 broadcast and unknown server BUS described 1 35 Burst Size setting control VCs 5 47 PVCs 6 15 BUS connect state LAN emulation 1 38 C cache MPS 9 17 Call Proceeding Received timer See T310 calls pacing 5 25 Cell Loss Priority parameter A 92 117374 C Rev 00 cells converting to 1 27 header 1 3 information field 1 4 classical IP concepts 1 28 to 1 31 defining service records for 3 4 Clear function router redundancy 3 23 Client Enable parameter NHRP A 94 Client Hold Time parameter NHRP A 95 Client Max Pending Request Entries parameter NHRP A 96 Client Reg Interval parameter NHRP A 94 Client Request Retry parameter NHRP A 96 Client Request Timeout parameter NHRP A 95 Clocking Signal Source defining 4 10 parameter description A 9 commands show B 1 configuration files router redundancy creating group 3 24 creating member 3 26 downloading 3 28 Configuration Manager Protocols menu using A 4 Configuration Mode LEC selecting 8 8 parameter description A 28 selecting 9 7 configure state LAN emulation 1 37 Congestion Indication parameter A 92 Connect Sent Timer See T313 Connection Control Timer parameter description A 65 setting 5 63 connections memory 5 13 setting thresholds 5 9 Control Timeout parameter description A 30 setting 8 32 117374 C Rev 00 control VCs customizing ILMI 5 54 sig
331. ndancy This section describes how to start ATM router redundancy For more information about ATM router redundancy see ATM Router Redundancy Concepts on page 1 43 For general information about router redundancy and detailed descriptions of router redundancy parameters see Configuring Interface and Router Redundancy Note You can configure router redundancy in Site Manager local mode only To configure router redundancy you first create a template router redundancy group configuration file After creating this group configuration file you then use it to create each member configuration file twice once as a primary file which the router uses when it boots as the primary member of the redundancy group and again as a secondary file which the router uses in its role as a secondary member Note The Clear function allows you to clear all protocols from all circuits on which you configured router redundancy The Clear function does not however delete the configured router redundancy information The Clear function is useful when converting a primary router redundancy configuration file to a secondary configuration file because a typical secondary configuration does not include any of the protocols contained in the primary configuration 117374 C Rev 00 3 23 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Creating a Group Configuration File To create a redundancy group configuration file template complete the following ste
332. ndow opens Click on the appropriate attribute category 117374 C Rev 00 A 3 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Edit MPLS Connector Window The Edit MPLS Connector window acts as a control access point for all MPLS parameters This window provides information specific to each individual MPLS interface For any given interface the Edit MPLS Connector window provides two buttons e LDP MLM By clicking on one of these buttons you can access and edit the parameters associated with that specific MPLS interface To access parameters from the Edit MPLS Connector window 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface labeled ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on the appropriate attribute category Using the Menu Path The Protocols menu in the Configuration Manager window provides global interface and signaling information about every ATM interface on the router For example if you configure four ATM link modules on the router and you select Protocols gt ATM gt Interfaces the ATM Interface List window displays all four ATM interfaces that you configured on the router Note The Protocols menu does not provide access to MPLS parameters You must access these parameters using the window path A 4 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Accessing Global ATM Signaling Attributes To access g
333. nds data it now has access to all its ports including the port that accesses site B Therefore data from site A can reach site B 117374 C Rev 00 1 21 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services SVC Access Methods SVCs use signaling messages to dynamically establish maintain and clear a switched virtual connection at the UNI These messages as defined by the Q 2931 standard for signaling protocols allow the router to assess the availability of an ATM end point device establish a connection with that device maintain that connection for the duration of data transfer and then clear the connection when the transfer is complete Assigning ATM Addresses An ATM address is composed of a network prefix and a user part Bay Networks routers use the autogeneration feature to create the user part of the ATM address by combining the MAC address of the ATM interface with a unique selector byte to create unique addresses Figure 1 10 You can also enter ATM addresses manually ATM address 390000000000000000000000000000A20CA98F 00 Network prefix User part 39000000000000000000000000 0000A20CA98F 00 Selector MAC address byte 0000A20CA98F 00 ATMO0037A Figure 1 10 ATM Address Components 1 22 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Entering an ATM Address Network Prefix The ATM address network prefix specifies the ATM domain of which the service record is a part This 13 byte portion of the
334. nector lt connector_number gt slot_number is the number of the chassis slot containing the link module module_number is a convention used for other routers within the System 5000 chassis You need only enter a module number when configuring an ATM router in the System 5000 chassis that is the Model 5782 Centillion Multiprotocol Engine The module number for the ATM router is always 1 connector_number is the number of a connector on the link module Note The top level prompt for BCC configuration on the System 5000 platform is stack However the remainder of this guide uses the box prompt associated with the BN platform in its examples For example the following command adds ATM to the BN configuration on slot 5 connector 1 box atm slot 5 connector 1 atm 5 1 Enabling Signaling LANE and Classical IP Service Records Only To enable signaling on an ATM interface navigate to the ATM prompt and enter signaling For example the following command enables signaling on slot 5 connector 1 atm 5 1 signaling signaling 5 1 117374 C Rev 00 3 3 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Defining an ATM Service Record Using the BCC you can define PVC classical IP and LANE service records Defining PVC Service To define a PVC service record navigate to the ATM interface prompt and enter pvce service lt service_name gt encapsulation lt encapsulation_type gt service_name is a unique text string that
335. network MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 9 A 6 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Data Path Enable Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes Enable Enable Disable Specifies whether or not the router disables the interface between the driver and the higher level software the data path interface when you disconnect the cable from the ATM module If you select Enable then when you disconnect the cable from the ATM module the router disables the data path interface after the time you specify with the Data Path Notify Timeout parameter If you select Disable the router does not disable the data path interface when you disconnect the cable from the ATM module Select Enable or Disable If you select Enable be sure to enter an appropriate value for the Data Path Notify Timeout parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 11 Data Path Notify Timeout Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes 1 second 0 to 3600 seconds Specifies the time that the router waits before disabling the data path interface when you disconnect the cable from the ATM module providing that you set the Data Path Enable parameter to Enable Accept the default or enter an appropri
336. nfiguring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Flush Timeout Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC 4 1 to4 Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the LAN emulation client waits to receive a flush response after sending a flush request before it takes recovery action by switching to the BUS Accept the default 4 or enter a value from 1 to 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 18 Path Switching Delay Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC 6 1to8 Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the LAN emulation client waits after sending a frame over an existing VCC before it switches to a new VCC this applies to multicast and data direct VCCs You can use this parameter to bypass the flush protocol that is when you disable the Flush Protocol parameter the data for a specific MAC address automatically begins flowing over anew VCC when the path switching delay time elapses Accept the default 6 or enter a value from 1 to 8 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 19 A 34 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructi
337. ng To change the maximum receive SDU size for the signaling control VC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on ATM Signaling The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens Click on Sig VC The ATM Control VC for Signaling window opens Set the Maximum AAL CPCS Receive SDU Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 62 Click on Done Click on Done You return to the ATM Signaling Parameters window You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 55 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To change the maximum receive SDU size for the ILMI control VC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters Interface
338. ng Member Configuration Files After creating a group configuration file you use that file to create a primary and secondary configuration file for each member of an ATM router redundancy group Creating a Primary Configuration File To create a primary configuration file complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Site Manager window choose Tools The Tools menu opens 2 Choose Router Redundancy The Router Redundancy menu opens 3 Choose Member Configuration The file selection window opens 4 Select the group configuration file template cfg Click on Open File The Configuration Manager window opens 6 Choose Protocols 7 Choose Router Redundancy The Protocols menu opens The Router Redundancy menu opens and click on Primary Save 8 Choose Member Configuration The R R Member Global Parameters Configuration window opens 9 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 10 Choose File The File menu opens 11 Choose Save As The Save Configuration File window opens 12 Enter a file name for example a oha pri You return to the Configuration Manager window 3 26 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Creating a Secondary Configuration File To create a secondary configuration file complete the following tasks
339. ng enabled For example the following command enables per VC clipping on the ATM interface atm 11 1 clipping enabled atm 11 1 To disable per VC clipping navigate to the atm prompt and enter clipping disabled For example the following command disables per VC clipping on the ATM interface atm 11 1 clipping disabled atm 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing an ATM Interface Using Site Manager To enable or disable per VC clipping complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM link module interface opens ATM1 that you want to modify 2 Click on Line Attributes The ATM ARE Line Driver Attributes window opens 3 Set the Per VC Clipping parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 11 4 Click on OK You return to the Select Connection Type window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Disabling and Reenabling an ATM Interface By default the ATM interface is enabled when you create the circuit However you can disable or reenable the interface at any time When the interface is enabled traffic can flow over the interface When the interface is disabled traffic cannot flow over the interface Using the BCC To disable the ATM logical interface navigate to the ATM interface prompt for ex
340. nion aeRO Chapter 11 Customizing MPLS Configuration Cusiomizing LDP ParamolerS asad sasssannavouiiinad pasiecaindeninisiadabesteadea sts caigaa painnaenn pelea paDLEND 11 2 Disabling and Resnabling LDP cs ccsnccsncisencestnsensevuinsunteeniniancnsiianectiatieeontustinenn Guten 11 2 Changing the Local IP PCS snccicscsccrciocasnendiscansed cd tdaseendacdencedcssuanteeetinadanepianccaive 11 3 Specifying a Local TOP Parl sancssvtdcmn ainsi a le Specifying a Remote IP Address P R T P ET P EEN a115 BSC IAG a Remote TOP PONI ea discsccsscs aaewsntee cascleity cava aa e a aa aa 11 6 Specifying the Routes Configuration Mode ccccccccssccecsscccsseeeeseeceseeeecseeeseseees 11 7 Specifying a Hold Time Serr EE rr E eevee Spee 11 8 Specifying a Protocol for MPLS Foute Configuration co eames E ON Me Enabling and Disabling Aggregation 2 ccscccecccnecensscccensascnesenesenceteenensna tenons 11 10 Disabling and Reenabling MLM Administrative Status cccccceeesceeeeteeeeeseeeeeeees 11 11 Customizing Default VC Parameters i avsisiiscccissnniisenssenlaonassnilad savevinadssevenadpaisnnapareninn 11 12 Disabling and Reenabling Default VC Admin Status TETEE T An 11 12 Specifying the Default VOL VPI NUMB OE cccsccetascccnsccdaccanegndsesenstaisumiens donatanetacseass 11 13 Specifying the Default VCL VCI NUMDEr c eee cecctecceeseeecsseeeesseeeesseeeeeaseeenees 11 14 Specifying the Default VC VPI Range mee
341. nnector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line The current interval The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs in the current interval An SEFS is a second with one or more OOF errors or an AIS defect 117374 C Rev 00 B 29 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services UASs Status The number of unavailable seconds UASs in the current interval Indicates the line status of the interface The possible status values are e NoAlarm no alarm present e RRAI receiving yellow remote alarm indication e TRAI transmitting yellow remote alarm indication e RAIS receiving Alarm Indications Signal AIS failure state e TAIS transmitting AIS failure state e LOF receiving Loss of Frame LOF failure state e LOS receiving Loss of Signal LOS failure state e Loopback looping the received signal e TestCode receiving a test pattern e LowSignal low signal show sonet history The show sonet history command displays portions of the SONET entries table The output includes the following information Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Sec into Interval of Intervals Line Coding Line Type Status The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line The number of seconds into the current interval The number of complete intervals The line coding on this circuit The line coding options are e B3ZS HDB3 The l
342. nonirein eaea a ai aai 3 23 PSPS NIC Ek Group Conliguration FiIS scrcrcnstiicitisininereeni nee a e aiia 3 24 Creating Member Configuration Files s essiusarisaiai aa 3 26 Creating a Primary Configuration File 0 eee as ET pioa OEI 3 26 Creating a Secondary Configuration File ce ccscctcneccoscetsadienteousesiedeenddenisensdeniee 3 27 Downloading Member Configuration Files to the Routers cccscseeeseeees 3 28 Deleting ATM from the Router TEREA res PE PERNE P ere 3 29 WS iS BI pistes wide aeear rnd maaan eee ah iranie EN 3 29 Usno Sole AEE ponni aa aa E aai 3 29 viii 117374 C Rev 00 SAAN INNA NIPS aaan a AA 3 30 Ceaing m ATII CICNE aiioa aa SE aa 3 30 Adding the LDP Session ROCord s cciscccscersnntscccsitinetadaientienaririenccninsetdotsemiontn 3 31 Adding Protocols to an LOP Session Recor a issiescaiossscteasssiciasniseensssadesasesdeais 3 32 Adding Protocols to the LDP Session 008 EE T T P 3 32 Adding Protocols to a Existing RegOr scccicccscncaicsssuscccasnncerdiecotardaceamntingmincomts 3 33 Aise Wla e a Ia hits ch a E E A E E E tdaions 3 35 Defining IP Static Routes for LDP ere Aort T N Diei aus coo Per aU IEN crannan abit ce neede a tan A 3 37 OMRON TOR srra a 3 38 Enana TOT sori 3 38 Increasing the TCP Window Size ccceeesscceeseesteeeeseseaeeeessstaeeeesssstaeeeesssnees OTO Deleting MPLS from the Interface inan cee oru GaN rate PAT aes Wipere
343. ns beginning on page A 94 14 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window which displays a summary of the NHRP record that you configured 15 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 16 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 17 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 C 7 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Editing an NHRP Record To edit an NHRP record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose IP The IP menu opens 3 Choose NHRP The NHRP menu opens 4 Choose NhrpNetTable The NHRP NetEntry List window opens 5 Click on the NHRP entry that you want to Site Manager displays the current NHRP edit entry specific parameters 6 Edit the following parameters as required NHRP Request Path Client Enable Client Reg Interval Client Hold Time Client Request Timeout Client Request Retry e Client Max Pending Request Entries Server Enable Server Forward Enable Server Max Next Hop Entries Server Max Pending Request Entries DNS Proxy Port Override NBMA Address Bogus NBMA Address Max Next Hop Cache Size Max QOS Cache Size Max Addr Translation Cache Size Server Load Balancing Serv
344. nstructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Max Unknown Frame Count Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC 1 1 to 10 Specifies the maximum number of unknown frames an LE client can send within the interval specified with the Max Unknown Frame Time parameter A frame is considered unknown when the LE client does not recognize the destination MAC address In this case the unknown frame goes to the BUS for distribution Accept the default 1 or enter a value from 1 to 10 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 11 Max Unknown Frame Time Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC 1 1 to 60 Specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds allowed to send the number of unknown frames specified with the Max Unknown Frame Count parameter For example if you use the defaults for these parameters a LAN emulation client can one unknown frame within 1 second for any given MAC address without having to initiate the Address Resolution Protocol ARP to resolve that MAC address Accept the default 1 or enter a value from 1 to 60 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 12 117374 C Rev 00 A 31 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Pa
345. nt connections on the circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on ATM Signaling The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Set the Max Point to Point Connections parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 41 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the Maximum Number of Point to Multipoint Connections By default you can have up to 40 simultaneous point to multipoint connections on a circuit at any given time However you can specify a value from 0 to 32767 connections Using the BCC To change the maximum number of point to multipoint connections navigate to the signaling prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 and enter point to multipoint maximum lt integer gt integer is a value from 0 to 32767 5 10 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling For example the following command sets the maximum number of point to multipoint connections on the ATM circuit to 100 signaling 11 1 point to multipoint maximum 100 sig
346. nter per lt integer gt integer is the PCR value that you want the signaling VC to use For example the following command changes the PCR value to 8000 signaling vc 11 1 0 5 per 8000 signaling vce 11 1 0 5 To change the PCR value for the ILMI VC navigate to the ILMI VC prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi vce 11 1 0 16 and enter per lt integer gt integer is the PCR value that you want the ILMI VC to use For example the following command changes the ILMI VC PCR value to 8000 ilmi vc 11 1 0 16 per 8000 ilmi vce 11 1 0 16 5 42 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signaling To change the signaling PCR value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Click on Sig VC The ATM Control VC for Signaling window opens 5 Set the Xmit Peak Cell Rate cells s parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 59 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM Signaling Parameters window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window
347. nter state disabled For example the following command disables signaling on the ATM connector signaling 11 1 state disabled signaling 11 1 To reenable signaling navigate to the signaling prompt and enter state enabled For example the following command reenables signaling on the ATM connector signaling 11 1 state enabled signaling 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 5 3 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To disable or reenable signaling complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Set the Enable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 39 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Assigning the UNI Signaling Protocol Standard The UNI signaling protocol standard specifies how the interface defines Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol SSCOP frames The ATM Forum Versions 3 0 and 3 1 methods of defining SSCOP
348. ntervals total The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs for each interval category The number of unavailable seconds UASs for each interval category Indicates the line status of the interface The possible status values are NoAlarm no alarm present RRAI receiving yellow remote alarm indication TRAI transmitting yellow remote alarm indication RAIS receiving Alarm Indications Signal AIS failure state TAIS transmitting AIS failure state LOF receiving Loss of Frame LOF failure state LOS receiving Loss of Signal LOS failure state Loopback looping the received signal TestCode receiving a test pattern LowSignal low signal 117374 C Rev 00 B 33 Appendix C Configuring NHRP for ATM Services This appendix describes the Bay Networks implementation of the Next Hop Resolution Protocol NHRP within an ATM topology It contains the following information Topic Page NHRP Overview C 2 Configuring NHRP on an Unconfigured ATM Interface C 3 Adding NHRP to an Existing ATM Interface C 6 Editing an NHRP Record C 8 Disabling an NHRP Record C 9 Deleting NHRP 117374 C Rev 00 C 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services NHRP Overview NHRP is a second generation address resolution protocol that is described in IETF lt draft ietf rolc nhrp 15 txt gt As defined by the IETF draft NHRP provides address resolution services by mapping internetw
349. nting UASs The number of P bit severely errored seconds PSESs in the current interval A PSES is a second with 44 or more PCVs one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS The PSES value does not increment when counting UASs The number of unavailable seconds UASs in the current interval The number of P bit coding violations PCVs in the current interval For all SONET applications a coding violation error event is a P bit Parity Error event A P bit Parity Error event occurs when the SONET M frame receives a P bit code that is not identical to the corresponding locally calculated code The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line The current interval The number of C bit errored seconds CESs in the current interval A CES is a second with one or more CCVs one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS This count is only for the C bit Parity SONET applications The CES value does not increment when counting UASs The number of C bit severely errored seconds CSESs in the current interval A CSES is a second with 44 or more CCVs one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS This count applies only to C bit Parity SONET applications The CSES value does not increment when counting UASs The number of unavailable seconds UASs in the current interval The number of C bit coding violations CCVs in the current interval For C bit Parity an
350. o includes the type of the bridged media Selecting NULL Encapsulation VC Based Multiplexing In NULL encapsulation the carried network protocol is identified implicitly by the virtual circuit connecting the two ATM stations Because each protocol must travel over a separate virtual circuit there is no need to include explicit multiplexing information in the payload of the PDU For this reason the bandwidth requirements and processing overhead remain minimal You can either manually configure the carried protocol or let the signaling procedures negotiate it dynamically during call establishment NULL encapsulated cells do not receive a header in a routed environment In a bridged environment the content of the PDU itself includes the necessary information for bridging the multiplexed protocols 117374 C Rev 00 1 15 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Encapsulation Rules for PVCs How you assign data encapsulation to individual PVCs depends to a degree on the data encapsulation type you assigned to the service record that contains those PVCs Table 1 4 provides suggestions for assigning data encapsulation to PVCs and hybrid PVCs that reside on these service records Table 1 4 Assigning Data Encapsulation to Individual PVCs Service Record Data Individual PVC Data Hybrid PVC Data Encapsulation Type Encapsulation Type Encapsulation Type LLC SNAP NULL or LLC SNAP LLC SNAP NULL NULL or LLC SNAP LLC SNAP NLPID NLPID NLPID
351. o 120 Specifies the SSCOP no response timer value in tenths timer Response of a second This value sets the allowable time between Timer the receipt of STAT PDUs So as not to interrupt the flow of data SSCOP does not require a reply to every POLL PDU This can cause problems in detecting a failed connection To alleviate this problem the no response timer runs parallel to the poll timer If both the no response timer and the poll timer expire SSCOP clears the connection The no response timer value must equal at least the sum of the keep alive timer plus the length of one round trip delay connection Connection 10 1to120 Specifies the SSCOP connection control CC timer control timer Control value in tenths of a second This value sets the Timer allowable time between the transmission of begin BGN END resynchronization RS and error recovery ER PDUs as long as the sender has not received an acknowledgment to any of these PDUs The CC timer must equal at least the length of one round trip delay Using the BCC To change an SSCOP timer value navigate to the SSCOP prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 sscop 11 1 and enter lt timer_name gt lt integer gt timer_name is the BCC name for the timer see Table 5 4 for the names and descriptions of SSCOP timers integer is the time value in tenths of a second that you want the timer to use For example the following command changes the poll timer to
352. o every poll PDU This can cause problems in detecting a failed connection To alleviate this problem the no response timer runs parallel to the poll timer If both the no response timer and the poll timer expire SSCOP clears the connection The no response timer value must equal at least the sum of the keepalive timer plus the length of one round trip delay Accept the default 70 or enter a value from 1 to 120 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 8 1 11 Connection Control Timer Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Signaling AAL SAAL 10 1 to 120 Specifies the SSCOP connection control CC timer value in tenths of a second This value sets the allowable time between the transmission of begin BGN END resynchronization RS and error recovery ER PDUs so long as the sender has not received an acknowledgment to any of these PDUs The CC timer must equal at least the length of one round trip delay Accept the default 10 or enter a value from 1 to 120 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 8 1 12 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Max Connection Control Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Signaling AAL SAAL 4 1 to 20 Specifies the SSCOP maximum connection control value
353. o use LDP static routes over the interface Specify Enable for MPLS to use LDP static routes over the interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 3 1 2 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Destination Route Prefix Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Static Route 0 0 0 0 Any valid IP destination route prefix Specifies the IP address of the destination network that you want to statically configure Enter a route prefix that specifies the destination network that you want to statically configure 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 3 1 5 Route Mask Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Static Route 0 0 0 0 Any valid subnetwork mask Specifies the route mask that you want the route prefix to use Enter an appropriate subnetwork mask 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 15 3 1 6 Default VC Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The following parameters define the default MPLS VC Admin Status Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the default VC Accept the default Enable for the default VC to ope
354. ollowing tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on the session record that you configured Site Manager supports only one LDP session record The Protocols menu selection becomes active 5 Click on Protocols The Protocols menu opens 6 Choose Edit IP The IP menu opens 7 Choose Adjacent Hosts The IP Adjacent Hosts window opens 8 Click on Add The IP Configuration window opens 9 Set the following parameters Set the IP Adjacent Host Address IP Adjacent Host Address parameter to the next hop IP address of MAC Address DLCI VPI VCI the LSR to which you are connecting Host Encapsulation Click on Help or see Configuring IP Set the MAC Address DLCI VPI VCI Services for details parameter to the VPI VCI value of the LDP default VC Set the Host Encapsulation parameter to SNAP 10 Click on OK You return to the IP Adjacent Hosts window continued 117374 C Rev 00 3 35 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 11 Click on Done System responds You return to the LDP Session Records List window 12 Click on Done
355. omplete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on Line Attributes Set the Data Path Enable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 7 The ATM ARE Line Driver Attributes window opens Set the Data Path Notify Timeout parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 7 Click on OK You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing an ATM Interface Defining the SVC Inactivity Timeout When you enable the SVC inactivity timeout function the default the router automatically terminates any SVCs that have not received or transmitted any cells If you disable the SVC inactivity timeout function all SVCs on the line remain open until you close them by another method When enabled the SVC inactivity timeout function also requires a timer value This timer value specifies how long you want the ATM router to wait before disabling inactive SVCs By default if the router does not receive or transmit any cells for 1200 seconds the inactive SVCs are disabled However you can set this timer to any value from 60 to 3600 seconds Using the BCC To disable the SVC
356. on A 34 setting 8 42 PCR See Peak Cell Rate PDU values defining 5 63 Peak Cell Rate described 1 24 5 41 6 11 MPLS VC 11 22 setting control VCs 5 41 PVCs 6 11 See also Xmit Peak Cell Rate 117374 C Rev 00 Per VC Clipping enabling disabling 4 14 parameter description A 11 physical layer described 1 7 Poll Timer modifying 5 61 parameter description A 64 primary configuration files router redundancy creating 3 26 product support xxx Protocol paramter MPLS A 82 Protocol Standard assigning 5 5 parameter description A 40 Protocol specifying 11 9 protocols adding to existing LDP session 3 33 to existing service record 3 13 to new LDP session 3 32 to new service record 3 12 enabling for hybrid access nonbridging 1 11 LAN emulation 1 11 PVCs 3 12 3 13 specifying for MPLS 11 9 supported 1 10 2 7 publications Bay Networks xxix PVC parameters descriptions of A 21 to A 26 PVCs access methods for 1 17 to 1 20 adding 3 5 3 14 and service records 1 9 copying 6 23 customizing 6 1 defining service records for 3 4 deleting 6 24 enabling disabling 6 9 encapsulation methods 1 13 to 1 16 hybrid access 1 19 to 1 21 multiple per service record 1 17 one per service record 1 18 Index 9 R Rev Burst Size parameter MPLS A 90 Rcv Peak Cell Rate MPLS A 89 Rev QOS Class parameter MPLS A 90 Rcv Sustainable Cell Rate MPLS A 89 Rcv Tagging parameter A 93
357. on ArbitratiQn ooccsccccicicnmssscecsuedsesasasescconsavieconasmersonceasnes 5 59 Sea ARN SAAL TITOS oriant a aasa aE S 5 61 Defining PDU Values TAT eia sais perreree aoip T orana ET aaa D 63 Setting the SSCOP Maximum Connection Control Value cccceeeeseeeees 5 63 Setting the SSCOP Maximum Poll Data Value escccceceeeeeteeeeeeeeeetaeeetenes 5 65 Setting the SSCOP Maximum STAT PDU Value vissiin 5 66 VEED GO NOKE suites EEE REE dee Chapter 6 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Disabling and Reenabling a PVC Service Record ccccccceseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeneeeees 6 2 Defining the Service Record MTU scss csssccsscetsccenaenceeatsaneccentetsudnadesienseeistaeeenausdiasnertaaines 6 3 Changing the SPOS Name ic cd ccccatecctsctasredasiorbbaacedcaGennesscieasieedaue sbdendinacterdeiacesauenadinaaeens 6 5 Deleting a Seivice RoCo cist oiarsreni mannan manda alien tua ORO Designating a PVC as Hybrid Bridged noTan eD A TT ein E E Disabling and Reenabing A PYCO sssriroieeriiironraaa rer ao a aa 6 9 Moding ATM Traffic Para mers cos ssecevcu ssrszcescysasenieasccormansasecnauiseareubay eia 6 11 Setting the PCR eee ee oni PTE E EE T opdis aG jae Ee E a E A NE aie AE A A A E A 6 13 e E lE e A E A E E T E O A simhdiius 6 15 Modifying the Maximum AAL CPCS SDU Size ou eeeececcececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeseneeeeeaeeesnes 6 17 Srey he TANS SDU SIZE eas yee ianen Naa A AENT 6 17 Settin
358. on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 27 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Modifying ILMI Timers and Retry Counters You can modify the following timers and their associated counters for ILMI e ILMI Get Request timer and retry count e ILMI Get Next Request timer and retry count e ILMI Set Request timer and retry count Setting the ILMI Get Request Timer The ILMI Get Request timer specifies the amount of time allowed for the circuit to receive a GET_RESPONSE message after sending a GET_REQUEST message By default the circuit waits 3 seconds for a response However you can set this timer to a value from 1 to 120 seconds Using the BCC To change the ILMI Get Request timer value navigate to the ILMI prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi 11 1 and enter get timer lt nteger gt integer is the time value in seconds that you want the timer to use For example the following command changes the ILMI Get Request timer to 6 seconds ilmi 11 1 get timer 6 ilmi 11 1 5 28 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signaling To change the ILMI Get Request timer value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window
359. on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Click on MPS The MPS List window opens 5 Click on Add The MPS Configuration Parameters window opens 6 Set the MPS Ctrl ATM Address Selector Byte parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 71 7 Click on Done You return to the MPS List window 8 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 9 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 9 10 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Defining MPS Timers Setting the MPS configuration mode to manual allows you to define the following MPS timers Keep alive time Keep alive life time Initial retry time Maximum retry time Give up time Default holding time Setting the Keepalive Time The keepalive time specifies how often the MPS must transmit MPOA KEEP_ALIVE packets By default the value is 10 seconds However you can set the keepalive time to any value from 1 to 300 seconds To set the keepalive time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify System responds The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM
360. onds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Set the Protocol parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 82 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Enabling and Disabling Aggregation The Aggregation parameter specifies whether or not the label edge router LER recognizes label switched paths LSPs aggregated combined over one VC Aggregation allows the same label or VPI VCI for many LSPs Using the same label for many LSPs is analogous to using the same next hop address for multiple routes Accept the default Disable if the LSR is not configured to send or does not support aggregated LSPs Enable aggregation if the LSR sends aggregated LSPs To enable or disable aggregation complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on M
361. onfiguration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens Set the Enable Disable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 67 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 9 2 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Setting the MPS Address Generating Mode You can set the MPS address generating mode to either automatic or manual mode In automatic mode the default selection the router bases the ATM address on the ILMI address registration You can bypass the ILMI address registration by choosing manual mode In manual mode you must specify the MPS control ATM address see Specifying the MPS Control ATM Address on page 9 4 To set the MPS address generating mode complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Atiribu
362. onfigure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 3 40 117374 C Rev 00 Chapter 4 Customizing an ATM Interface When you start ATM on the router all parameters use their default values Depending on the requirements of your network you may want to change some of these values This chapter describes how to customize interface or line details and includes the following information Topic Page Disabling and Reenabling the ATM Driver 4 2 Defining the Interface MTU 4 3 Defining the Data Path Notify Function 4 5 Defining the SVC Inactivity Timeout 4 7 Assigning the Framing Mode 4 9 Defining the Clocking Signal Source 4 10 Specifying DS 3 Line Buildout 4 11 Turning DS 3 Scrambling On and Off 4 12 Enabling and Disabling Per VC Clipping 4 14 Disabling and Reenabling an ATM Interface 4 1 Disabling and Reenabling Signaling on an Interface 4 17 Autogenerating ATM Addresses 4 18 Defining the Maximum Number of VPCs 4 21 Defining the Maximum Number of VCCs 4 21 Where to Go Next 4 22 117374 C Rev 00 4 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Disabling and Reenabling the ATM Driver By default when you create an ATM circuit the line driver is enabled You can disable and reenable the line driver for the specific connector without removing the physical line from the ATM receptacle Using the BCC To disable the line driver navigat
363. ons MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Emulated LAN Segment ID Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC 0 0 to 4095 Specifies the ring ID in decimal on which this token ring client resides You need only set this parameter for IEEE 802 5 LANE clients that are e Token ring end stations e Routing IP or IPX across an SRB token ring network Accept the default 0 or enter a value from 0 to 4095 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 20 Flush Protocol Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the flush protocol on this LE client The flush protocol ensures that data destined for a particular MAC address arrives in sequence Following a flush request the flush protocol drops cells for this MAC address while waiting for e The flush response from that MAC address e The flush timeout to expire for that MAC address If the client receives a flush response for the MAC address the cells for this MAC address begin flowing over a new virtual circuit However if the flush timeout expires for this MAC address the cells begin flowing to the BUS When disabled cells containing the same MAC address are dropped while waiting for the Path Switching Delay parameter to time out After the path switching delay time elapses the data automatically begins flowing over
364. ons CCVs in the current interval For C bit Parity and SYNTRAN DS3 applications this is the count of coding violations reported via the C bits For C bit Parity it is a count of C bit parity errors occurring in the accumulation interval 117374 C Rev 00 B 13 FarEnd Cbit Stats Circuit Interval CESs CSESs UASs CCVs DS3 Plicp Stats Circuit Interval SEFSs UASs Status Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Name of the circuit associated with this line The current interval The number of C bit errored seconds CESs in the current interval A CES is a second with one or more CCVs one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS This count is only for C bit Parity DS3 applications The CES value does not increment when counting UASs The number of C bit severely errored seconds CSESs in the current interval A CSES is a second with 44 or more CCVs one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS This count applies only to C bit Parity DS3 applications The CSES value does not increment when counting UASs The number of unavailable seconds UASs in the current interval The number of C bit coding violations CCVs in the current interval For C bit Parity DS3 applications this is the count of coding violations reported via the C bits For C bit Parity it is a count of C bit parity errors occurring in the accumulation interval Name of the circuit associated with this line The current interval
365. ontain a maximum of 8 VPI bits for a UNI connection This bit range allows for path identifiers from 0 to 255 Enter a value from 0 to 255 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 7 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Vc Range Minimum VCI Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 33 32 to 65535 Identifies the lowest virtual channel number that MPLS can use when creating SVCs The VCI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 16 VCI bits This bit range allows for channel identifiers from 32 to 65 535 Enter a value from 32 to 65535 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 8 Vc Range Maximum VCI Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 65535 32 to 65535 Identifies the largest virtual channel number that MPLS can use when creating SVCs The VCI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 16 VCI bits This bit range allows for channel identifiers from 32 to 65 535 Enter a value from 32 to 65535 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 9 Xmt Peak Cell Rate Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MP
366. or enter a value from 1 to 24 MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 25 117374 C Rev 00 A 45 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID T308 Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 30 1 to 180 Specifies the Release Sent timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit sends a RELEASE message to initiate clearing of an SVC Sending a RELEASE message places the network in the Release Request state The Release Sent timer stops when the circuit receives either a RELEASE message that is both the circuit and the network sent RELEASE messages at the same time ora RELEASE COMPLETE message from the network If the timer expires before the circuit receives one of these messages the circuit transmits the RELEASE message again If the circuit still does not receive a response the circuit releases the call reference and begins a restart procedure Accept the default 30 or enter a value from 1 to 180 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 26 A 46 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters T309 Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signalin
367. ork 8 40 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To change the expected LE_ARP response time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Expected LE_ARP Response Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 33 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 41 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Setting the Path Switching Delay The path switching delay specifies the amount of time that the LEC waits after sending a frame over an existing VCC before it switches to a new VCC this applies to multicast and data direct VCCs You can use the path switching delay parameter to bypass the flush protocol
368. orking layer addresses and NBMA subnetwork addresses As implemented by Bay Networks NHRP resolves IP and ATM addresses The IETF draft specifies behavior for NHRP clients and NHRP servers The NHRP client NHC generates NHRP address resolution requests for the local MPS The NHRP server NHS responds to NHRP address resolution requests by generating NHRP address resolution replies For this purpose the NHS maintains an address translation cache and a next hop cache NHRP Message Exchange NHRP address resolution is supported by seven formatted NHRP messages NHRP resolution request An NHRP resolution request is generated by an NHC and routed through the ATM topology It is functionally equivalent to a standard ARP request in that it contains the layer 3 and layer 2 address of the originator the layer 3 address of the target destination and a blank field reserved for the layer 2 address of the target As implemented by Bay Networks the NHRP resolution request contains the IP and ATM addresses of the originator and the IP address of the target NHRP resolution reply An NHRP resolution reply is generated by an NHS in response to an NHRP resolution request Like an NHRP resolution request it is routed through the ATM topology It is functionally equivalent to a standard ARP response in that it replicates the information in the NHRP resolution request and supplies the requested layer 2 ATM address NHRP registration request
369. ors confidential and proprietary intellectual property Licensee shall not sublicense assign or otherwise disclose to any third party the Software or any information about the operation design performance or implementation of the Software and user manuals that is confidential to Bay Networks and its licensors however Licensee may grant permission to its consultants subcontractors and agents to use the Software at Licensee s facility provided they have agreed to use the Software only in accordance with the terms of this license 3 Limited warranty Bay Networks warrants each item of Software as delivered by Bay Networks and properly installed and operated on Bay Networks hardware or other equipment it is originally licensed for to function substantially as described in its accompanying user manual during its warranty period which begins on the date Software is first shipped to Licensee If any item of Software fails to so function during its warranty period as the sole remedy Bay Networks will at its discretion provide a suitable fix patch or workaround for the problem that may be included in a future Software release Bay Networks further warrants to Licensee that the media on which the Software is provided will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of 90 days from the date Software is first shipped to Licensee Bay Networks will replace defective media at no charge if it is returned to Bay Networ
370. orwarding criteria for each packet All packets that belong to a particular FEC and that travel from a particular node follow the same path This group of packets is called a stream A packet stream is a group of packets that follows the same path to a destination In a conventional IP network each router hop examines each packet to determine its destination Using MPLS the examination of the packet is done only once The first router assigns a label that defines the specific packet stream Each intervening router then forwards packets based on the fixed length labels Labels reside in the label information base LIB which contains both inbound and outbound labels associated with inbound and outbound interfaces Looking up a label is faster than interpreting the destination of an individual packet and routing data based on that destination By assigning labels to packets or packet streams the transmission speed of your network increases 2 2 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding MPLS MPLS System Overview The Bay Networks MPLS implementation consists of three major components e Label distribution entity e MPLS label management MLM entity e Forwarding entity Figure 2 1 illustrates the basic MPLS system architecture OSPF RIP Routing table Other interfaces s Forwarding External component MPLS component Data path Control path ATM0058A Figure 2 1 The MPLS System 117374 C Rev 0
371. otocols over a single ATM virtual circuit In this approach an IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC header prefixes each PDU You can assign LLC SNAP encapsulation to e PVC service records e SVC service records e Individual PVCs Note Assigning LLC SNAP to an SVC service record automatically uses the technology defined in RFC 1577 Classical IP and ARP over ATM For information about RFC 1577 see Classical IP over ATM Concepts on page 1 28 117374 C Rev 00 1 13 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services NULL Encapsulation RFC 1483 refers to NULL encapsulation as VC based multiplexing This method performs upper layer protocol multiplexing implicitly using ATM virtual circuits You can assign NULL encapsulation to e PVC service records e SVC service records e Individual PVCs that are also members of an LLC SNAP service record Note Assigning NULL to an SVC service record automatically uses the technology defined in RFC 1577 Classical IP and ARP over ATM For information about RFC 1577 see Classical IP over ATM Concepts on page 1 28 NLPID Encapsulation You can use Network Layer Protocol ID NLPID RFC 1490 in an ATM environment for frame relay ATM internetworking You can assign NLPID encapsulation to PVC service records Selecting a Data Encapsulation Method Generally speaking the designers of these data encapsulation methods envisioned that NULL encapsulation would dominate in en
372. ou want the interface to run only PVCs disabling ATM signaling makes additional system resources available To disable or reenable signaling on the ATM interface complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM link module interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on Interface Attributes The ATM Interface Attributes window opens 3 Set the Enable ATM Signaling parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 12 4 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Autogenerating ATM Addresses You can automatically generate the user part suffix of SVC ATM addresses When autogenerating this portion of the ATM addresses you can use either the ATM hardware MAC address or a MAC address override value as the end station identifier Enabling or Disabling the Hardware MAC Address Feature If enabled the hardware MAC address feature uses the MAC address of the ATM interface when automatically generating the ATM address user part Disabling this feature uses the MAC address override value see the next section when automatically generating the ATM address user part Note If you disable the h
373. out 2 lec service newyork 8 46 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To change the flush timeout value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Flush Timeout parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 34 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 47 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Specifying a LECS ATM Address You can specify which LAN emulation configuration server LECS you want the LE client to use when opening a configuration VCC to the configuration service Entering this ATM address is optional if you do not enter an address the LEC uses the well known LECS ATM address to open a
374. outer Redundancy and OAM ARP and Inverse ARP Support ATM supports the Address Resolution Protocol ARP enabling the router to dynamically resolve IP network layer protocol to VPI VCI address mappings ATM learns the address of the virtual circuit by detecting the virtual circuit that delivered the ARP response ATM also supports Inverse ARP However you can use Inverse ARP only if both the local and remote routers support it Bay Networks uses both proprietary and standard ARP and Inverse ARP for PVCs that run IP The method that the PVC uses depends on how you configure address resolution for the IP interface See Configuring IP Services for additional information about configuring address resolution Bay Networks uses standard ARP and Inverse ARP for SVCs running classical IP RFC 1577 and SVCs running LAN emulation ATM Error Checking ATM verifies that the VPI VCI is valid with respect to the PVCs configured for the ATM circuit It also verifies the header format ATM verifies valid SVC connection through signaling messages Simulated Multicast Packet Support Simulated multicasting is generally used in certain address resolution techniques and for applications that require the delivery of identical information to multiple recipients Bay Networks ATM routers simulate multicasting by sending a copy of the multicast or broadcast packet to every available virtual circuit on a particular logical interface Converting Mb s to Cel
375. ow click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify Click on ATM The Select Connection Type window opens The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the classical IP service record that you want to delete 5 Click on Delete Site Manager deletes the service record 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Classical IP Service Records Where to Go Next Use the following table to determine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about ATM concepts Chapter 1 Learn about MPLS concepts Chapter 2 Start ATM or MPLS Chapter 3 Change default settings for ATM interface Chapter 4 parameters Change default settings for ATM signaling Chapter 5 parameters Change default settings for ATM PVC service record Chapter 6 and PVC parameters Change default settings for LAN Emulation client Chapter 8 service record parameters Change default settings for Multi Protocol over ATM Chapter 9 server parameters Change default settings for the ATM router Chapter 10 redundancy parameter Change default settings for MPLS parameters Chapter 11 Obtain information about
376. ow opens The MPS List window opens 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify 6 Set the Keep Alive Life Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 73 7 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window continued 9 12 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 9 Click on Done System responds You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done Setting the Initial Retry Time You return to the Configuration Manager window The initial retry time is used by the MPOA retry mechanism By default the value is 5 seconds However you can set this value from 1 to 300 seconds To set the initial retry time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Click on MPS 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify The MPS List window opens 6 Set the Initial Retry Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page
377. ox atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 sscop 11 1 and enter state disabled For example the following command disables SSCOP on the ATM interface sscop 11 1 state disabled sscop 11 1 To reenable SSCOP navigate to the SSCOP prompt and enter state enabled For example the following command reenables SSCOP on the ATM interface sscop 11 1 state enabled sscop 11 1 5 58 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signaling To disable or reenable SSCOP complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Signaling AAL SAAL The ATM Signaling AAL Records List window opens Set the Enable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 63 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Defining the Link Connection Arbitration Link connection arbitration defines whether SSCOP SAAL initiates link connections active the default value or waits for connections passive Using the BCC To make link connection arbitration passive navigate to the
378. parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 84 Click on OK You return to the LDP Static Route List window Click on Done You return to the LDP Session Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 10 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Specifying a Route Mask The destination route mask specifies the IP route mask that you want the route prefix to use To specify the route mask complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 11 31 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 4 Click on Static Route System responds The LDP Static Route List window opens 5 Click on the static route that you want to modify 6 Set the Route Mask parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 84 7 Click on OK 8 Click on Done You return to the LDP Static Route List window You return to t
379. pecifying 11 14 VCI range maximum specifying 11 17 minimum specifying 11 16 VPI number specifying 11 13 VPI Range specifying 11 15 default VC parameters descriptions of A 84 to A 93 default VC customizing 11 12 Default Vcl VCI parameter A 85 Default Vcl VPI parameter A 85 Destination Route Prefix parameter A 84 Destination Route Prefix specifying 11 30 DNS Proxy Port parameter NHRP A 98 Drop Party Sent Timer See T398 DS3 Line Build Out parameter description A 10 specifying 4 11 DS3 Scrambling parameter description A 10 turning on off 4 12 E Edit ATM Connector window using A 3 Edit MPLS Connector window using A 4 educational services xxx Index 4 Emulated LAN Name entering 8 10 parameter description A 19 A 30 Emulated LAN Segment ID parameter description A 35 specifying 8 14 Emulated LAN Type defining 8 12 parameter description A 20 A 28 Enable ATM Signaling parameter A 12 Enable parameter adjacent host A 104 ILMI description A 55 using 5 26 LANE description A 27 using 8 15 LES BUS address description A 37 line description A 6 using 4 2 SAAL description A 63 using 5 58 signaling description A 39 using 5 3 SSCOP using 5 58 Enable parameter NHRP A 101 Enable Disable LDP parameter description A 79 Enable Disable MPLS static routes parameter description A 83 Enable Disable MPOA service record parameter description A 67 Enable Disable
380. pens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP Set the Hold Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 81 The LDP Session Records List window opens Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPLS Configuration Specifying a Protocol for MPLS Route Configuration You can specify the protocol that LDP uses to configure routes or allow LDP to use both a protocol and IP static routes Accept the default OSPF for OSPF routing Specify RIP to use the routing information protocol When using either the OSPF or RIP setting LDP does not use any of the IP static routes in the route table To use static routes based on the entries in the forwarding information base FIB along with OSPF specify HYBRIDOSPE To use static routes along with RIP specify HYBRIDRIP Note The routes configuration mode takes precedence over the protocol that you set see Specifying the Routes Configuration Mode on page 11 7 This means that when you set the routes configuration mode to Manual LDP disregards the protocol setting To specify a protocol for route configuration complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System resp
381. pens 7 Click on IP A check mark appears in the box for IP 8 Click on any other protocols that you want A check mark appears in the box for each additional protocol that you select 9 Click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 10 Set the following parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Click on Help or see Configuring IP Services for details The IP address should match the local IP address that you configured for the LDP session 11 Click on OK For each additional protocol you select the Configuration Manager displays a protocol specific window prompting you for required information Click on Help for any parameter or see the appropriate protocol specific guide After completing all required protocol configuration you return to the LDP Session Records List window 12 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 13 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 14 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 3 34 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Adding IP Adjacent Hosts Caution You must configure IP adjacent hosts at the MPLS interface level The adjacencies must be specific to the MPLS interface for MPLS to function properly Do not configure IP adjacent hosts at the global level To add IP adjacencies to LDP complete the f
382. ponds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the service record that you want to modify 5 Set the Service Name parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 21 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window continued 117374 C Rev 00 6 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 7 Click on Done System responds You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done Deleting a Service Record You return to the Configuration Manager window You can use the BCC or Site Manager to delete a PVC service record Using the BCC To delete a PVC service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 pvc service boston and enter delete For example the following command deletes PVC service record boston pvce service boston delete atm 11 1 Using Site Manager To delete a PVC service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Sel
383. ports in the transmit direction Most packet sizes fall well within this limit However you can set the transmit SDU size to any value from 1 to 65 535 bytes Using the BCC To change the transmit SDU size for the signaling control VC navigate to the signaling VC prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 signaling ve 11 1 0 5 and enter tx sdu maximum lt integer gt integer is the maximum SDU size that you want the signaling VC to transmit For example the following command changes the maximum transmit SDU size to 65 535 bytes signaling ve 11 1 0 5 tx sdu maximum 65535 signaling vce 11 1 0 5 To change the transmit SDU size for the ILMI control VC navigate to the ILMI VC prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi ve 11 1 0 16 and enter tx sdu maximum lt integer gt integer is the maximum SDU size that you want the ILMI VC to transmit For example the following command changes the maximum transmit SDU size to 65 535 bytes ilmi vc 11 1 0 16 tX sdu maximum 65535 ilmi vc 11 1 0 16 117374 C Rev 00 5 51 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To change the maximum transmit SDU size for the signaling control VC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM
384. ps All group members will use the values you configure in this file Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Site Manager window choose Tools The Tools menu opens 2 Choose Router Redundancy The Router Redundancy menu opens 3 Choose Group Configuration The file selection window opens 4 Enter template cfg as the file name 5 Click on OK The Select Router Model window opens 6 Select a router and click on Confirm The Configuration Manager window opens 7 Click on an empty slot The Module List window opens 8 Choose a LAN module for example Ethernet token ring or FDDI and click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 9 Click on the connector you want to The Add Circuit window opens configure for router redundancy 10 Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 11 Select Router Redundancy You can also select other protocols that you want to configure 12 Click on OK Site Manager asks if you want to add VLAN circuits 13 Click on No The Router Redundancy Circuit window opens 14 Set the Primary MAC Address parameter Click on Help or see Configuring Interface and Router Redundancy for details 15 Click on OK The R R Group Global Parameters Configuration window opens continued 3 24 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Site Manager P
385. r Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX to allow systems in nonmeshed networks to fully communicate See the documentation for these protocols for more information One PVC A configuration using one PVC per service record works the same way as one using multiple PVCs per service record When you define only one PVC per service record upper layer protocols treat the ATM network as a series of direct point to point connections viewing each PVC as an individual network interface You can configure each PVC with different protocols and parameter settings This allows you to connect to different network sites using for example different types of data encapsulation Figure 1 7 117374 C Rev 00 Upper layer protocol Figure 1 7 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM ATM physical interface Be I l I l Servi 1 c ervice PV record i gt Sitea I I i Service 1 Pvc l I I 1 I I E I L d ATM0020A One PVC per Service Record Assigning one PVC per service record allows you to dedicate a PVC to a particular protocol but at the expense of some configuration overhead memory and address space This type of configuration is best suited to small nonmeshed configurations or to configurations in which protocols must reside on separate PVCs Note The maximum number of PVCs you can configure in this way varies depending on the configuration of the router the nu
386. r gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS 5 1 to 300 Specifies the initial retry time in seconds used by the MPOA retry mechanism Accept the default 5 or enter a value from 1 to 300 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 8 Maximum Retry Time Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS 3 1 to 300 Specifies the maximum retry time in seconds used by the MPOA retry mechanism Accept the default 5 or enter a value from 1 to 300 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 9 117374 C Rev 00 A 73 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Give Up Time Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS 40 5 to 300 Specifies the maximum amount of time that the MPS must wait before giving up on a pending resolution request Accept the default 40 or enter a value from 5 to 300 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 10 Default Holding Time Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS 20 1 to 120 Specifies the time in minutes used in NHRP resolution replies
387. r and a 1 byte selector field The router uses the MPOA service record address information as a base when creating a new MPS The router configures this value for you in automatic mode You must configure this value in manual mode Enter an ATM address user part manual mode only 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 5 Enable Disable Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the selected MPS Accept the default Enable if you want the MPS to remain enabled on this interface Select Disable if you do not want the MPS enabled on this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 1 1 2 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID MPS Config Mode Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS Automatic Automatic Manual Specifies whether the MPS configures automatically that is uses timer information from the LECS or manually that is uses timer information from the MPS List window Accept the default Automatic if you want the server to configure automatically Select Manual if you do not want the server to autoconfigure 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 4 LECS ATM Addr Network Prefi
388. r future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default OFF for this parameter Enabling and Disabling the Default VC Cell Loss Priority This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default OFF for this parameter Enabling and Disabling Default VC Transmit Tagging This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default OFF for this parameter Enabling and Disabling Default VC Receive Tagging This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default OFF for this parameter 11 28 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPLS Configuration Customizing LDP Static Route Parameters A static route is a manually configured route that specifies the transmission path that a datagram must follow based on the datagram s destination address A static route specifies a transmission path to another network You configure a static route when you want to restrict datagrams to paths you specifically configure MPLS can use Static routes to distribute LDP information throughout the MPLS network If you intend to use IP static routes over MPLS you must define the IP static route prefix and the route mask for LDP Defining the route prefix and mask does not configure the static route Instead
389. r only for DS 3 modules Select Short for lines shorter than 225 ft select Long for lines 225 ft or longer 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 23 DS3 Scrambling Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes On On Off If you select On the platform randomizes cell payload sufficiently to guarantee cell synchronization If you select Off cell synchronization problems could occur Note that ATM devices with different settings for scrambling cannot communicate For example if you configure a router to enable scrambling and configure a hub to disable scrambling the router and the hub cannot communicate You can set this parameter only when using DS 3 modules Select On or Off If you select On be sure to enable scrambling for all devices on the network If you select Off be sure to disable scrambling for all devices on the network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 2 1 22 A 10 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Per VC Clipping Path Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt Line Attributes Default Disable Options Enable Disable Function Enables or disables cell clipping on a per VC basis Instructions Accept the default Disable for normal VC clipping Enable this parameter if you want to clip cells on a per VC basis MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 3 1 1 17 117374 C Rev 00 A 11 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services ATM Interface
390. r window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Click on Sig VC The ATM Control VC for Signaling window opens 5 Set the VCI parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 44 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM Signaling Parameters window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 39 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To change the ILMI VCI number complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters Interface ILMI window opens 4 Click on ILMI VC The ATM Control VC for ILMI window opens 5 Set the ILMI VCI parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 56 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window 7 Click
391. rameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Max Addr Translation Cache Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 16 16 to 1024 Specifies the maximum number of IP to NBMA ATM address mapping entries to be cached in the address translation cache In most configurations accept the default value Specifying a higher value uses more buffer space resulting in less memory for other system requirements 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 22 Server Load Balancing Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables round robin cycling of next hop entries in the next hop cache for a load balancing effect among client applications that use the data In most configurations accept the default value Disable to disable round robin cycling of next hop entries Select Enable to implement round robin cycling 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 23 Server Negative Caching Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables negative caching of DNS records Negative caching refers to the capability of the NHRP server to remember that certain DNS records could not be found and thus avoid continuously querying the DNS server for unavailable data In most configura
392. rameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 23 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Xmt Tagging Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC OFF OFF ON This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default OFF for this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 24 Rev Tagging Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC OFF OFF ON This parameter is a placeholder for future releases it does not currently perform any function on the router Accept the default OFF for this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 25 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services NHRP Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID This section describes the NHRP parameters for MPOA NHRP Request Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable Routed None Specifies the method that the NHRP client uses to find th
393. rameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID VCC Timeout Period Enable Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC Enable Enable Disable Disables or reenables the virtual channel connection VCC timeout period When you enable this parameter a LAN emulation client can release any unused data direct or multicast send VCCs after the VCC timeout period expires The ATM drivers support a timeout period of 20 minutes Accept the default Enable if you want this LAN emulation client to release unused data direct or multicast send VCCs after the VCC timeout period expires Select Disable if you do not want this LAN emulation client to release unused data direct or multicast send VCCs after the timeout period expires 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 13 Max Retry Count Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC 1 1 or2 Specifies the maximum number of times a LAN emulation client can retry an LE_ARP_REQUEST following the original request for a given frame MAC address Accept the default 1 or enter 2 as the new value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 14 A 32 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path De
394. rate Specify Disable to turn off the default VC 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 2 A 84 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Default Vcl VPI Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 0 0 to 255 Identifies the virtual path of the MPLS default VC The VPI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 8 VPI bits for a UNI connection This bit range allows for path identifiers from 0 to 255 Enter a value from 0 to 255 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 5 Default Vcl VCI Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 32 32 to 65535 Identifies the virtual channel of the MPLS default VC The VCI is part of the cell header The header can contain a maximum of 16 VCI bits This bit range allows for channel identifiers from 32 to 65 535 Enter a value from 32 to 65535 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 16 1 3 1 6 Vc Range VPI Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt MPLS gt LDP gt Default VC 0 0 to 255 Identifies the virtual path that MPLS can use when creating SVCs The VPI is part of the cell header The header can c
395. ration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Disabling and Reenabling the LANE Client By default the LANE client is enabled on a service record when you assign LANE data encapsulation to that service record However you can disable or reenable the LANE client on a service record at any time To disable or reenable a LANE client complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on Service Attributes The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC Set the Enable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 27 The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 15 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Specifying an Owner Specifying a LEC owner is optional This entry up to 128 alphanumeric character
396. ration and includes the following information Topic Page Disabling and Reenabling the MPOA Service Record 9 2 Setting the MPS Address Generating Mode 9 3 Specifying the MPS Control ATM Address 9 4 Disabling and Reenabling Individual MPOA Servers 96 Specifying the MPS Configuration Mode 9 7 Specifying a LECS ATM Address 9 8 Defining the MPS Control ATM Address Selector Byte 1 Defining MPS Timers 9 11 Defining MPS Cache Values 9 17 Deleting an Individual MPS 9 19 Deleting MPOA from the Interface 9 20 Where to Go Next 9 21 You must create an MPOA service record before you can customize an MPS For information about creating an MPOA service record and starting the MPOA server see Starting the MPOA Server on page 3 15 117374 C Rev 00 9 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Disabling and Reenabling the MPOA Service Record The router uses the information in the MPOA service record when creating an MPS By default the MPOA service record is enabled when you enter and exit the MPOA Service Record window However you can disable or reenable the MPOA service record at any time Enable the MPOA service record to allow MPOA servers to operate on this interface Otherwise disable the MPOA service record To disable or reenable the MPOA service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the C
397. rational until fully configured an MPOA server is enabled when you add it to an ATM interface However you can disable or reenable individual MPOA servers at any time Enable MPOA servers to allow mapping between LAN emulation clients and that server Otherwise disable the MPOA server To disable or reenable MPS mapped circuits complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Click on MPS The MPS List window opens 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify 6 Set the Enable Disable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 69 continued 9 6 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 7 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Specifying the MPS Configuration Mode The MPS configuration mode determines whether th
398. re e NoAlarm no alarm present e RRAI receiving yellow remote alarm indication e TRAI transmitting yellow remote alarm indication e RAIS receiving Alarm Indications Signal AIS failure state e TAIS transmitting AIS failure state e LOF receiving Loss of Frame LOF failure state e LOS receiving Loss of Signal LOS failure state e Loopback looping the received signal e TestCode receiving a test pattern e LowSignal low signal 117374 C Rev 00 B 15 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Line Stats Circuit Interval LESs SEFSs UASs LCVs Pbit Status Circuit Interval PESs PSESs UASs PCVs Name of the circuit associated with this line A historical breakdown of intervals including e The current interval incomplete e All but the last two intervals that is all intervals except the current interval and the previous interval e The previous interval that is the last complete interval All of the intervals total The number of line errored seconds LESs for each interval category The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs for each interval category The number of unavailable seconds UASs for each interval category The number of line coding violations LCVs for each interval category Name of the circuit associated with this line A historical breakdown of intervals including e The current interval incomplete e All but the last two interva
399. redundant LESs 8 17 Registration Refresh Interval parameter A 103 Release Sent timer See T308 Remote IP Address parameter A 80 Remote IP Address specifying 11 5 Remote TCP Port parameter A 80 Remote TCP Port specifying 11 6 response time LE_ARP See Expected LE_ARP Response Time Restart Request Sent on Channel timer See T316c Restart Request Sent on Interface timer See T316 restarts enabling disabling 5 24 retransmissions defining 5 22 Route Mask parameter A 84 Route Mask specifying 11 31 route prefix specifying 11 30 router redundancy ATM customizing 10 1 described 1 43 starting 3 1 router redundancy requirements 1 44 Routes Configuration Mode parameter A 81 Routes Configuration Mode specifying 11 7 S SAAL customizing 5 57 to 5 66 Data Link Connect timer See T309 Data Link Disconnect timer See TDisc enabling disabling 5 58 parameters A 63 to A 67 SCR See Sustainable Cell Rate Index 10 SDU size setting receive control VCs 5 54 MPLS 11 26 PVCs 6 19 transmit control VCs 5 51 MPLS 11 25 PVCs 6 17 secondary configuration files creating 3 27 segmentation and reassembly SAR sublayer 1 8 Select Connection Typre window using A 2 selector byte defining for MPS 9 10 Server LES redundant 1 35 Server Enable parameter NHRP A 96 Server Forward Enable parameter NHRP A 97 Server Load Balancing parameter NHRP A 100 Server Max Next Hop Entries parameter NHRP A
400. ress and passes the requested ATM address back to the MPS The MPS in turn forwards the resolved address to the requesting MPC BayRS provides MPOA server functionality MPOA Basic Elements MPOA services are dependent on three basic elements LANE LANE LAN emulation provides transparent support for legacy LANs in an ATM topology LANE enables intrasubnet communication and MPOA provides intersubnet communication 1 40 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Next Hop Resolution Protocol NHRP NHRP is a sophisticated address resolution protocol that maps network layer addresses for example IP addresses to NBMA addresses in the case of BayRS ATM addresses For instructions on configuring an NHRP server see Appendix C Configuring NHRP for ATM Services Virtual router A virtual router is a set of network devices and associated software that collectively provides the functionality of multiprotocol routed networks Establishing a Network Cut Through MPOA components and elements function together to establish an SVC between a source host and a destination host Figure 1 14 1 A local MPC monitors traffic flow and maintains a count of packets addressed over a specific interval to remote hosts When the count exceeds a threshold value the MPC attempts to establish an SVC to the host To establish the virtual connection the MPC needs the ATM address of the host The M
401. return to the Edit MPLS Connetor window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 11 11 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Customizing Default VC Parameters The LDP uses a default VC to communication between peers within the MPLS network The following parameters define the default VC Disabling and Reenabling Default VC Admin Status When you start MPLS the default VC is enabled on the interface To disable or reenable the default VC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP Click on Default VC Set the Admin Status parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 84 The LDP Session Records List window opens The Default VC Record Parameters window opens Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 12 117374 C Rev 00 Spe
402. ributes The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Set the ATM Addr Net Prefix parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 18 Click on Done Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done Entering an ATM Address User Part You return to the Configuration Manager window The ATM address user part suffix consists of a 6 byte end station identifier and a 1 byte selector field This 7 byte portion of the ATM address can range from 00000000000000 to FEFFFFFFFFFFFF You can either autogenerate this value see Disabling and Reenabling User Part Autogeneration on page 8 3 or you can enter the value manually 8 6 117374 C Rev 00 Using the BCC Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients To assign an ATM address user part to a service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter user part lt address gt address is the ATM address user part that you want the VCs on the service record to use For example the following command defines the ATM address user part on the service record as 00000000000001 lec service newyork user part 00000000000001 lec service newyork Using Site Manager To assign an ATM
403. rid access modes see PVC Access Methods on page 1 17 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 25 A 22 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Administrative State Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC Up Up Down Specifies the administrative state of the PVC The Up state indicates that traffic flow is enabled on this PVC The Down state indicates that traffic flow is disabled on this PVC Accept the default Up if you want traffic to flow on this PVC Set the state to Down if you do not want traffic to flow on this PVC 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 5 Xmit Peak Cell Rate cells s Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC 2358 128 to 353207 ATM ARE OC 3 SONET SDH ILI pairs and Model 5782 ATM routers 128 to 96000 ATM ARE DS 3 ILI pairs 128 to 80000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 832 framing mode 128 to 72000 ATM ARE E 3 ILI pairs G 751 framing mode Specifies the upper traffic limit in cells s that the ATM connection can submit How you set the peak cell rate depends on e The optical transmission rate of your ATM device e The amount of traffic you expect on a particular VC e The rate you want for each VC Aft
404. rmation about MPLS see Chapter 2 Understanding MPLS This chapter describes how to customize an MPLS configuration and includes the following information Topic Page Customizing LDP Parameters 11 2 Disabling and Reenabling MLM Administrative Status Ait Customizing Default VC Parameters 11 12 Customizing LDP Static Route Parameters 11 2 Where to Go Next 11 33 For information about starting MPLS see Starting MPLS on page 3 30 117374 C Rev 00 11 1 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Customizing LDP Parameters LDP is the set of procedures and messages by which label switching routers LSRs establish label switched paths LSPs through a network LDP establishes these paths by mapping network layer routing information directly to data link layer switched paths You can customize the default values for LDP parameters as described in the following sections Disabling and Reenabling LDP By default you enable LDP when you add an LDP session to the interface However you can disable and reenable the LDP session at any time Enable the session to allow MPLS LDP to operate over the interface Disable the session to turn off MPLS LDP on the interface To disable or reenable LDP complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 t
405. rns to the initial state Join state 4 Initial registration state 5 BUS connect state 6 If the LE client loses the BUS connection it can attempt to reconnect Operational state 7 ATM0034A Figure 1 13 LAN Emulation States Note The numbers that follow each state appear in the ATM LEC status record wfAtmLecStatusEntry 1 36 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM The following sections briefly describe each LAN emulation state Refer to the ATM Forum LAN Emulation Over ATM specification for more information about LAN emulation states Initial State An LE client always starts in the initial state before attempting to connect to the LECS LECS Connect State An LE client enters the LECS connect state when it attempts to connect to the LECS Configure State An LE client enters the configure state when it attempts to retrieve the necessary information that is the ATM address of the LES LAN type LAN name Maximum MTU and various timeout values required to join an emulated LAN Join State An LE client enters the join state when it attempts to join an emulated LAN Joining an emulated LAN requires that the LE client e Set up a control VCC to communicate with the LES e Send a join request containing the client MAC address to the LES e Accept a control distributed VCC to receive control data from the LES e Receive a valid join response from the LES
406. rocedure continued You do this 16 Set the Bid Duration parameter to at least 90 seconds Click on Help or see the parameter description in Configuring Interface and Router Redundancy System responds 17 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 18 Click on the slot that contains the ATM module The Module List window opens 19 Choose the ATM module type that resides on the router and click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 20 Click on the ATM1 connector that you want to configure for router redundancy The Add Circuit window opens 21 Click on OK The Select Connection Type window opens 22 Click on ATM The Initial ATM Signaling Config window opens 26 Click on Done 23 Click on OK The Edit ATM Connector window opens 24 Click on Configure ATM Router The Router Redundancy Circuit window Redundancy opens 25 Click on OK You return to the Edit ATM Connector window You return to the Select Connection Type window 27 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 28 Click on File The File menu opens 29 Choose Save You return to the Configuration Manager window For detailed descriptions of router redundancy parameters not described in this section see Configuring Interface and Router Redundancy 117374 C Rev 00 3 25 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Creati
407. rompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter lan type lt value gt value is the type of ELAN that you want this LEC to join unspecified ieee8023 or ieee8 025 For example the following command allows the LEC to join only Ethernet IEEE 802 3 emulated LANs lec service newyork lan type ieee8023 lec service newyork 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To change the emulated LAN type for a LANE client complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on Service Attributes The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Emulated LAN Type parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 28 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 13 Configuring ATM and MPLS Servi
408. s Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Rev Peak Cell Rate parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 89 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the Default VC Receive SCR The receive sustainable cell rate SCR specifies the upper limit of the ATM connection conforming average rate on the receiving side The average rate equals the total number of cells transmitted divided by the duration of the connection The default value 0 indicates that the transmit SCR is off Using the SCR you can define the future cell flow of a VC in greater detail than by using only the peak cell rate 11 22 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPLS Configuration The SCR maps directly to the minimum cell rate MCR The MCR defines the minimum amount of guaranteed bandwidth allowed for the default VC
409. s Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters T322 Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 4 1 to 24 Specifies the Status Enquiry Sent timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit sends a STATUS ENQUIRY message to the network This message checks the validity of a call by requesting the call state that is active in progress or null The Status Enquiry Sent timer stops when the circuit receives a STATUS message from the network If the timer expires before the circuit receives a STATUS message the circuit can transmit as many STATUS ENQUIRY messages as specified with the Num Stat Enquiries ReXmitted parameter see the parameter description on A 54 If the circuit still does not receive a response the circuit clears the call Accept the default 4 or enter a value from 1 to 24 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 32 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID TDisc Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 4 1 to 180 Specifies the SAAL Data Link Disconnect timer va
410. s gt PVC 4608 1 to 65535 Specifies the maximum AAL CPCS SDU size in bytes that this VC supports in the transmit direction Enter an octet value that represents the maximum packet size that you intend this VC to transmit Bay Networks recommends that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes Most packets fall well within this limit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 17 117374 C Rev 00 A 25 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Maximum AAL CPCS Receive SDU Size Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC 4608 1 to 65535 Specifies the maximum AAL CPCS SDU size in bytes that this VC supports in the receive direction Enter an octet value that represents the maximum packet size that you intend this VC to receive Bay Networks recommends that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes Most packets fall well within this limit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 18 Data Encapsulation Type Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt PVC LLC SNAP LLC SNAP NLPID NULL Specifies the type of data encapsulation that you want this PVC to use Select LLC SNAP NLPID or NULL data encapsulation for e All PVCs on a service record e Hybrid
411. s provides administrative assistance when distinguishing among LECs To specify a LEC owner complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Owner parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 27 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 8 16 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Assigning ATM LES Addresses LE clients use the LAN emulation server LES to establish the control direct VCC The LEC must know the LES address to obtain this information before it can join an emulated LAN The LES address consists of a user part and a network prefix If you select manual configuration mode you must enter at least one LES address see Selecting a LEC
412. s 8 48 Enabling and Disabling LAN Emulation Version 2 8 49 Deleting a Service Record 8 50 Where to Go Next 8 52 For information about how to define a new LANE service record see Chapter 3 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Disabling and Reenabling a LANE Service Record By default you enable a service record when you add it to the interface However you can disable and reenable a specific service record at any time Enable the service record to allow traffic to flow over it and any of its VCs Otherwise disable the service record Using the BCC To disable a LANE service record navigate to the LANE service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter state disabled For example the following command disables the LANE service record newyork lec service newyork state disabled lec service newyork To reenable the LANE service record navigate to the LANE service record prompt and enter state enabled For example the following command reenables the LANE service record newyork lec service newyork State enabled lec service newyork 8 2 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To disable or reenable a LANE service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1
413. s ATM and MPLS parameters the Select Connection Type window the Edit ATM Connector window and the Edit MPLS Connector window Select Connection Type Window To display the Select Connection Type window click on an ATM link module interface labeled ATM1 in the Configuration Manager window Note You cannot run both ATM and MPLS on the same ATM interface A 2 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters From the Select Connection Type window you can do any of the following Access ATM parameters Access MPLS parameters Access interface parameters Access line parameters Delete ATM or MPLS from the interface Edit ATM Connector Window The Edit ATM Connector window acts as a control access point for all ATM parameters This window provides information specific to each individual ATM interface For any given interface the Edit ATM Connector window provides the following attribute buttons Service Attributes MPOA Server Attributes ATM Signaling Signaling AAL SAAL Interim Local Management Interface ILMI Configure ATM Router Redundancy By clicking on any of these buttons you can access and edit the parameters associated with that specific ATM interface connector To access parameters from the Edit ATM Connector window 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface labeled ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector wi
414. s disabled traffic cannot flow over it Using the BCC To disable a PVC navigate to the PVC prompt for example box atm 11 1 pvc service boston pve 11 1 0 32 and enter state disabled For example the following command disables the PVC pvc 11 1 0 32 state disabled pvc 11 1 0 32 To reenable the PVC navigate to the PVC prompt and enter state enabled For example the following command reenables the PVC pvc 11 1 0 32 state enabled pvc 11 1 0 32 Using Site Manager To disable or reenable a PVC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 6 9 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 4 Click on the PVC service record that you want to modify System responds Click on PVC 6 Click on the PVC that you want to modify The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 7 Set the Administrative State parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 23 8 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window 9 Click on Done You return to the E
415. s that you intend this VC to receive Bay Networks recommends that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes Most packets fall well within this limit To change the receive AAL CPCS SDU size complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on MPLS Click on LDP The Edit MPLS Connector window opens The LDP Session Records List window opens Click on Default VC Set the AAL Cpcs Receive Sdu Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 91 The Default VC Record Parameters window opens Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 26 117374 C Rev 00 Specifying the AAL Encapsulation Type Customizing MPLS Configuration The AAL encapsulation type specifies the data encapsulation type for the default VC and all VC connections The default encapsulation type is LLCENCAPS To change the AAL encapsulation type complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager
416. s values are e NoAlarm no alarm present e RRAI receiving yellow remote alarm indication e TRAI transmitting yellow remote alarm indication e RAIS receiving Alarm Indications Signal AIS failure state e TAIS transmitting AIS failure state e LOF receiving Loss of Frame LOF failure state e LOS receiving Loss of Signal LOS failure state e Loopback looping the received signal e TestCode receiving a test pattern e LowSignal low signal Name of the circuit associated with this line The current interval The number of line errored seconds LESs in the current interval An LES is a second in which one or more coding violations occurred or one or more LOS defects were detected The number of severely errored framing seconds SEFSs in the current interval An SEFS is a second with one or more OOF errors or an AIS defect The number of unavailable seconds UASs in the current interval The number of line coding violations LCVs in the current interval A line coding violation is a count of both bipolar violations BPVs and excessive zero EXZ error events 117374 C Rev 00 Pbit Status Circuit Interval PESs PSESs UASs PCVs Chit Stats Circuit Interval CESs CSESs UASs CCVs Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command Name of the circuit associated with this line The current interval The number of P bit errored seconds PESs in the current interval A PES is a second with one or more
417. scaavcasiabeaduunasionceniecixesscuncenecannach A 83 Default VC Parameters LEME E E A E AE E T IES E A 84 IFIP P aah Ss viecse iani EE E A E A A 94 PUTO PARITET irao e dada baia aE A 102 Adatan Host PARAINSTORS caa nds A 104 Appendix B Monitoring ATM Using the BCC show Command show atm interfaces aeee ere patos P reer errr re aiteaes PEET B 2 SS E E E R E E E E A E E A T B 3 A N EILA E D E evn Sucre ch asa E A A A A E T N E EE A E E E E A B 6 show atm signaling AT aa T a nran URN AT rere Faen aran a B 6 Show aiM Sa VES aiaa ENE EA B 7 AEE Se A A O E AA A N A A AA E E AE Clute ed B 8 show classicalp COMNGUIANION siicosrisiniseniidin ocena ann aE a B 9 cron SSSI al OE a ictindr cesarean nea Ep B 9 show classical ip stats 8 E E AT T na ee B 10 show Ie SIG TUG ssrin eia a ceed tacca E a decease ceed B 10 lyfe hy cp el pO eo eee eet een cone cee eee cere ce tere tent earn te meerenre tener renter Tener ret B 11 show dsx3 current ET PE Pere rere PE EE EEE TT ionnas B 12 SS D a a viduanaiy taqeaann adioannaina aeaei naan seniad peep TA RaA UE B 15 Sr TNS Sick A A E E A E SEE E E TA E B 19 show lane configuration sinanisiissicna aana aa B 20 TENN ine OWA NES a a a B 20 show lane le arp E PE E E E E E A PEA B 21 e A ea a Ol EIA O NA A A AA A N A B 22 ALAE e A war A T SA E ue ra AE deh ie O Maa ed A E E a B 23 Me TNS WN e A E E Nese E E E E A E E E A B 23 show lane SEVES acrea han aa a A B 2
418. ser Patt eee PEATE E A PERT BG Selecting a LEC Configuration Mode seranrismaisansen aaa One Assigning an Emulated LAN NAME ssccateccccciccrusse scr rascesqeinserunnnesdencarssnaiousersadaanneas 8 10 Assigning an Emulated LAN Type scsutccsventcetasvosiutacveckndncnrsunieecardeneieaeietadinerenlenies 8 12 Specifying an Emulated LAN Segment ID ssiiscisirirssisiisisieniasnnieina ia 8 14 Disabling and Reenabling the LANE Client ere Satoh E E E T aa PAT 8 15 SPEAN AN OWNEE seriinin A aS 8 16 Posing ATM LES AGIrESSES vasna bravaad oa a ai e A oE kaa Ea 8 17 Disabling and Reenabling a LES Entry araen RN aei erent eaoaai eet 8 19 Ghangma the LE Sarver Name arse ce te as ings a ht acd aN aA 8 21 Inserting a LES Address Out Of Sequence eetcecceceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeteaeseaeeeees 8 22 Modiymoa a LES EU drii inaron a EAR 8 23 ee ia a LE SERIY aranira NNA 8 24 Setting the Maximum Data Frame Size AT beks Goit TE a 8 26 Controlling Unknown Frame DIStHDUTON sisisriciirndairasisini iaeoa 8 28 Setting a Maximum Unknown Frame Count sssssssseeesseessseesessssessressrnnssrenssrrsssnnsens 8 28 Specifying a Maximum Unknown Frame Time sabres EE E ere P 8 30 Modifying LEC Timers and Retry Counters seeesseeseeeeseessseesrersrressrresrrrssrrrssrrser ren OOOO Seting ihe Connal TMEQUE Aruaruia ai aaa Aka ERANO k AARNA 8 32 Disabling and Reenabling the VCC Timeout Period c cccceeeeseeetetteeeeseeeeees 8
419. sh interval for that client expires 900 second default This loss of connectivity occurs only when the client is configured to autogenerate the ATM address user part see Disabling and Reenabling User Part Autogeneration on page 7 4 for additional information about autogenerating ATM addresses 1 32 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM Configuring an ATM Address for an Adjacent Host An adjacent host is a network device on the local LIS You must configure an ATM address for all hosts on the LIS that do not use ATMARP For a description of the IP parameters required for creating adjacent hosts in a classical IP over ATM environment see Adjacent Host Parameters on page A 104 For more information about adding editing and deleting adjacent hosts see Configuring IP Services ATM LAN Emulation Concepts LAN emulation allows virtual communication of traditional LAN devices and applications over an ATM network An ATM network can run one or more emulated LANs However each emulated LAN is independent of the others and devices cannot communicate directly across emulated LAN boundaries Note Communication between emulated LANs is possible through routers and bridges only possibly implemented on the same end station This section provides general information about LAN emulation as described by the ATM Forum For more information about LAN emulation refer to the ATM Forum do
420. solution navigate to the signaling prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 and enter signaling timer resolution lt value gt value is the amount of time in tenths of a second that you want the signaling timer resolution to use For example the following command sets the signaling timer resolution to 2048 signaling 11 1 signaling timer resolution 2048 signaling 11 1 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Defining Signaling Timers Caution Bay Networks strongly recommends that you use default timer values These values work properly under most ATM network conditions However if you do change any of the timer values you must also change the values at the other end of the UNI that is at the local ATM switch You can change the default values for signaling timers Table 5 1 provides the BCC name Site Manager name default value range and description for each timer Table 5 1 Signaling Timer Descriptions Site BCC Manager Default Name Name Value Range Description setup tx timer T303 4 1 to 24 Specifies the Setup Sent timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit initiates a call connection request by sending a SETUP message over the signaling VC The Setup Sent timer stops when the circuit receives a CONNECT message indicating connection a CALL PROCEEDING message indicating that the network received the SETUP message or a RELEASE COMPLETE message
421. specified range 117374 C Rev 00 11 19 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To change the transmit SCR for the default VC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Default VC The Default VC Record Parameters window opens 5 Set the Xmit Sustainable Cell Rate parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 87 6 Click on OK You return to the LDP Session Records List window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit MPLS Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the Default VC Transmit MBS The transmit maximum burst size MBS specifies the maximum number of sequential cells that the default VC can transmit at the peak cell rate before the VC must relinquish bandwidth to other VCs By default the MBS is set to 40 cells However you can set the MBS to any value from 1 to 65 535 When you set the MBS you should select a value larger than the largest packet that the default VC can transmit that is the size of the Maximum AAL CPCS
422. ssible unit of data that the PVC service record can transmit By default the service record allows an MTU size of 4608 octets This value can handle most packet sizes The MTU size is typically determined by the driver However you can override the driver default to accommodate connection to devices that require different MTU sizes You can set the MTU to any value from 1 to 9188 octets Note Some ATM devices do not negotiate MTU size When connecting to such a device Bay Networks recommends that you specify an MTU size of 9188 octets for full compatibility with RFC 1577 117374 C Rev 00 6 3 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using the BCC To change the MTU value of the ATM service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 pvc service boston and enter mtu lt integer gt integer is the MTU size in octets that you want the PVC service record to use For example the following command sets the service record MTU size to 9188 octets pvc service boston mtu 9188 pvc service boston Using Site Manager To change the MTU size for a service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on
423. structions MIB Object ID Maximum AAL CPCS Transmit SDU Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling gt Sig VC or Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI gt ILMI VC 4608 1 to 65535 Specifies the maximum AAL CPCS SDU size in bytes that this VC supports in the transmit direction Enter the maximum packet size that you intend this VC to transmit Bay Networks recommends that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes Most packets fall well within this limit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 17 Maximum AAL CPCS Receive SDU Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling gt Sig VC or Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI gt ILMI VC 4608 1 to 65535 Specifies the maximum AAL CPCS SDU size in bytes that this VC supports in the receive direction Enter the maximum packet size that you intend this VC to receive Bay Networks recommends that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes Most packets fall well within this limit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 5 1 18 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters ATM Signaling AAL Parameters Signaling AAL SAAL parameters define the connection and timer settings the router uses to maintain a switched connection SAAL provides reliable transport of signaling messages wit
424. t Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 49 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To change the ILMI control VC MBS value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters Interface ILMI window opens 4 Click on ILMI VC The ATM Control VC for ILMI window opens 5 Set the Xmit Burst Size cells parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 61 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 50 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Modifying the Maximum AAL CPCS SDU Size The maximum AAL CPCS SDU value defines the maximum packet size you intend the control VC to transmit or receive Setting the Transmit SDU Size Bay Networks suggests that you accept the default value of 4608 bytes for the maximum AAL CPCS SDU size that the control VC sup
425. t ID Site Manager Parameters T399 Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 14 1 to 84 Specifies the Add Party Sent timer value in seconds This timer applies to multipoint connections only and begins when the circuit sends an ADD PARTY message to a party the receiver of the message on the network The Add Party Sent timer stops when the circuit receives an ADD PARTY ACKNOWLEDGE message indicating the connection to the party an ADD PARTY REJECT message indicating the inability to add the party or a RELEASE message indicating the inability to add the party and the absence of any remaining parties If the timer expires before the circuit receives an ADD PARTY ACKNOWLEDGE ADD PARTY REJECT or RELEASE message the circuit clears the party Accept the default 14 or enter a value from 1 to 84 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 35 Num Restarts ReXmitted Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt ATM gt ATM Signaling and Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt ATM Signaling 3 1 to 100 Specifies the number of RESTART messages retransmitted before the link is considered down Accept the default 3 or enter a value from 1 to 100 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 7 1 36 117374 C Rev 00 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options
426. t the PVC level overrides the encapsulation type assigned at the service record level Note If you select NULL the router interprets this as virtual channel based multiplexing which is not supported for bridging For additional information about assigning data encapsulation types see Data Encapsulation Methods on page 1 12 Using the BCC To change the data encapsulation for a PVC navigate to the PVC prompt for example box atm 11 1 pve service boston pve 11 1 0 32 and enter encapsulation lt type gt type is one of the following data encapsulation types e Ilic snap e null nipid 6 20 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs For example the following command changes the data encapsulation type for the PVC to NLPID encapsulation pvc 11 1 0 32 encapsulation nipid pvc 11 1 0 32 Using Site Manager To change the PVC data encapsulation type complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the PVC service record that you want to modify Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 6 Click on t
427. t to modify 5 Click on PVC The ATM Virtual Channel Link window opens 6 Click on the PVC that you want to modify 7 Set one or more of the following parameters OAM Loopback Enable OAM Loopback Cell Interval OAM Threshold 1 OAM Threshold 2 OAM Alarm Enable See the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 76 8 Click on Apply 9 Click on Done You return to the ATM Service Records List window 10 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window continued 6 22 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing PVC Service Records and PVCs Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 11 Click on Done System responds You return to the Select Connection Type window 12 Click on Done Copying a PVC You return to the Configuration Manager window Note When copying a hybrid PVC the copy function copies all existing PVC specific information to the new PVC However this function does not copy the protocols that you selected and configured for that PVC You must select and configure any protocols that you want to operate over the newly copied PVC To copy an existing PVC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens
428. t window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Enabling and Disabling LAN Emulation Version 2 By default LAN Emulation Version 2 is disabled on a service record However you can enable or disable this function at any time If the LEC operates in an MPOA environment you must enable the LAN Emulation Version 2 function Otherwise disable the function To enable or disable the LAN Emulation Version 2 function complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify continued 117374 C Rev 00 8 49 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Click on LEC System responds The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens 6 Set the LAN Emulation Version 2 parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 36 7 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window
429. table for the interface 2 Receives the ATM address network prefix from the switch Combines this network prefix with its own user part suffix 4 Transmits the entire address to the switch Disabling and Reenabling ILMI By default ILMI is enabled on an interface when you enable signaling However you can disable and reenable ILMI on an interface at any time Using the BCC To disable ILMI navigate to the ILMI prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi 11 1 and enter ilmi disabled For example the following command disables ILMI on the ATM connector ilmi 11 1 lmi disabled ilmi 11 1 To reenable ILMI navigate to the ILMI prompt and enter ilmi enabled For example the following command reenables ILMI on the ATM connector ilmi 11 1 ilmi enabled ilmi 11 1 5 26 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signaling To disable or reenable ILMI on an interface complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management Interface ILMI The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Set the Enable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 55 5 Click
430. taining adequate procedures apart from the Software to reconstruct lost or altered files data or programs 4 Limitation of liability INNO EVENT WILL BAY NETWORKS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY COST OF SUBSTITUTE PROCUREMENT SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM INACCURATE OR LOST DATA OR LOSS OF USE OR PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF BAY NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY OF BAY NETWORKS RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE OR THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO BAY NETWORKS FOR THE SOFTWARE LICENSE 5 Government Licensees This provision applies to all Software and documentation acquired directly or indirectly by or on behalf of the United States Government The Software and documentation are commercial products licensed on the open market at market prices and were developed entirely at private expense and without the use of any U S Government funds The license to the U S Government is granted only with restricted rights and use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause of FAR 52 227 19 and the limitations set out in this license for civilian agencies and subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DFARS 252 22
431. te see the ATM Forum UNI specification Accept the default network prefix or if the LES resides in a different ATM domain enter the network prefix for that domain 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 10 1 5 117374 C Rev 00 A 37 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID LE Server ATM Address User Part Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC gt LES None 00000000000000 to FFFFFFFFFFFFFF Specifies the user part suffix of the ATM address for a LAN emulation server LES on your network The user part suffix consists of a 6 byte end station identifier and a 1 byte selector field The user part and the network prefix form a complete ATM address Enter the ATM address user part of the LES 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 10 1 5 LE Server Name Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC gt LES Numeric value assigned by the router Any alphanumeric string Assigns a unique name to the LAN emulation server LES Accept the LES name provide by the router or change the name to rename the server 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 10 1 6 A 38 117374 C Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters ATM Signaling Parameters Parameter Path Default Opt
432. te Manager software For information about upgrading BayRS and Site Manager see the upgrading guide for your version of BayRS 117374 C Rev 00 xxiii Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Text Conventions This guide uses the following text conventions angle brackets lt gt Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is ping lt p_address gt you enter ping 192 32 10 12 bold text Indicates text that you need to enter and command names and options Example Enter show ip alerts routes Example Use the dinfo command braces Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where there is more than one option You must choose only one of the options Do not type the braces when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you must enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes brackets Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip interfaces alerts you can enter either show ip interfaces or show ip interfaces alerts xxiv 117374 C Rev 00 Preface ellipsis points Indicate that you repeat the last element of the command as needed Example If the command syntax is ethernet 2 1 lt parameter gt lt value gt
433. tegory The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line A historical breakdown of intervals including e The current interval incomplete All but the last two intervals that is all intervals except the current interval and the previous interval The previous interval that is the last complete interval All of the intervals total The number of P bit errored seconds PESs for each interval category The number of P bit severely errored seconds PSESs for each interval category The number of unavailable seconds UASs for each interval category The number of P bit coding violations PCVs for each interval category 117374 C Rev 00 B 31 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Chit Stats Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Interval CESs CSESs UASs CCVs FarEnd Cbit Stats Slot lt Module gt Conn Circuit Interval CESs CSESs UASs CCVs The slot module and connector number of the SONET circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line A historical breakdown of intervals including e The current interval incomplete All but the last two intervals that is all intervals except the current interval and the previous interval e The previous interval that is the last complete interval e All of the intervals total The number of C bit errored seconds CESs for each interval category The number of
434. terface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify 5 Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens 6 Set the Configuration Mode parameter to Manual Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 28 7 Click on LES The ATM LES List window opens 8 Click on Add The LANE Redundancy window opens 9 Set the following parameters 10 LE Server ATM Address Network Prefix LE Server ATM Address User Part Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 37 Click on OK You return to the ATM LES List window 11 Click on Done You return to the LAN Emulation Parameters window 12 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window 13 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 14 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 15 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 8 18 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Disabling and Reenabling a LES Entry By default you enable a LES entry when you add it to the service record However you can disable or reenable a specific
435. tes The MPOA Service Record window opens 4 Set the MPS Address Generate Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 68 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Note This parameter also appears in the MPS List window and the MPS Configuration Parameters window The parameter appears in these locations for display purposes only You must configure this parameter at the service record level 117374 C Rev 00 9 3 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Specifying the MPS Control ATM Address To exist within the ATM environment the MPS must be part of a service record In automatic mode the MPS uses the information from the service record to obtain address information from the ILMI address registration In manual mode however you must assign the ATM address that the MPS uses To fully specify the MPS control ATM address you must set the following address parameters e Control ATM address network prefix e Control ATM address user part Note These parameters also appears in the MPS List window for display purposes only You must configure the control ATM address at the service record level Setting the Control ATM Address Network Prefix The control ATM address network prefix specifies the ATM domain of whic
436. the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 33 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Disabling and Reenabling the VCC Timeout Period When you enable the VCC timeout period the default setting the LEC can release any unused data direct or multicast send VCCs after the VCC timeout period expires The ATM drivers provide a VCC timeout period of 20 minutes If you disable the VCC timeout period the LEC does not release any unused data direct or multicast send VCCs Using the BCC To disable the VCC timeout period navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork and enter vcec timeout disabled For example the following command disables the VCC timeout period on LANE service record newyork lec service newyork vec timeout disabled lec service newyork To reenable the VCC timeout period navigate to the service record prompt and enter vcc timeout enabled For example the following command reenables the VCC timeout period on LANE service record newyork lec service newyork vec timeout enabled lec service newyork 8 34 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To disable or reenable the VCC timeout period complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify Th
437. the RESTART message to return all VCs on the interface to the idle condition The Restart Request Sent on Interface timer stops when the circuit receives a RESTART ACKNOWLEDGE message from the network If the timer expires before the circuit receives a RESTART ACKNOWLEDGE message the circuit can retransmit the RESTART message see Setting the Number of Allowable Restart Messages on page 5 22 If the circuit still does not receive a response the circuit enters the null state until the appropriate maintenance action is taken continued 117374 C Rev 00 5 17 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Table 5 1 Signaling Timer Descriptions continued BCC Name restart request tx channel timer Site Manager Name T316c Default Value 120 Range 1 to 720 Description Specifies the Restart Request Sent on Channel timer value in seconds This timer begins when the circuit sends a RESTART message to the network The circuit uses the RESTART message to return this individual VC on the interface to the idle condition The Restart Request Sent on Channel timer stops when the circuit receives a RESTART ACKNOWLEDGE message from the network If the timer expires before the circuit receives a RESTART ACKNOWLEDGE message the circuit can retransmit the RESTART message see Setting the Number of Allowable Restart Messages on page 5 22 If the circuit still does not receive a response th
438. the prefix and the format the prefix uses For more information about the AFI byte refer to the ATM Forum UNI specification Entering an ATM address network prefix is optional If you do not enter a network prefix in the specified range the service record accepts the first prefix value that it receives from the switch Using the BCC To assign an ATM address network prefix to a classical IP service record navigate to the service record prompt for example box atm 11 1 classical ip service dallas and enter network prefix lt address gt address is the ATM address network prefix that you want the VCs on the service record to use For example the following command defines the ATM address network prefix on the service record as 39000000000000000000000000 classical ip service dallas network prefix 39000000000000000000000000 classical ip service dallas 7 6 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Classical IP Service Records Using Site Manager To assign an ATM address network prefix to a classical IP service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM 3 Click on Service Attributes The Edit ATM Connector window opens The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the cl
439. these parameters provide information to LDP about the static routes that you configure Note You can configure IP static routes before or after you configure MPLS For information on static routes or how to configure them see Configuring IP Services The following parameters define the use of static routes by MPLS Enabling and Disabling Static Routes By default static routes are disabled on the MPLS interface Accept the default Disable if you do not want MPLS to use LDP static routes over the interface Specify Enable for MPLS to use LDP static routes over the interface To enable and disable LDP static routes complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on MPLS The Edit MPLS Connector window opens 3 Click on LDP The LDP Session Records List window opens 4 Click on Static Route The LDP Static Route List window opens continued 117374 C Rev 00 11 29 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Select the static route that you want to modify System responds 10 Click on Done 6 Set the Enable Disable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 83 7 Click on OK You return to the LDP Static
440. timer to 6 seconds ilmi 11 1 get next timer 6 ilmi 11 1 Using Site Manager To change the ILMI Get Next Request timer value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Interim Local Management The ATM ILMI Signaling Parameters Interface ILMI window opens 4 Set the ILMI Get Next Timer parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 57 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the ILMI Get Next Request Retry Count The ILMI Get Next Request retry count specifies the number of times the circuit can retransmit the ILMI GET_NEXT_REQUEST message before it considers the link down By default the circuit can retransmit three ILMI GET_NEXT_REQUEST messages However you can set the number of retries to a value from 1 to 100 117374 C Rev 00 5 31 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using the BCC To change the ILMI Get Next Request retry count value navigate to the ILMI prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi 11 1 and enter get next retry
441. tion Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 3 21 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Configuring the MPS To configure the MPS on the router complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ATM link module interface ATM1 The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Server Parameters window opens 4 Click on OK The MPOA Service Record window opens 5 Click on MPS The MPS List window opens 6 Click on Add The MPS Configuration Parameters window opens 7 Click on OK You return to the MPS List window 8 Click on Mapping The LEC MPS Mapping List window opens 9 Click on any LEC that you want to map to the MPS 10 Click on Mapping Site Manager maps the LEC to the MPS 11 Repeat steps 8 and 9 to map any additional LECs 12 Click on Done You return to the MPS List window 13 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 14 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 15 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 16 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 3 22 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Starting ATM Router Redu
442. tion on page A 70 7 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Specifying a LECS ATM Address You can specify which LECS you want the MPS to use when obtaining parameter information Entering this ATM address is optional if you do not enter an address the MPS uses the well known LECS ATM address to open a configuration VCC To specify a LECS ATM address complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes The MPOA Service Record window opens Click on MPS The MPS List window opens continued 9 8 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify System responds 6 Set the LECS ATM Address parameter Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions for the LECS ATM Addr Network Prefix and LECS ATM Address User Part parameters on page A 70 7 Click on
443. tions Function Instructions MIB Object ID Emulated LAN Name Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC Default ELAN Leave blank or enter up to 128 alphanumeric characters Specifies the name of the emulated LAN that this LE client joins when it joins an emulated LAN Clients that use automatic configuration mode use this parameter in their LE_LCONFIGURE_REQUEST frames Clients that use manual configuration mode use this parameter in their LE_JOIN_REQUEST frames Entering an ELAN name is optional If you choose not to enter an ELAN name the LAN emulation configuration server LECS assigns the LE client to an ELAN for this domain However because some switches do not support a default emulated LAN Bay Networks recommends that you assign an ELAN name to the LE client Either leave this parameter blank or enter an ELAN name up to 128 alphanumeric characters that identifies the emulated LAN you want this client to join 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 8 Control Timeout Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt LEC 5 5 to 32767 Specifies the timeout period used for timing out most request response control frame interactions Accept the default 5 or enter a value from 5 to 32767 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 5 20 1 1 10 A 30 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function I
444. tions Accept the default Enable if you want traffic to flow on this service record and its VCs Set to Disable if you do not want traffic to flow on this service record or any of its VCs MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 2 1 2 117374 C Rev 00 A 15 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Data Encapsulation Type Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt Add LANE signaling enabled or LLC SNAP signaling disabled LANE LLC SNAP NLPID NULL Identifies the data encapsulation type for this service record Select a data encapsulation type as follows LLC SNAP NLPID or NULL for service records containing PVCs LLC SNAP for service records containing hybrid PVCs LANE for service records containing SVCs over which you want to run LAN emulation LLC SNAP or NULL for service records containing SVCs over which you want to run classical IP RFC 1577 If you select NULL the router interprets this as virtual channel based multiplexing which is not supported for bridging Select a data encapsulation type 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 2 1 5 Virtual Connection Type Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Service Attributes gt Add SVC signaling enabled or PVC s
445. tions accept the default value Enable to enable negative caching Otherwise select Disable to disable negative caching 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 24 A 100 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Server Negative TTL Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt NhrpNetTable 10 1 to 65535 Specifies the length of time in seconds that the NHRP server will remember that a particular DNS record does not exist before it queries the DNS server again In most configurations accept the default value Otherwise enter a value up to 65535 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 1 1 25 Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt NHRP gt Interfaces Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables NHRP on an ATM interface Accept the default value Enable to enable NHRP on the ATM interface Select Disable to disable NHRP on the interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 23 2 1 2 117374 C Rev 00 A 101 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services ATMARP Parameters This section describes ATM specific IP parameters for implementing classical IP over ATM For additional information about ATMARP see Configuring IP Services Parameter ATM ARP Mode Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Interfaces Default Client Options Client
446. tipoint connections to 2 signaling 11 1 parties multipoint maximum 2 signaling 11 1 Using Site Manager To modify the maximum number of parties allowed in multipoint connections complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens Set the Max Parties in Multipoint Connections parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 42 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window continued 5 12 117374 C Rev 00 Setting the Customizing Signaling Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Minimum Memory Threshold The minimum memory threshold defines the minimum percentage of buffer memory required to enable a new call The default value is 20 percent but you can specify a percentage from 10 to 100 percent in increments of 10 for example 10 percent 30 percent and so on Using the BCC To change the minimum memory threshold navigate to the signaling prompt for
447. tomizing 9 1 deleting 9 19 enabling disabling 9 6 starting 3 15 MPS Config Mode parameter A 70 MPS Ctrl ATM Address Generating Mode parameter A 71 MTU defining 4 3 6 3 parameter description A 20 multicast packet support purpose 1 27 multiprotocol encapsulation support 1 12 Multi Protocol over ATM See MPOA N Next Hop Interface Addr parameter A 104 NHRP parameters descriptions of A 94 to A 101 NHRP Request Path parameter A 94 NLPID See also data encapsulation NLPID defined 1 14 No Response Timer modifying 5 62 parameter description A 65 NULL encapsulation See also data encapsulation NULL encapsulation defined 1 14 Num Messages Sec for Call Pacing parameter A 54 117374 C Rev 00 Num Restarts ReXmitted parameter description A 53 setting 5 22 Num Stat Enquiries ReXmitted parameter description A 54 setting 5 23 O OAM Alarm Enable parameter A 78 OAM Loopback Cell Interval parameter A 76 OAM Loopback Enable parameter A 76 OAM parameters changing 6 22 OAM parameters descriptions of A 76 OAM Threshold 1 parameter A 77 OAM Threshold 2 parameter A 77 operational state LAN emulation 1 38 Operations and Management parameters descriptions of A 76 Override NBMA Address parameter NHRP A 98 Owner parameter description A 27 specifying 8 16 P pacing calls 5 25 parameter descriptions Site Manager A 1 parties defining 5 9 Path Switching Delay parameter descripti
448. tor window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 10 2 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing ATM Router Redundancy Where to Go Next Use the following table to determine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about ATM concepts Chapter 1 Learn about MPLS concepts Chapter 2 Start ATM or MPLS Chapter 3 Change default settings for ATM interface Chapter 4 parameters Change default settings for ATM signaling Chapter 5 parameters Change default settings for ATM PVC service record Chapter 6 and PVC parameters Change default settings for classical IP service Chapter 7 record parameters Change default settings for LAN Emulation client Chapter 8 service record parameters Change default settings for Multi Protocol over ATM Chapter 9 server parameters Change default settings for MPLS parameters Chapter 11 Obtain information about Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B Configure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 117374 C Rev 00 10 3 Chapter 11 Customizing MPLS Configuration Bay Networks supports Multiprotocol Label Switching MPLS MPLS allows for the association of routes or aggregations of routes to a specific label This label is assigned and managed by the Label Distribution Protocol LDP For general info
449. tributes window opens 3 Set the DS3 Line Build Out parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 10 4 Click on OK You return to the Select Connection Type window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Turning DS 3 Scrambling On and Off Some ATM network equipment can exhibit sensitivity to certain bit patterns for example 101010 or 000000 This sensitivity can cause problems on the ATM network Turning on the DS 3 scrambling function the default setting randomizes the bit pattern in the cell payload sufficiently to guarantee cell synchronization Although some equipment can operate with scrambling disabled Bay Networks recommends that you scramble the cell payload Caution ATM devices with different settings for scrambling cannot communicate For example if you configure a router to enable scrambling and configure a hub to disable scrambling the router and hub cannot communicate 4 12 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing an ATM Interface Using the BCC To turn off DS 3 scrambling navigate to the atm prompt for example box atm 11 1 and enter scrambling off For example the following command turns off scrambling on the ATM connector atm 11 1 scrambling off atm 11 1 To turn scrambling back on navigate to the atm prompt and enter scrambling on For example the following command turns the ATM connector scrambling bac
450. ts upon transmission of a sequenced data PDU and resets to 0 upon transmission of a POLL PDU By default the maximum poll data value sets the poll data state to 25 However you can set this parameter to any value from 1 to 120 Using the BCC To change the maximum poll data value navigate to the SSCOP prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 sscop 11 1 and enter pd before poll maximum lt integer gt integer is the count value that you want the controller to use For example the following command changes the maximum poll data value to 50 sscop 11 1 pd before poll maximum 50 sscop 11 1 Using Site Manager To change the maximum poll data value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Signaling AAL SAAL The ATM Signaling AAL Records List window opens 4 Set the Max PD Before Poll parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 66 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window continued 117374 C Rev 00 5 65 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type
451. ttributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Maximum Data Frame Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 29 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 8 27 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Controlling Unknown Frame Distribution A frame is considered unknown when the LE client does not recognize the destination MAC address An unknown frame goes to the broadcast and unknown server BUS for distribution Setting unknown frame variables helps to limit unknown frame traffic to the BUS To control the distribution of unknown frames you can specify the following e Maximum number of unknown frames that the LEC can send e Amount of time allowed to send the unknown frames to the BUS Setting a Maximum Unknown Frame Count By default a LEC can send only one unknown frame to the BUS within a specified unknown frame time see the next section Specifying a Maximum Unknown Frame Time However you can allow a LEC to send up to 10 unknown frames to the BUS within the maximum unknow
452. tween poll protocol data unit PDU transmissions The poll timer ensures that the receiver continues to return a solicited status STAT PDU to the sender on a regular basis The timely receipt of STAT PDUs restarts the poll timer and allows for more efficient transmission error recovery Accept the default 7 or enter a value from 1 to 120 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 8 1 9 Keep Alive Timer Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Signaling AAL SAAL 20 1 to 120 Specifies the SSCOP keepalive timer value in tenths of a second This value sets the allowable time between poll PDU transmissions if there are no pending sequence data SD PDUs The keepalive timer is generally greater than the poll timer and greater than the length of one round trip delay Accept the default 20 or enter a value from 1 to 120 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 8 1 10 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters No Response Timer Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Signaling AAL SAAL 70 1 to 120 Specifies the SSCOP no response timer value in tenths of a second This value sets the allowable time between the receipt of STAT PDUs So as not to interrupt the flow of data SSCOP does not require a reply t
453. tx burst size lt integer gt integer is the MBS value that you want the signaling VC to use For example the following command changes the MBS value to 80 cells signaling vc 11 1 0 5 tx burst size 80 signaling vc 11 1 0 5 To change the MBS value for ILMI VCs navigate to the ILMI VC prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 ilmi vce 11 1 0 16 and enter tx burst size lt integer gt integer is the MBS value that you want the ILMI VC to use For example the following command changes the MBS value to 80 cells ilmi vc 11 1 0 16 tx burst size 80 ilmi vc 11 1 0 16 5 48 117374 C Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Signaling To change the signaling control VC MBS value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on ATM Signaling The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Click on Sig VC The ATM Control VC for Signaling window opens 5 Set the Xmit Burst Size cells parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 61 6 Click on Done You return to the ATM Signaling Parameters window 7 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 8 Click on Done You return to the Selec
454. type that you want the LEC service record to use For example the following command defines a LEC service record with the name newyork on ATM slot 5 connector 1 atm 5 1 lec service newyork encapsulation lec lec service newyork Adding PVCs You must add at least one PVC to a PVC service record for that service record to operate A PVC is defined by its VPI VCI pair A virtual path is a set of virtual channels between a common source and destination The virtual channels within a virtual path logically associate with a common identifier This identifier is called the virtual path identifier VPI and is part of the cell header A virtual channel is a logical connection between two communicating ATM entities Each virtual channel can carry a different protocol or traffic type The virtual channel transports cells that have a common identifier The identifier is called the virtual channel identifier VCI and is part of the cell header Note ATM does not allow duplicate VPI VCI pairs on the same physical interface that is on the same link module However duplicate VPI VCI pairs can exist on different physical interfaces that is on different link modules 117374 C Rev 00 3 5 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services To add a PVC to a PVC service record navigate to the ATM PVC service prompt and enter pvc vpi lt vpi_number gt vei lt vci_number gt vpi_number identifies the virtual path of the PVC The header
455. u plan to create more than 200 LSPs on one slot you must also increase the TCP window size to 65 535 bytes Enabling TCP To enable TCP complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds choose Protocols 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens 3 Choose TCP 2 Choose Global Protocols The Global Protocols menu opens The TCP menu opens 4 Choose Create TCP Site Manager enables TCP You return to the Configuration Manager window 3 38 117374 C Rev 00 Starting ATM ATM MPOA Server ATM Router Redundancy and MPLS Increasing the TCP Window Size To increase the TCP window size complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose Global Protocols The Global Protocols menu opens 3 Choose TCP 4 Choose Global The TCP menu opens The Edit TCP Global Parameters window opens Set the Max Window Size bytes parameter to 65 535 bytes Click on Help or see Configuring IP Services for details Choose OK Deleting MPLS from the Interface You return to the Configuration Manager window You cannot delete MPS globally from the router you must delete it from each individual interface To delete MPLS from the Interface using Site Manager
456. unt 2 lec service newyork Using Site Manager To change the maximum retry count complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify Click on ATM The Select Connection Type window opens The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens Set the Max Retry Count parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 32 continued 8 36 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Site Manager Procedure continued 9 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type You do this System responds List window 8 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window window Setting the Aging Time 10 Click on Done window You return to the Configuration Manager The aging time specifies the maximum amount of time that a LEC can maintain an entry in its LE_ARP cache without having to verify the relationship of that entry By default the LEC maintains entries for 300 seconds However you can set the aging time to a value from 10 to 300 seconds Using the BCC To change the
457. uration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes None XX000000000000000000000000 to XX FFFFRFRFRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF where XX 39 45 or 47 Specifies the network prefix of the ATM address for this MPOA service record The network prefix specifies the ATM domain of which any MPOA server will be a member The router uses the MPOA service record address information as a base when creating a new MPS The XX byte must be 39 45 or 47 This value defines the authority and format identifier AFI The AFI byte identifies the group responsible for allocating the prefix and the format the prefix uses For more information about the AFI byte see the ATM Forum UNI specification The router configures this value for you in automatic mode You have the option of configuring this value in manual mode Enter a network prefix manual mode only 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 5 A 68 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Ctrl ATM Addr User Part Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes None 00000000000000 to FFFFFFFFFFFFFF Specifies the user part suffix of the ATM address for the MPOA service record The user part suffix consists of a 6 byte end station identifie
458. user part autogeneration on the service record navigate to the LANE service record prompt and enter autogenerate enabled For example the following command reenables user part autogeneration on the service record newyork lec service newyork autogenerate enabled lec service newyork Using Site Manager To disable or reenable user part autogeneration on a LANE service record complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Select Connection Type window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you opens want to modify 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify 5 Set the User Part Autogeneration parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 17 6 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Entering an ATM Address Network Prefix The ATM address network prefix specifies the ATM domain of which the service record is a part This 13 byte portion of the ATM address can range from XX000000000000000000000000 to XXFF
459. ve again in the IP routing table 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 6 1 2 Parameter IP Adjacent Host Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Adjacent Hosts Default None Options Any valid IP address Function Specifies the IP address of the device that you want to configure as an adjacent host Instructions Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 6 1 3 Parameter Next Hop Interface Addr Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Adjacent Hosts Default 0 0 0 0 Options Any valid IP address Function Specifies the IP address of the router s network interface to the adjacent host Instructions Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 6 1 4 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters MAC Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt IP gt Adjacent Hosts None Depend on the data link you selected Specifies the MAC address of the adjacent host This value can be any of the following e A 48 bit physical address e A 64 bit SMDS address e An ATM VPI VCI pair for ATM PVCs e The ATM address of the ATM interface for ATM SVCs Enter the MAC address as a 12 digit hexadecimal number canonical format a 32 digit hexadecimal number SMDS a V
460. ved These VCs remain in an operational state as long as signaling is enabled on the ATM interface Because most ATM devices use these VPI VCI pairs for signaling Bay Networks recommends that you not change these values Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID ILMI Get Timer Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI 3 1 to 120 Specifies the ILMI Get Request timer value in seconds The Get Request timer sets the amount of time allowed to receive a GET_RESPONSE message after sending a GET_REQUEST message Accept the default 3 or enter a value from 1 to 120 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 9 1 13 A 56 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters ILMI Get Retry Count Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt Interim Local Management Interface ILMI 3 1 to 100 Specifies the number of retransmissions of the ILMI GET_REQUEST message before the link is considered down Accept the default 3 or enter a value from 1 to 100 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 23 1 9 1 14 ILMI Get Next Timer Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit
461. ver you can set this value from 1 to 120 minutes To set the default holding time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens 2 Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on MPOA Server Attributes 4 Click on MPS The MPOA Service Record window opens The MPS List window opens 5 Click on the MPS that you want to modify 6 Set the Default Holding Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 74 Click on Done You return to the MPOA Service Record window Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 9 16 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing MPOA Server Configuration Defining MPS Cache Values The MPS can contain cache information upon initialization and can accumulate this information during its operation Bay Networks provides control over this cache information 3 Caution The cache parameters use memory resources Use caution when setting higher values Setting the Initial Cache Size The initial cache size specifies the maximum number of cache units that
462. vices Using the BCC To change the maximum connection control value navigate to the SSCOP prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 sscop 11 1 and enter connect control maximum lt integer gt integer is the count value that you want the controller to use For example the following command changes the maximum connection control value to 6 sscop 11 1 connect control maximum 6 sscop 11 1 Using Site Manager To change the maximum connection control value complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens Click on Signaling AAL SAAL The ATM Signaling AAL Records List window opens Set the Max Connection Control parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 66 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 64 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Setting the SSCOP Maximum Poll Data Value The SSCOP maximum poll data value sets the maximum value of the poll data state variable before transmitting a POLL PDU The poll data state variable incremen
463. vironments where the dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical These conditions usually exist in private ATM networks LLC SNAP encapsulation is an alternative for environments in which it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if the ATM network supports only PVCs or if billing depends heavily on the number of simultaneous virtual circuits The choice of multiplexing methods that two ATM stations use to exchange connectionless network traffic depends on the type of virtual circuit involved e For PVCs you select the multiplexing method when you manually configure the connection 117374 C Rev 00 Understanding ATM MPOA ATM Router Redundancy and OAM e For SVCs the stations themselves negotiate the multiplexing method by sending B ISDN signaling messages These messages include low layer compatibility information that allows negotiation of AALS and the carried encapsulated protocol Note Routed and bridged PDUs are always encapsulated within the payload field of the AALS CPCS PDU regardless of the selected multiplexing method Selecting LLC SNAP Encapsulation When the same virtual circuit carries several protocols select LLC SNAP encapsulation LLC SNAP encapsulation attaches an LLC SNAP header before the PDU This header includes information that the receiving ATM station needs to properly process the incoming PDU For bridged PDUs this header als
464. w opens The ATM Signaling Parameters window opens 4 Set the Max Number of SVC Applications parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 40 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 5 8 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing Signaling Setting Connection Thresholds Connection thresholds allow you to control the number of point to point connections point to multipoint connections and parties in a multipoint connection allowed on the circuit at any given time Setting the Maximum Number of Point to Point Connections By default you can have up to 1000 simultaneous point to point connections on a circuit at any given time However you can specify a value from 0 to 32767 connections Using the BCC To change the maximum number of point to point connections navigate to the signaling prompt for example box atm 11 1 signaling 11 1 and enter point to point maximum lt nteger gt integer is a value from 0 to 32767 For example the following command sets the maximum number of point to point connections on the ATM circuit to 2000 signaling 11 1 point to point maximum 2000 signaling 11 1l 117374 C Rev 00 5 9 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Using Site Manager To modify the maximum number of point to poi
465. window To delete a LES navigate to the LES prompt for example box atm 11 1 lec service newyork les primary and enter delete For example the following command deletes the LES primary les primary delete lec service newyork 8 24 117374 C Rev 00 Customizing LAN Emulation Service Records and Clients Using Site Manager To delete a LES address complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ATM interface ATM1 that you want to modify The Select Connection Type window opens Click on ATM The Edit ATM Connector window opens 3 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 4 Click on the LANE service record that you want to modify 5 Click on LEC The LAN Emulation Parameters window opens 6 Click on LES The ATM LES List window opens 7 Click on the LES address that you want to delete The settings for this LES appear in the parameter boxes 8 Click on Delete 9 Click on Done You return to the LAN Emulation Parameters window 10 Click on OK You return to the ATM Service Records List window 11 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 12 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 13 Click on Done You return to the Configuratio
466. window opens The ATM Signaling AAL Records List window opens 4 Set the Max STAT PDU Elements parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 67 5 Click on Done You return to the Edit ATM Connector window 6 Click on Done You return to the Select Connection Type window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 117374 C Rev 00 5 67 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services Where to Go Next Use the following table to determine where to go next If you want to Go to Learn about ATM concepts Chapter 1 Learn about MPLS concepts Chapter 2 Start ATM or MPLS Chapter 3 Change default settings for ATM interface Chapter 4 parameters Change default settings for ATM PVC service record Chapter 6 and PVC parameters Change default settings for classical IP service Chapter 7 record parameters Change default settings for LAN Emulation client Chapter 8 service record parameters Change default settings for Multi Protocol over ATM Chapter 9 server parameters Change default settings for the ATM router Chapter 10 redundancy parameter Change default settings for MPLS parameters Chapter 11 Obtain information about Site Manager parameters Appendix A Monitor ATM using the BCC show commands Appendix B Configure NHRP for MPOA services Appendix C 5 68 117374 C Rev 00 Chapter 6 Customizing PVC Service Records
467. x Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS gt Add None XX000000000000000000000000 to XXFFFFFRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF where XX 39 45 or 47 Specifies the network prefix of the ATM address for the LECS that you want the MPOA server to use The network prefix specifies the ATM domain of which this MPOA server is a part The XX byte must be 39 45 or 47 This value defines the authority and format identifier AFI The AFI byte identifies the group responsible for allocating the prefix and the format the prefix uses For more information about the AFI byte see the ATM Forum UNI specification Enter the network prefix for the LECS you want the MPS to use 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 10 2 1 15 A 70 117374 C Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters LECS ATM Address User Part Configuration Manager gt Circuits gt Edit Circuits gt Edit gt ATM gt MPOA Server Attributes gt MPS gt Add None 00000000000000 to FFFFFFFFFFFFFF Specifies the user part suffix of the LECS The user part suffix consists of a 6 byte end station identifier and a 1 byte selector field The user part and the network prefix form a complete A
468. xport directly or indirectly the Software or related technical data or information without first obtaining any required export licenses or other governmental approvals Without limiting the foregoing Licensee on behalf of itself and its subsidiaries and affiliates agrees that it will not without first obtaining all export licenses and approvals required by the U S Government i export re export transfer or divert any such Software or technical data or any direct product thereof to any country to which such exports or re exports are restricted or embargoed under United States export control laws and regulations or to any national or resident of such restricted or embargoed countries or ii provide the Software or related technical data or information to any military end user or for any military end use including the design development or production of any chemical nuclear or biological weapons 9 General If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of the provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the state of California Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement contact Bay Networks Inc 4401 Great America Parkway PO Box 58185 Santa Clara California 95054 8185 LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND AGREES TO BE BOUND B
469. xt section Data Transmission for additional information about virtual paths 117374 C Rev 00 1 3 Configuring ATM and MPLS Services e Virtual channel identifier VCT The next 16 bits of the cell header that is the last half of byte 2 byte 3 and the first half of byte 4 contain the VCI The VCI specifies a virtual channel within the virtual path on the physical ATM link See the next section Data Transmission for additional information about virtual channels e Payload type PT The next 3 bits that is bits 5 through 7 of byte 4 indicate the type of information the cell is carrying for example user data or management information e Cell loss priority CLP The last bit of byte 4 indicates the priority of the cell and whether the network can discard the cell under heavy traffic conditions Setting the bit to 1 indicates the network may discard the cell if necessary e Header error control HEC The last byte of the header field contains the HEC Its primary function is to guard against misdelivery of cells due to header or single bit errors However the HEC does not gauge the quality of the data in the information field Cell Information Field Following the 5 byte cell header is a 48 byte information field containing user data The ATM adaptation layer AAL organizes the data in this field See ATM Layers on page 1 6 for additional information about the AAL Data Transmission Data transmission
470. y eenreRny Recent 1 38 Operational State eee eines feioi re T ET hoses eeel 1 38 Multi Protocol over ATM CANCE DIS disc pie cceaitinseascatvea nin NAAA 1 39 MPOA Logical CHINAS sriniesaainisa a a aa 1 39 MPOA Basit EEMO S iriri a A aE 1 40 Establishing a Network Cut TRrOugh aisiriasmaisnisasrnass 1 41 ATM Router Redundancy Concepts PERT T T iR Geiis ee 1 43 PVC Operations and Management Concepts c ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeteeeeeeseaeeeeeneeee 1 44 CARI Reis 02h Qo eeeeenrete rene meee emt Som rent rete oor rem trr nT cennr nr 1 45 OAM Alarms Perr ree a P E E PF acne tatoa PA 1 45 For Mors MOET anaa a a a A 1 46 e TO CEL EEI SANN IETA EA ANI N E O OAE AE AE 1 47 Chapter 2 Understanding MPLS MPES General Uy eet Vac LS eee eee eee a a 2 2 MPLS System Overview ce E E EE E T paidi ET 2 3 Label Distibuton EMI ascsranneni a 2 4 MPLS Laber Manage MEn sicrniisiiniennaa a aS RT 2 4 FPOPMARONIG orsina dceusbienSceasibiedceadsbenis dadebbiivencdeaeiad acebbiinecensaniaeue 2 4 The MPLS SIE cca aeatciaasivesind passer siviadeni masa sesiilaasveniiadiveniunsaxenniiadwenad sawepnnd saansbeadels 2 5 Label Switching Router patie cree epics iene PEPE donnin 2 6 Label Edge ROGI sicisctsntccctcomredua i aorar e E 2 6 Se eela ea FP TNS E E A E A ET 2 7 For More Information 0 mals Ar ere ee orea Reems re P T 2 7 Where to Co No horien S 2 8 117374 C Rev 00 vii Chapter 3 St

Avaya Configuring ATM and MPLS Services User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents